N - Technical Spec. 110 Rev. E (IFP) - 110-2009-19

SPECIFICATIONS FOR SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION (SCR) SYSTEM

KPE SPECIFICATION 110

MARSH LANDING GENERATING STATION CONTRA COSTA COUNTY, CALIFORNIA

KPE PROJECT NO. 2009-019

ISSUED: November 1, 2010

REVISION E – Issued for Final Proposal

KIEWIT POWER ENGINEERS Engineers • Consultants

Corporate Office: 9401 Renner Boulevard

Lenexa • Kansas 66219 • USA PHN 913-928-7000 • FAX 913-689-4000

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 TOC-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TITLE Pages Revision P Proposal.................................................................................... P-1 – P-5..................... D PD Proposal Data ...................................................................... PD-1 – PD-3.................. DE FD Fill-in Data ........................................................................ FD-1 – FD-56.................. DE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A General Description and Scope of Work ............ GR-A-1 – GR-A-1413.................. DE B Engineering Data and Submittal Schedule ........... GR-B-1 –GR-B-1320.................. DE Table SDS - Submittal Delivery Schedule.................................. 3 pages.................. DE C Shipping Requirements ............................................. GR-C-1 –GR-C-45.................. DE D Quality Assurance and Quality Control ................... GR-D-1 –GR-D-56.................. DE TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS E1 Motors-Induction Squirrel Cage Type ............................ E1-1 –E1-2328.................. DE E2 Seller Furnished Controls and Wiring .............................. E2-1 –E2-911.................. DE E3 Valve Motor Operators ........................................................ E3-1 –E3-3.................. DE M1 General Mechanical Requirements ............................... M1-1-M1-1820 ................... DE M2 General Instrumentation Requirements for Skid-Mounted and Seller-Engineered Systems .......... M2-1 –M2-1112 ................... DE S1 Wind, Seismic and SnowStructural Loading and Design ... S1-1 –S1-46.................. DE 05125 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication and Supply ............................................. 05125-1 – 05125-6.................. DE 15110 Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System ..... 15110-1 – 15110-1924.................. DE Table EDR – Engineering Design Requirements ....................... 2 pages..................... D 15600.5 Pipe Welding ....................................................... 15600.5-1 – 15600.5-4.................. DE APPENDIX A Combustion Turbine Exhaust Conditions .................................. 2 pages................... E*

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 TOC-2 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX B Plot Plan & Site Plan................................................................... 3 pages................... E* APPENDIX C Performance Guarantees ............................................................. 5 pages................... E* APPENDIX D Access Requirements .................................................................. 2 pages................... E* APPENDIX E Tagging Requirements ................................................................ 4 pages................... E* APPENDIX F CT Exhaust System Interface Requirements .............................. 3 pages................... E* APPENDIX G Exhaust Velocity Profile ........................................................... 60 pages..................... D CFD Data Files:

o Single Piece Exhaust 44.6F.xls (native file included electronically in previous spec) o Single Piece Exhaust 59F.xls (native file included electronically in previous spec) o Single Piece Exhaust 59F_50%load_with bleed on.xls (native file included electronically

in previous spec) o Single Piece Exhaust 120F.xls (native file included electronically in previous spec) o Single Piece Exhaust -5F.xls (native file included electronically in previous spec)

APPENDIX H Preliminary SCR & Stack Noise Specification ........................... 2 pages..................... D APPENDIX I Component and CT Exhaust Sound Power Levels ..................... 3 pages..................... D APPENDIX J Additional Combustion Turbine Information ............................. 4 pages................... E* APPENDIX K Insulation Material and Thickness .............................................. 3 pages................... E* APPENDIX L Emissions Guarantee Data Sheet ................................................ 3 pages................... E* APPENDIX M Approved Sub-subcontractors ..................................................... 5 pages................... E* *Indicates update to Appendix or new Appendix since the last revision of this specification.

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 PD-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

PROPOSAL DATA

PD.1 GENERAL. Each Bidder shall submit complete and definitive information on their offering in sufficient detail to permit a complete analysis of the Proposal. The requirements stated in the Instructions to Bidders relative to information submittal shall be followed.

The requirements for information contained in this section are basic requirements. Additional information shall be provided as requested by the Contractor.

The blank data sheets included in the Fill-In Data Section shall be completely filled in. The data listed therein shall not relieve the Bidder of his responsibility for meeting the requirements of the detailed specifications.

Where alternates are indicated in the technical or Fill-In Data Sections, the Bidder shall provide complete information for each alternate.

PD.2 DRAWINGS. Drawings shall be submitted with the Proposal in sufficient detail to permit evaluation of the Equipment offered and to permit preliminary arrangement studies to be made. The following drawings as a minimum shall be provided with the Bid:

Dimensioned General Arrangement (Outline) with Not-to-Exceed dimensions

Electrical One-Line Diagram

Motor ListData

Performance CurvesData (including curves)

Plan and Elevation

Foundation Loading Tabulation and Interface Layout for Load Location and Anchorage Requirements (+15%/-0%)

Piping and Instrument DiagramDiagrams

Instrument List

PD.3 SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION. The following supplementary information shall be submitted with the Proposal:

Preliminary engineering schedule

Preliminary manufacturing schedule

Document list and submittal schedule.

Location of manufacturer


Testing facilities

Complete list of required maintenance tools as discussed elsewhere shall include a complete description and quantity of each item.

Equipment storage requirements including inside or outside requirements, requirements for controlled temperature or humidity, etc.long-term and short-term storage, etc.

Priced list of spare parts required for startup and commissioning of proposed Equipment with prices effective as specified in Section GR-B.

PD.4 PERFORMANCE CURVES. The following performance curves shall be provided with the Proposal: Tempering Air Fan Curves and System Resistance Curves (both with axes labeled and numbered).

PD.5 DELIVERY: The Bidder shall furnish with his Proposal a list of all equipment and accessories to be provided, as required by the specifications. The list should indicate breakdown and method of shipping. This list will be used in the evaluation of Proposals to establish the quantity and assembly required for the Equipment proposed.

PD.6 HANDLING AND STORAGE: The Bidder shall identify in his Proposal the Equipment and materials required of the Bidder to sufficiently erect, effectively operate and protect the Equipment. The Bidder shall furnish with his Proposal a preliminary set of receipt, handling, storage (long-term and short-term) and installation instructions. The instructions shall identify all handling and storage requirements during the period from delivery through initial operation which must be completed by the Bidder or by the Manufacturer's field service technician to validate the Equipment warranty and performance guarantee.

PD.7 SPARE PARTS: The Bidder shall furnish with the Proposal a list of Mandatory/Construction Commissioning Parts list (per Section GR-A) that are included in the base scope. The Bidder shall indicate in the Mandatory Construction/Commissioning parts list any parts, which cannot be finalized until the Bidder's detail design is complete. If applicable, Mandatory Construction/Commissioning parts list shall be finalized based on actual detail design of the Equipment by the Bidder and resubmitted after award of the Agreement, with no change to the base scope, as specified herein.

PD.8 TERMINAL POINTS LIST: The Bidder shall furnish with his Proposal a list itemizing the terminal points which will interface with the Bidder's Equipment and wiring. The list shall include physical termination information, flow, pressure, temperature, electrical power requirements and other pertinent data.

PD.8 If additional termination points, not designated in the proposal, are added during equipment design, the Bidder is responsible for all costs associated with supplying the necessary equipment to provide the additional terminations.


PD.9 INSTRUMENTATION LIST: The Bidder shall furnish with the Proposal a list of accessories and instrumentation the Bidder proposes to furnish with the Equipment.

PD.10 ENGINEERING AND MANUFACTURING SCHEDULE: The Bidder shall furnish with his Proposal a schedule that indicates major engineering and manufacturing activities and the dates of each activity. The schedule shall indicate design, submittal of drawings and information, fabrication, submittal of instruction manuals, factory testing and delivery.

PD.11 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS: Each Bidder shall submit with his Proposal a list of Equipment that has been furnished for other locations, as similar as possible to that called for herein. The list is to state the name of the purchaser, location, specific contact at site, (name, address, phone number), date of delivery, and Equipment type and size.

PD.12 OPERATOR TRAINING DESCRIPTION: The Bidder shall provide with the proposal a detailed description of the training included in the bid price option.

PD.13 FILL-IN DATA. Bidders shall provide data requested in the Fill-in Data Section.

END OF SECTION

FILL-IN DATA

Marsh Landing Generating StationKPE Project No. 2009-019 FD-1 Spec 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

1.

2.

3.

Bidder's Name

Description Units Quantity1. PERFORMANCE

Pressure Drop at maximum volumetric flow (guaranteed) in w.c.Pressure Drop at maximum volumetric flow (expected) in w.c.Pressure Drop at minimum volumetric flow (expected) in w.c.Pressure Drop at maximum volumetric flow with additional SCR catalyst installed (expected) in. w.c.

Total Gas Purge Volume (from casing inlet to stack outlet) ft3

Design is compatible with the gas velocity profiles provided yes/noCold flow modeling included yes/noComputational fluid dynamics modeling included yes/noStack Exhaust Temperature maximum/normal °FSCR/CO emissions reducing system and associated are capable of withstanding the Not-to-Exceed Exhaust Gas Temperature with associated flow rate and the the Not-to- yes/noExceed Exhaust Gas Flow Rate with associated temperature as defined in Section 15110,while maintaining the Guaranteed Maximum Emissions as defined in Appendix C

2. NOx CATALYSTTypeSCR Catalyst ManufacturerNumber of catalyst modules provided #MaterialGeometric Surface Area in2/in3

Cell Density cpsi cells/in2

Cell Pitch mm

Area open to flow % (of catalyst face area)

Total Volume ft3

Total Surface Area ft2

Module Dimensions Width, ftHeight, ftDepth, ft

Minimum temperature for ammonia injection °FMaximum allowable gas temperature °FGuaranteed Life op. hoursExpected Life @ Design conditions op. hoursSO2 to SO3 Conversion (maximum) %100% Additional space for SCR catalyst provided yes/no

The Bidder has provided the data shown in the following table as part of its proposal. The Contractor has relied on the data provided for purposes of award of this Agreement and design of related systems and facilities for the Project. The Equipment shall meet (or exceed) the characteristics and data provided, or the requirements of the Specifications, whichever is more t i tIn no case shall the information provided herein relieve the Bidder of his responsibility for meeting

the requirements of the detailed Specifications.Additional information shall be provided as requested by the Contractor.

FILL-IN DATA


Description Units Quantity3. CO/VOC OXIDATION CATALYST

TypeCO/VOC Oxidation Catalyst ManufacturerNumber of catalyst modules provided #Substrate MaterialGeometric Surface Area in2/in3

Cell Density cpsiCell Pitch mmArea open to flow %Total Volume ft3

Total Surface Area ft2

Module Dimensions Width, ftHeight, ftDepth, ft

Minimum gas temperature for guaranteed performance °FMaximum allowable gas temperature °FGuaranteed Life op. hoursExpected Life @ Design conditions op. hoursSO2 to SO3 Conversion (maximum) %

4. DEACTIVATING CONTAMINANTSList of catalyst poisons Example:

Antimony, Arsenic, Bromine, Chlorine, Chrome, Copper, Flourine, Iodine, Iron, Lead, Lithium, Mercury, Nickel, Phosphorous, Potassium, Silicon, Sodium, Sulfur Tin ZincExhaust Gas Poison Limits: Individual Component mg/m3

Combined Total mg/m3

Maximum allowable Alkali Metals in Fuel ppmwMaximum allowable Alkali Metals in DeNOx/turbine water ppmwMaximum allowable Alkali Metals in Ammonia Reagent ppmw

FILL-IN DATA


Description Units Quantity5. AMMONIA FLOW CONTROL UNIT SKID

Skid ManufacturerNumber of heating elements # x %Maximum inlet temperature of heated dilution air °FCapacity of each heating element (for electric heater option) kWAmmonia Blower ManufacturerNumber and capacity (%) of dilution air blowers per unit # x %Dilution air blower capacity scfm

in wcDilution air blower motor size/voltage/phase hp/VDilution air blower electric demand at guarantee point kWDilution air blower speed rpmDilution air blower Noise - Near Field @ 3 ft distance and 5 ft above grade dBA

Dilution air blower silencing provisions (list) (Attach details)Ammonia flow control unit skid flow capacity margin (margin of ammonia that can be vaporized and injected) %/scfm

6. Tempering Air FansFan ManufacturerSkid ManufacturerNumber and capacity (%) of FansBoth fans located on one side yes/noTempering air fan capacity scfm

in wcTempering air fan pressure at design flow in wcTempering air fan flow capacity margin %/scfmTempering air fan pressure capacity margin %/in wcTempering air fan motor size/voltage/phase hp/VTempering air fan electric demand at guarantee point kWTempering air fan speed rpmTempering air fan Noise - Near Field @ 3 ft distance and 5 ft above grade dBA

Tempering air fan silencing provisions (list) (Attach details)

FILL-IN DATA


Description Units Quantity7. STACK INLET EXPANSION JOINT

ManufacturerModel NumberLength ftWidth ftHeight ftDesign Pressure in wcDesign temperature °FFrame MaterialBelt MaterialInsulation Material

8. EXHAUST CASING AND STACKSManufacturer Stack height above foundation ftStack Inside Diameter (accounting for internal liner) ftCasing/Stack MaterialLiner Material (casing/stack)Casing/Stack Thickness inInsulation Thickness (casing/stack/tempering air ducts) inInsulation Material (casing/stack/tempering air ducts)Casing Design Pressure in wcOperating Pressure in wcLiner maximum temperature °FCEMS ports location meets EPA and/or CFR standards requirements as specified in the technical specification yes/no

Number of stack sections for erection (length/shape)9. WEIGHTS

Tempering Air Fan lbAmmonia Vaporization Skid lbCasing and Ductwork lbSCR Catalyst Module lbSCR Catalyst Total lbCO Catalyst Module lbCO Catalyst Total lbStack lbOther Skids lbTotal scope of supply lb

10. PIPING/VALVE DESIGN & MATERIALSFlue gas recirculation piping min/max temperature °FFlue gas recirculation piping materialAqueous ammonia piping/valve materialVaporized ammonia piping/valve material

11. AMMONIA FORWARDING SKIDSkid ManufacturerAmmonia Forwarding Pump ManufacturerAmmonia Forwarding Pump Motor ManufacturerNumber of ammonia forwarding pumps # x %Pump capacity at rated head (including min. recirc gpmTDH at rated capacity ftParallel operation capability yes/noDischarge pressure required psig

FILL-IN DATA


Description Units QuantityNPSHR ftMotor size/voltage/phase hp/VPumps electric demand at guarantee point kWPump speed rpmPump Noise - Near Field @ 3 ft distance and 5 ft above grade dBAAmmonia forwarding skid flow/pressure capacity margin (margin of ammonia that can be pumped) gpm/ft

Pump casing materialPump shaft materialPump type

FILL-IN DATA


10. AUXILIARY POWERThe following tables are to be filled out for the different ambient cases indicated based on the following criteria:

- Tempering air fan flow is controlled as indicated ( either via duct dampers or vfd );- Design is based on meeting emission limits (during CTG load at 60% and above) for all cases provided, includingthe not to exceed cases; and- Values are to be expected values only (margins are not to be included for the kW loads).

Table 10.1 - Tempering Air Fan Flow Controlled by Inlet Guide Vane/Duct DamperAmbient Temperature (°F) 20 20 59 103.9 111 111Combustion Turbine Exhaust Temperature (°F) 1,067 1,055 1,093 1,136 1,146 1,210Combustion Turbine Exhaust Flow (lbm/hr) 4,345,339 4,800,000 4,000,983 3,550,262 3,468,323 3,358,900Combustion Turbine Load (%) 100 100 100 100 100 100

Tempering Air Fan Auxiliary Load (kW)Ammonia Vaporization Heater-Recirc Gas (kW)

Ammonia Vaporization Heater-Electric Option (kW)

Dilution Air Fan (kW)

Tempering Air Fan Flow (ACFM)Tempering Air Fan Static Pressure (in. w.c.)

Temperature at SCR Catalyst Face (°F)

Table 10.2 - Tempering Air Fan Flow Controlled by Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)Ambient Temperature (°F) 20 20 59 103.9 111 111

Combustion Turbine Exhaust Temperature (°F) 1,067 1,055 1,093 1,136 1,146 1,210

Combustion Turbine Exhaust Flow (lbm/hr) 4,345,339 4,800,000 4,000,983 3,550,262 3,468,323 3,358,900Combustion Turbine Load (%) 100 100 100 100 100 100

Tempering Air Fan Auxiliary Load (kW)Ammonia Vaporization Heater-Recirc Gas (kW) Ammonia Vaporization Heater-Electric Option (kW)Dilution Air Fan (kW)

Tempering Air Fan Flow (ACFM)Tempering Air Fan Static Pressure (in. w.c.)Temperature at SCR Catalyst Face (°F)

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 GR-A-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF WORK 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION: This section covers the general description, scope of the Work, and supplementary requirements for Equipment, Materials, and Services included under these specifications. These sections are supplementary to the detailed technical specification sections. If requirements specified herein conflict with requirements specified in the subsequent technical specifications, the subsequent technical specification sections shall govern to the extent of such conflict.

The Equipment and materials covered by these Specifications will be incorporated into the Marsh Landing Generating Station that will include construction of a nominal 800 MW simple-cycle peaking power plant to be located in Contra Costa County, California., near the city of Antioch. The completed Facility will include four (4) Siemens SGT6-PAC5000F combustion turbine-generator (CTG) sets, and four (4) selective catalytic reduction units (SCR’s – including CO catalyst), three (3) gas compressors, electrical distribution system (including tie-ins to the PG&E switchyard), water treatment systems, instrumentation and controls, and all necessary auxiliary equipment) Equipment. The project location is approximately one-tenth of one mile from the limits of the city of Antioch, California. The location is bounded on the north by the San Joaquin River and on the south by a BNSF main rail line. Marsh Landing Generating Station Antioch, California 94509 Contra Costa County, California The Marsh Landing Generating Station is scheduled for commercial operationCommercial Operation on April 1, 2013.

All Equipment and Materials shall be new, unused and undamaged and shall have an expected usefula minimum design life of 30 years, with scheduled maintenance, for each unit operating at . The Marsh Landing Generating Station is a peaking plant that shall be designed based on 167 starts per year and a 20% annual capacity factor and the following conditions:.

No. of hot starts: 67 per year

No. of warm starts: 67 per year No. of cold starts: 33 per year

a. Hot start shall mean a start-up no more than sixteen (16) hours since the Facility was last synchronized.

b. Warm start shall mean a start-up no less than sixteen (16) hours and no more

than sixty-four (64) hours since the Facility was last synchronized.


c. Cold start shall mean a start-up no less than sixty-four (64) hours since the

Facility was last synchronized. Only proven and tested technology shall be utilized that has been in successful operation for at least five (5) years in the exact same application. There shall be no exceptions to this clause.

All Equipment and Materials shall be suitable for safe and satisfactory operation for the intended service and under all climatic conditions prevailing at the Site. Asbestos-containing materials will not be allowed.

2. SCOPE OF WORK:

The Equipment, Materials and Services to be furnished shall include, four (4) complete SCR/CO Systems, each to include, but not necessarily be limited to:

• Casing and ductwork • SCR catalyst module support frames • SCR catalyst • CO catalyst module support frames • CO catalyst • Exhaust stack complete with EPA sample platform, supporting steel, expansion

joints, interconnecting ductwork, piping and hardware • All instrumentation as defined herein and as required for control, monitoring, and

safe operation of the SCR • Internal insulation and lagging of the SCR, ductwork, stack, and auxiliary

equipment • Access platforms, stairways and ladders • Tempering air fans • Aqueous ammonia vaporizers and flow control skid • Transportation (FOB) to the jobsite • Engineering design • Erection, startup and commissioning supervision • Training as specified herein • Drawings, engineering data, instruction manuals, recommended spare parts list,

and participation in design conferences at Contractor’s facilities • Startup and commissioning spare parts • Special tools required for off-loading, installation, operation and maintenance

The Equipment will be tested by the Contractor after erection to demonstrate its ability to operate under the conditions and fulfill the guarantees as set forth herein. If the tests indicate that the Equipment fails to meet guaranteed performance, the Seller shall make modifications and perform additional testing at the Seller's expense as required to render the Equipment fully functional and in compliance with the specified guarantees.


The Seller shall provide drawings and engineering process and design data, field services, special tools, operation and maintenance manuals, recommended spare parts list, miscellaneous materials and services, and shall participate in design conferences, all as specified herein.

3. SITE CONDITIONS:

Plant Elevation above sea level: 9.0 feet MSL

Atmospheric Pressure: 14.691 psia

Ambient Temperature and Humidity: Design Basis (dry bulb & RH) 59°F / 60% Summer Design Basis (dry bulb & RH) 94°F / 32% July Peak Conditions (dry bulb & RH) 103.9°F / 31%

Design High Temperature 104°F Design Low Temperature 20°F

Wind: (, Seismic, Snow Refer to Section S1.)S Seismic:

(Refer to Section S1.) Snow:

(Refer to Section S1.) Precipitation:

Average Annual Rate 13”12.71 inches Maximum Annual Rate 28” Maximum One-hour Rate (later)

Interior Conditions (Facility Buildings) Control Room 75oF, 50% RH (summer) 70oF (winter) Admin Areas 75oF, 50% RH (summer) 70oF (winter) Electrical Enclosures 80oF, 50% RH (summer) 65oF (winter) All other Areas 105oF ambient, 15oF rise (summer) 60oF ventilated (winter)

Noise Level: The equivalent “A” weighted sound pressure level for equipmentEquipment furnished under these specifications (including drive motors) shall not exceed 85 dBA free field


measured 3 feet horizontally from the base of the Equipment and 5 feet above floor and/or operating level. The sound pressure levels stated are decibels to a reference of 20 micropascals. Sufficient silencing shall be provided by the Seller on all safety valve discharges, vent discharges, etc., to ensure that these short-term sound pressure level limits are not exceeded. See further details and requirements included in the detailedEquipment and Materials Specifications. Contractor will test actual sound levels in operation. Seller shall provide and install sound mitigation to bring the equipmentEquipment into compliance at Seller’s expense if field measurements show the equipmentEquipment exceeds 85 dBA. Additional sound testing shall be performed at the Seller’s expense to verify the sound mitigation has met the requirements. Compressed Air: Filtered and dried compressed air will be supplied for operation of pneumatic instruments and control valves. The compressed air will be supplied at receiver pressure varying from 8060 to 125 psig. All pneumatic instruments and diaphragm-operated valves shall be designed to operate at a minimum pressure of 80 psig60 psig. Compressed air will be supplied via oil-flooded compressors. Pressure regulators shall be provided for pneumatic devices that operate at pressure levels other than receiver pressure. Equipment Cooling Water: Cooling water is not available for equipmentEquipment. 4. REFERENCED STANDARDS: All equipmentEquipment and materials furnished shall be in conformance with the latest edition of all applicable codes, regulations, and standards in effect on May 6, 2010. Unless otherwise specified in thesethe date the Contract is executed, but not earlier than May 6, 2010. For California codes, the latest edition at the time of engineering design submittal for review shall be used. In the event engineering designs are submitted when the successor to the 2007 California codes is in effect, the 2007 California codes shall be replaced with the applicable successor provisions. Unless otherwise specified in the Equipment and Materials Specifications, the following codes and standards shall apply:

Codes and Standards List:

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

Acoustical Society of America (ASA)

Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA)

American Boiler Manufacturers Association (ABMA)

Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC)

American Concrete Institute (ACI)

American Electrical Association (AEA)

American Gas Association (AGA)


American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA)

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

American Petroleum Institute (API)

American Railway Engineering Association (AREA)

Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)

American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE and ASCE 7)

American Society for Non Destructive Testing (ASNT)

American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASTM International (ASTM)

American Water Works Association (AWWA)

American Welding Society (AWS)

Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)

California Code of Regulations

California Building Code (CBC) – 2007, Latest Edition

California Building Standards Administrative Code

California Code for Building Conservation

California Electrical Code

California Energy Code

California Fire Code (CFC)

California Mechanical Code


California Plumbing Code

California Reference Standards Code

Code of Federal Regulations – EPA Rules and Regulations

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)

Conveyer Equipment Manufacturers Association (CEMA)

Cooling Tower Institute (dba Cooling Technology Institute) (CTI)

Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA)

Code of Federal Regulations – EPA Rules and Regulations

U. S. Department of Energy (DOE)

Expansion Joint Manufacturing Association (EJMA)

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

Recommended Guidelines for the Admission of High-Energy Fluids to Steam Surface Condensers (EPRI)

Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)

Factory Mutual Engineering (FM)

Fluid Control Institute (FCI)

Heat Exchange Institute (HEI)

Hoist ManufacturersManufacturer’s Institute (HMI)

Hydraulic Institute (HI)

Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA)

International Building Code 2006 Edition (IBC-2006)


International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO)

International Fire Code (IFC)

International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA)

Lightning Protection Code (LPC)

Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)

Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)

National Association of Corrosion Engineering (NACE)

National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers (NAAMM)

National Bureau of Standards (NBS)

National Electrical Code (NEC)

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

National Electric Testing Association (NETA)

National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (CALOSHA)

Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI)

Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)

Steel Deck Institute Standards (SDIS)

Steel Joist Institute Standards (SJIS)


Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACCNA)

Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA)

Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (TEMA)

Underwriters' Laboratory (UL) Uniform Building Code (UBC)

Uniform Fire Code (UFC)

Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC)

Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)

Welding Research Council (WRC)

Western Electricity Coordinating Council (WECC) Seller shall obtain Contractor approval for any deviation to these standards or alternative standards. Request for deviation or alternative shall include an explanation why such change is necessary and how compliance is to be achieved. Contractor reserves the right to reject any such request for any reason. If the Seller discovers any conflict between any code, standard, regulation, or the technical specifications, the Seller shall notify the Contractor of the conflict. The Contractor in its sole discretion shall then choose which provision shall take precedence over the conflicting provision.In the event conflicts arise between the applicable codes and standards, the more stringent code or standard shall apply. If conflicts arise between the Original Equipment Manufacturer’s (OEM ) Scope of Supply and the applicable codes and standards, the applicable codes and standards shall govern. Unless specific exceptions are indicated in the Agreement, all specifications will be considered applying to all phases of the Work. 5. MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND SERVICES: Miscellaneous Equipment, Material and Services not otherwise specifically called for shall be furnished by the Seller in accordance with the following:

All nuts, bolts, gaskets, special fasteners, backing rings, etc., between components and equipmentEquipment furnished under these Specifications.

All base plates, sole plates, bearing plates, leveling plates, slide plates, hold-down anchor clips or devices, anchor bolt templates, and embedments as required for securing to foundations and support structures, except for anchor bolts or anchor rods.


All piping integral to or between any equipment furnished under these Specifications, except as otherwise specified. This includes all vents, drains, instrument piping, and other piping Work required for a complete unit. All necessary connections for the Contractor's piping and instruments. Seller shall provide a connection list, which identifies all connections including small bore and instrumentation connections. Each connection shall be provided with a unique number and shall list the following information as a minimum: Completecomplete process data including min/max/normal flow, pressure and temperature; Connectionconnection information including tag number, size, connection rating, connection material, connection type and connection location; Detaileddetailed drawing number reference. This unique number shall also exist on the general arrangement drawing to identify the physical location of the tie-in interface. All necessary instrument, power and control wiring and raceways integral to any equipmentEquipment furnished under these Specifications. This shall include junction boxes, terminal blocks and internal wiring to these terminal blocks for Equipment requiring external connection. Hangers and accessories, fabricated to the greatest extent possible, for all piping furnished under this Contract with all components collated, bagged, and tagged. Coupling guards for all exposed shafts and couplings. Leveling blocks, sole plates, thrust blocks, matching blocks, hold-down straps and shims. One complete set of start-up and commissioning consumable spare parts. One complete set of those replacement parts that Seller is certain will be required during the Construction and/or Commissioning phases of the Project (Mandatory Construction and Commissioning Parts). For example, manway gaskets, hydro kit gaskets, or other parts which are routinely replaced after inspections, tests, etc. and prior to plant start-up. Detailed erection drawings, prints, information, instructions, and other data for use by the Contractor. Finish painting of all equipmentEquipment except as specified herein. Finish touch-up paint. Detailed long-term and short-term storage requirements and lubrication requirements (including quantities and lubrication and rotation frequencies) for use by the Contractor. Supply all special tools or lifting beams and lugs for offloading. Initial fill of lubricants, fluids and media.


The use of all special tools required for erection of the Equipment. Erection tools shall remain the property of the Seller and all shipping costs to and from the Job Site shall be at the Seller's expense. All special tools required for dismantling and maintenance of the equipmentEquipment. All special tools shall be new and unused and shall become the property of the Contractor for transfer to the Owner. In addition to having software loaded on the equipmentEquipment furnished under this Agreement, master CD’s or disks containing all operating system and applications software shall be provided. The operating system software furnished shall include all software required for debugging, making programming and graphics changes, and printing annotated program documentation. Two (2) copies of the applications and operating system software at the time of equipmentEquipment shipment shall be provided (to be submitted to the KPE address identified in Section GR-B, Article 2Engineer).

6. WORK NOT INCLUDED UNDER THESE SPECIFICATIONS: The following items of Work will be furnished by others:

Receiving, unloading, storing, and field erection of all Equipment and Materials (unless specifically identified in the Technical Specifications) Foundations and foundation anchor bolts including those required for hold-down design Grouting materials and the placing thereof. Permanent electric wiring to connect equipmentEquipment terminal boxes to the plant electrical equipmentEquipment supplied by others. Fuels for operation. Solvents and cleaning materials. Operating personnel for startup and tests.

[NTD: This section has been moved to Special Conditions portion of the specification.] 7. DESIGN CONFERENCE: The Seller's design engineers shall attend a design conference (at no additional cost) at a time and place selected by the Contractor to discuss matters relative to the execution of this Contract. The Seller's design engineers shall attend additional design conferences as required by the Contractor (at no additional cost) thereafter to expedite the Work.


8. MANDATORY CONSTRUCTION AND COMMISSIONING PARTS: One complete set of parts indicated in the Seller’s documentation requiring to be replaced during the Construction, Testing or Startup phases of the Project (Mandatory Construction and Commissioning Parts) shall be included in the Seller’s scope. For example, manway gaskets, hydro kit gaskets, or other parts that are routinely replaced after inspections and tests.

9. 8. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS: In addition to the startup and commissioning spare partsRECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS: In addition to providing the Mandatory Construction/Commissioning Parts as part of its base scope, the Seller shall provide a complete listing of recommended spare parts with unit prices F.O.B. shipping point, not later than the date listed in the Submittal Delivery Schedule (SDS)..) in Section GR-B. The spare parts shall include those required for all on-base and off-base equipmentEquipment furnished. The recommended spare parts lists shall be submitted in two separate lists and include all additional spare parts and materials not included in Seller’s scope of supply required through startup and testing. The two lists shall include:.

Seller shall provide two recommended spare parts lists, as defined below:

a) Recommended Start-Up Spare Parts List – This list shall include those parts which, based on its past experience, the Seller recommends having availableon hand to replace parts that may fail during Start-Upassure an efficient start-up. The list shall include a recommended quantity for start-up purposes and a net unit price valid for Contractor’s or Owner’s use through April 1, 2013.

b) Recommended Operational Spare Parts List – This list shall include those parts

which, based on its maintenance guidelines, routine operation, and past experience, the Seller believes may require replacement in the first 24 monthsare required for two (2) years of plant operation. The list shall include a recommended quantity and a net unit price valid for Owner’s use through April 1, 2013.

The listing shall include the part manufacturer, manufacturer contact information, cost of each part, a description of each part (including industry standard part number if available), the assembly or equipmentEquipment in which each part will be used, and recommended quantities to be stocked; shall classify the relative criticality of parts based on the Seller's experience; and shall list the lead time required for manufacture and delivery of each part. The spare parts lists shall include those parts required for all equipmentEquipment and materials including sub-suppliers, furnished under this Agreement. The Contractor or Owner will retain the option of purchasing any one or any combination of spare parts listed at the prices quoted until April 1, 2013through the pricing validity periods specified above. Seller guarantees all operating spare parts purchased by the Contractor shall be delivered to the jobsite no later than February 1, 2013, provided Contractor purchases operating spare parts no later than June 1, 2012.


10. 9. TRAINING: Seller shall provide operator and maintenance training for Owner's and/or Operations and Maintenance Subcontractor's personnel in accordance with the Special Conditions. Option prices stated in the Proposal shall include the following number of days of training and round trips to the jobsite, and all expenses at the Project location: Number of Days: __6__ Number of Round Trips: __2__ Seller shall conduct such training on the Site and with respect to the Equipment and each respective system that comprises the Equipment in their scope of supply. Training provided by Seller shall address, at a minimum, the following topics: (i) the testing of each item of Equipment; (ii) the start-up, operation, and shut-down of each item of Equipment; (iii) the performance or routine, preventative and emergency maintenance for each item of Equipment; (iv) spare parts to be maintained for each item of Equipment, and their installation and removal; and (v) control system operations. Seller’s training shall also include training regarding hazardous materials stored or utilized in Seller’s Equipment, including MSDS and a description of all hazardous materials, as well as instructions on how to properly handle such hazardous materials. Seller shall provide copies of all material used in training sessions to each trainee, up to a maximum. The total number of fifteen (15) trainees expected will be confirmed at a later date. Seller shall provide classroom training supplemented by field visits, and field visits, as applicable, shall be subsequently discussed in the classroom as applicable. Training sessions shall be scheduled to precede the start-up of each piece of Equipment. As Equipment is being prepared for initial commissioning, Seller shall provide operation and maintenance training for each piece of Equipment supplied under this Agreement. If the number of days of classroom training and/or the number of round trips actually required are more or less than the specified quantities, the Agreement amount will be increased or decreased in accordance with the adjustment prices for Seller’s training stated in the Agreement commercial terms. 11. 10. CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: The Seller and subcontractors shall provide, to the Contractor, engineering, procurement, production, scheduling, and shipping information for the equipment, including sub-suppliers equipment.Equipment. Such information shall be provided in the detail and format and at the frequency required by the Contractor. The information shall be submitted by the first of each month or more frequently as determined by the Contractor. The information will be used by the Contractor for schedule monitoring purposes, to ensure that schedule interfaces with other suppliers and subcontractorscontractors are met, and to monitor overall Project performance. 12. 11. FACTORY WITNESS TESTS: Supplementing the provisions of the equipmentEquipment specifications concerning factory witness tests, the Seller shall notify the Contractor not less than thirty (30) days prior to the date of each factory witness test, per the


Submittal Delivery Schedule (SDS).) in Section GR-B. Refer also to Section GR-B, Article 4, under “TEST AND INSPECTION DATA” for requirements for test and inspection reports. 12. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE: The order of precedence for specification sections is as follows: 12.1 Specific technical sections (02XXX for civil, 03XXX and 05XXX for structural, 15XXX for mechanical, 16XXX for electrical, 17XXX for instrumentation and controls, SDS). 12.2 Generic technical sections (E1, E2, E3, M1, M2, S). 12.3 Generic standard sections (GR-X). 12.4 Appendices. Any discrepancies found between sections shall be resolved using the order of precedence shown above.

END OF SECTION

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 GR-B-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS B. ENGINEERING DATA AND SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 1. ENGINEERING DATA: Compliance with the Schedule and the Submittal Delivery Schedule of Activities Table(SDS) included in this Section for engineering data submittal is essential to the scheduled progress and timely completion of the Project and is of the essence of this Contract. 1.1 California Registered Professional Engineer’s Stamp: Compliance with the California Building Official’s stamping requirements is mandatory. All deliverables that can be perceived to have engineering data relative to the project are required to be stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of California. Drawings and miscellaneous documents must be stamped when issued for construction. 1.11.2 Document Index: A document index listing all drawings and data to be submitted shall be included with the initial submittal. The document index shall be resubmitted as required to indicate revisions to the list. The list shall include the document number and title, if known, or the general document category (e.g., wiring diagrams) for each document. 1.21.3 Numbering System: The Contractor will establish an identification numbering system to provide consistent numbering throughout the unit and consistent with the Contractor’s numbering system.Contractor. All electrical devices, control and instrumentation equipment, valves, and other items of similar nature shall be permanently identified with the identification number supplied by the Contractor. Except as specified otherwise, the identification shall be engraved on stainless steel nameplates and permanently affixed to the device using an epoxy adhesive, or corrosion resistant metal screws, pins, or heavy gauge wire suitable for the climate. The Contractor's identification numbers shall be included on the Seller's drawings, documents, and instruction manuals. For skid and internally mounted items, the Contractor may allow the Seller’s identification system to be used provided all identifications are unique. In this case, the Seller’s identification system shall be included on all Seller’s drawings, documents, and instruction manuals. 1.31.4 Design Loads for Foundations: The Seller shall provide and submit all the foundation interface loads and location drawings providing all dead, live, wind, snow, and seismic loads in a tabulated type format based on the project design codes and values specifiedas outlined in Technical Section GR-AS, “Structural Loading and S1.Design”. 2. ENGINEERING SUBMITTALS AND CORRESPONDENCE: The Seller shall submit all technical drawings and All correspondence, technical and commercial, including all documents, data, and drawings shall be provided in pdfthe English Language. All correspondence, technical and commercial, shall be identified with Project name (Marsh Landing Generating Station), Contractor’s Project Number (2009019), Specification Number and Seller’s order number. Technical and commercial correspondence shall follow separate procedures.


2.1 Engineering Submittals and Correspondence: All Engineering Drawings and Engineering

Data shall be submitted to Contractor in electronic format to the followingunless otherwise agreed to in advance by the Contractor. Electronic documents shall be submitted as noted below:

a) Documents shall be submitted in 200 dpi PDF (searchable Adobe Acrobat) format with

the exception of project schedules. Project schedules shall be submitted in Primavera 5.0 version as well as 200 dpi PDF (searchable Adobe Acrobat) format. Native files shall be provided (i.e. valve list in Microsoft® Excel).

2.b) Marsh Landing Generating Station “SharePoint” website shall be utilized for both document submittal and document return. Separate instructions will be provided for site access. Seller shall provide a list of personnel requiring access, including name, title, address, phone number and email addressesaddress.

[PROJECT VDC EMAIL ADDRESS NAME] (later) [PROJECT EMAIL ADDRESS] [EXPEDITER NAME] (later) [EXPEDITER EMAIL ADD.] [PROJECT PM NAME] (later) [PROJECT PM EMAIL ADD.] [CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR] (later) [CONT ADMIN EMAIL ADD.]

c) Contractor’s Expeditor shall provide log-in information and instructions to Seller’s Document Control and Project Management team for posting documents to the Share Point Website.

Letters of transmittal shall accompany all submittals of engineering data and shall include a list of the data included in the transmittal and clearly identify the line item number in the Submittal Delivery ScheduleSDS to which to submittal applies. Lists shall include Seller's drawing numbers identified with the corresponding equipment or structure nomenclature as applicable. All correspondence shall be identified with the Project name, (Marsh Landing Generating Station), Specification number, Contractor's Project number, (2009019), and Seller's order number. Submittals will be considered received when it arrives inposted to the email box of the recipient at the office of Kiewit Power Engineers Co. SharePoint website. Submittals that arrive later than 5 PM Central Time will be documented as received at the beginning of the next business day. The transmittal form shall include the following:

Seller's Name

ContractSpecification Number


Contractor Project Number Kiewit Purchase Order Number

Drawing Title

Drawing Number

Drawing Revision

Quantity Sent (if hard copy)

Return Address, Name of Recipient and E-mail address of Recipient

Date Sent

Submittal Delivery ScheduleSDS Item Number to which the submittal applies

Technical correspondence or hard copy engineering submittals shall be submitted to the Contractor at the following address:

Kiewit Power Engineers Co. Phone: (913) 928-7108

Attention: Project Manager Attn: Jason Lockwood Fax: (913) 689-4108 9401 Renner Blvd Lenexa, KansasKS 66219

One (1) copy of the transmittal letter shall also be submitted by email to the following addresses: [Engineer]@kiewit.com [Lead Engineer]@kiewit.com [Project Manager]@[email protected] [Engineering Manager]@kiewit.com [Document Control SpecialistVDC]@kiewit.com [Expeditor]@kiewit.com [Scheduler]@kiewit.com [email protected] One (1) copy of the transmittal letter only, listing the data transmitted, shall be sent via email to the Contractor’s email address listed in GR-B.2.12 below. Do not send prints or electronic files of the Engineering Drawings and Engineering Data to the Contractor at the address below. Engineering and fabrication schedules shall be submitted periodically over the course of the supply of the goods. The frequency of the submittals will be defined by the Contractor in the

mailto:[email protected]�


Special Conditions. 2.12.2 Commercial correspondence, including but not limited to any correspondence regarding

adjustments to cost or schedule, shall be addressed to the Contractor as follows:

Kiewit Power Constructors Phone: LATER Attn: [Construction Manager] LATER Email: LATER 9401 Renner BoulevardBlvd Lenexa, KS 66219

[Construction Manager]@kiewit.com All correspondence shall be identified with the Project name, (Marsh Landing Generating Station), Specification number, Contractor's Project number, (2009019), and Seller's order number. Seller may be required to participate in weekly conference calls as necessary to facilitate the timely completion of the Contract. 3. REVIEW OF ENGINEERING DATA: The Contractor's review of engineering data will cover only general conformity of the data to the Specifications and Documents, external connections, interfaces with equipment and materials furnished under separate specifications, and dimensions which affect plant arrangements. The Contractor's review including any indication or drawing approval, does not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the Equipment, material, device, or item indicated or the accuracy of the information submitted; nor shall review by the Contractor be construed as relieving the Seller from any responsibility for errors or deviations from the requirements of the Contract. The Seller shall review and sign off on all documents that the Seller receives from his Suppliers and Sub-Vendors before submitting them to the Contractor. All engineering data submitted, after final processing and acceptance by the Contractor, shall become a part of the Contract. Work shall be performed in accordance with the accepted engineering data. 4. TEST AND INSPECTION DATA: Certified copies of specified test and inspection reports shall be provided by the Seller for all tests and inspections conducted on the specified equipmentEquipment or material. 5. DRAWINGS: All drawings necessary for design, installation and operation of Seller’s Equipment and Materials shall be submitted. Drawings shall be fully completed, checked, and certified by the Seller to verify that the information on the submittal is complete with the requirements of these Specifications. Drawings shall have title block entries clearly indicating the drawing is certified.


Each drawing submitted shall have a title block clearly marked with the name of the Project, the unit designation, the Specification title, the Specification number, the equipment or structure nomenclature, the equipmentEquipment tag number assigned by Contractor, and the Seller's name, address, date of approval, drawing revision number, and responsible person. If standard drawings or catalog pages are submitted, the applicable Equipment and devices furnished shall be clearly marked. All drawings and documentation shall be provided in English dimensions. All P&ID’s shall include line numbers and valve tag numbers as labeled by the Contractor. All shop drawings and other submittals shall be corrected to as-built conditions prior to shipment. The Seller shall notify the Contractor, in writing, of any information in the shop drawing that deviates from the requirements of the Contract. Approval of any drawings by the Contractor will not release the Seller of responsibility for the accuracy, correctness and quality of his Work. Submittal of new or revised drawings resulting from a contract change order shall be completed within two (2) weeksfourteen (14) calendar days of the executed change order unless noted otherwise in the change order. Drawing submittals resulting from change orders shall be as defined below. Liquidated damages shall apply as defined for similar drawings in the schedule of activitiesSDS issued with the contract change order. The due dates for submittals as noted on the Submittal Delivery ScheduleSDS, correspond to the date the drawings are due in the office of the Contractor or posted on the SharePoint website, as applicable. If the Instruction Manual has been issued prior to the change order, sufficient drawings shall be transmitted to ensure that all Instruction Manuals are updated. 5.1. Drawing Submittal: Seller shall submit all drawings in 200 dpi pdf (searchable Adobe Acrobat) format. If the drawing has large amounts of detail or text, higher resolution shall be used to be sure the submittal is clear and legible. Seller to verify each drawing meets this requirement prior to submittal to Contractor. This excludes commercial correspondence to KiewitContractor. Electronic documents should be oriented such that the viewing orientation is appropriate (text shall be read from left to right). Project schedules shall be submitted in Primavera 5.0 version as well as 200 dpi PDF formatAll drawings shall be submitted to the Marsh Landing Generating Station SharePoint website. Seller’s document control and management personnel will be provided with access to the SharePoint website by the Contractor. Documents shall be placed in the appropriate Contract Tab and in the “Vendor Submittal” folder.


Documents shall be grouped in packets with the transmittal letter for each packet included in the packet. Drawing Submittal: Seller shall provide lists for Seller’s Equipment (i.e., equipment list, valve list, line list, instrument list, etc.) in Microsoft Excel format at Contractor’s request. 5.1. If hard copy submittal is required, Twotwo (2) prints of each drawing shall be submitted. Print size shall not exceed 34 inches by 44 inches unless due to the size of the Equipment larger drawings are necessary. Drawings shall be folded to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. Piping and Instrumentation diagrams shall be provided on 11" x 17" paper. All Final Certified Copies of Seller Engineering Deliverables Submittedsubmitted shall include three (3) copies “Wet” Stamped with an Original Signature of a Registered California P.E. for the Applicable Disciplines. 5.1.1 Acceptable PDF Settings: Seller shall confirm that all drawings being submitted

electronically are clear and legible prior to being submitted to Contractor. Following are acceptable PDF settings:

5.1.1.1 PDF Files: Following are acceptable PDF formats:

PDF Adobe Portable Document Format PDF – Raw Raster only PDF subset – bilevel, 8 bit, 24 bit RAW PDF – CCITT G4 Raster only PDF subset – bilevel CCITT G4 PDF – CCITT G3 Raster only PDF subset – bilevel CCITT G3 PDF – JPEG Raster only PDF subset – 8 bit, 24 bit color PDF – Flate Raster only PDF subset – bilevel, 8 bit, 24 bit PDF – LZW Raster only PDF subset – bilevel, 8 bit, 24 bit

5.1.1.2 PDF Security: Note that submittals must NOT be password-protected files. Following are the acceptable PDF security settings (found under File → Document Properties → Security within Adobe Acrobat):

Security Method No Security Can be Opened by All versions of Acrobat Printing Allowed Document Assembly Not Allowed Content Copying or Extraction Allowed Content Extraction for Accessibility Allowed Commenting Not Allowed Filling of form fields Allowed Signing Not Allowed Creation of Template Pages Not Allowed Submitting Forms Not Allowed


5.2 Drawing Processing: EffortEach drawing reviewed will be made to review and return all submittalsreturned to the Seller within 21 calendar days as stipulated herein, except that drawings with “APPROVED” (APP), “FOR INFORMATION ONLY” (INF), or “SUPERCEDED” or “SUPERCEDED BEFORE FULLY REVIEWED” (SSR) status will not be returned. The status “SSR” is assigned when the Seller submits a new revision of the document before the already submitted document is not returned/ or it is still under review by the Contractor. Drawings returned to the Seller will be in Adobe Acrobat (pdf) format with the Contractor's comments and Action Stamp. When drawings and data are returned marked “APPROVED AS NOTED” (AAN), the changes shall be made as noted thereon, and the drawing shall be resubmitted for final approval. within 14 calendar days. If a drawing(s) is returned to the Seller with a status of “RETURNED FOR RECORD” (RFR), comments made to the drawing(s) (such as addition of tag numbers) shall be noted by the Seller but the Seller is not required to pick up the comment immediately and resubmit. However, if the Seller does re-submit the drawing(s) for other reasons, the comment shall be picked up within the new revision. Drawings and data that do not meet the minimum requirements of the Contract will be returned marked “RETURNED FOR CORRECTION” (RFC), and will be regarded as not submitted. When the drawings and data are returned marked “RFC”, the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by the Contractor, and the drawing shall be resubmitted for final approval as soon as possible, but no later than 14 calendar days. Additionally, drawings may receive a status of VOID if the drawings are no longer applicable to the project due to changes in project scope. When a drawing is revised and resubmitted, the Seller shall include an issuea revision number and revision description in the drawing revision block. All revisions pertaining to that particular drawing issue shall be backcircled or otherwise clearly noted on the drawing. Seller shall resubmit drawings within 14 days of receipt. Seller will be responsible for costs associated with engineering and construction costs caused from drawingsdrawing information that was changed and not backcircled and clearly identified as changed from the previous submittal. Drawings marked FOR INFORMATION ONLY (INF) have been filed, but have not been reviewed. A received drawing will be accepted and dated according to GR-B Section 2.1. A drawing will be considered returned the date it is postmarked, sent by email or posted on the SharePoint website. Where comments are made that result in a Change to the Contract, the quantification and qualification of the Change shall be recorded, in writing, in a form acceptable to Contractor and submitted to Contractor within five (5) working days of receipt of the returned document.


Drawings marked “FOR INFORMATION ONLY” (INF) have been filed, but have not been reviewed. No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication or manufacture of Equipment and materials until the drawings and data therein have been reviewed by the Contractor, except at the Seller's own risk and responsibility. Work may proceed on Equipment and materials when the drawings and data therefore have been returned marked APPROVED AS NOTED (“AAN),“, or the Contractor's transmittal letter indicates a status of APPROVED (“APP)“ or FOR INFORMATION ONLY (“INF),“, provided the Work is performed in accordance with the Contractor's notations and the Contract. If changes are made to the Equipment at the Project Site, revised drawings indicating the changes made shall be prepared by the Seller and submitted to the Contractor. 5.3 Liquidated Damages: Where submittal dates for drawings and data are designated as “Liquidated Damages Apply” on the Schedule of Activities TableSDS table in this Section, the following shall apply: 5.3.1 When the drawings and data are returned marked RETURNED FOR CORRECTION (“RFC),“, the Seller’s submittal date for the purposes of liquidated damages shall be the date that the corrected, revised drawings and data are resubmitted.

5.3.2 When the drawings and data that are subject to liquidated damages are returned marked APPROVED AS NOTED (AAN), the Seller shall have fourteen (14) days to revise and resubmit such drawings and data for approval, otherwise liquidated damages shall start on the 15th day after the Seller receives the APPROVED AS NOTED (AAN) drawings and data from the Engineer. 5.4. Returned electronic drawings will be reposted on the SharePoint website as noted above. A subsequent email will be sent alerting the Seller of the drawings being posted. The date the email was sent will be recognized as the returned date. 6 INTERCONNECTIONS LIST: Seller shall identify all mechanical and electrical connections to interfaces on their drawings with an identification tag. Seller shall provide a detailed summary drawing including all mechanical and electrical interface points to customer connections on one drawing for reference. The interconnect drawing shall be presented in a chart format including, but not limited to the following information by type:

Mechanical Interconnections

Interconnection Tag No. Pipe size Pressure Class Connection Type


Pipe Material Pipe Schedule Design Pressure Design Temperature Design Flow

Electrical Interconnections

Interconnection Tag No. Voltage Electrical Load Connection Type

7 WIRING DIAGRAMS: Connection and interconnection wiring diagrams furnished by the Seller shall be as indicated in ANSI Y14.15a, Section 15-11, Article 15-11.3.2.1 and Figure 11-4 except that function information and wire run code are not required. Each device connection shall have near each termination, indicated in breaks, conductor identification consisting of the opposite end destination. The wiring diagrams shall be drawn with all devices indicated in their relative physical locations and shall represent the Equipment and terminals arranged as they would appear to a person wiring the Equipment. Where interconnecting wiring from different items of Equipment or sectional wiring diagrams of the same item of Equipment appear on different wiring diagram sheets, all interconnections shall be clearly identified. Where sectional wiring diagrams are required for a single item of Equipment, such as a relay panel or control panel, that section of the panel which is represented by each individual wiring diagram sheet shall be keyed on that sheet in a manner acceptable to the Contractor. Information indicated on the Seller's drawings shall include wiring of the individual panel items as they actually will appear in the panel, contact arrangements of switches, and internal wiring of relays and instruments. Elementary/Schematic diagrams shall be provided for all vendorSeller-wired and vendorSeller-provided equipmentEquipment, and shall be cross-referenced to terminal markings on the connection and interconnection diagrams, but need not indicate complete details of circuits external to the panels. Each item of panel mounted Equipment indicated on the diagrams shall be identified by item number and name. Sufficient space shall be left on the Contractor's side of outgoing terminal blocks for adding cable color codes and circuit numbers. Color codes and circuit numbers will be added by the Contractor. The Seller shall be responsible for adding the color codes and circuit numbers to his drawings after they are assigned by the Contractor.


8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: Instruction manuals for the unloading, short and long term storage, installation, operation, and maintenance of the Equipment shall be furnished. The required time of delivery areis specified in the Submittal Delivery Schedule.SDS in this Section. All drawings contained in the final accepted manuals shall have “APP” or “RFR” status. Drawings with a status of “AAN” shall be resubmitted to the Contractor to get “APP” status prior to being included in the final instructionaccepted manuals. The “Operation and Maintenance Manual Checklist” at the end of this section will be used to determine if the minimum requirements have been met for the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The Seller shall submit an electronic copy of the final O&M manual.manuals for review. The Seller shall withhold submittal of the electronic (CD)hard copy version of the final O&Maccepted manuals until the final hardelectronic copy has been reviewed, approved, and returned to the Seller. Once received from the Contractor, the Seller shall use the final approved hardaccepted electronic copy of the O&M to create the electronichard copy. This will ensure the hardelectronic copy and electronichard copy match exactly. The O&M manual CDs shall be set up as follows:

• One (1) pdf file per O&M manual volume • File shall be bookmarked by section • ElectronicHard copy files shall match the hardelectronic copy exactly, including

cover and divider pages • Electronic documents should be oriented such that the viewing orientation is

appropriate (text shall be read from left to right). • Any updates or inserts to the final accepted manual shall be accompanied with

updated O&M manual CDs and hard copies to be inserted.

A separate manual containing the approved unloading, storage, installation, preventative maintenance and, MSDS (if applicable), unloading, and short term and long term storage sections from the O&M manual shall accompany the equipmentEquipment shipment to the site. The manuals shall be shipped in weatherproof packaging. In addition, as-built changes to equipmentEquipment or changes resulting from contract change orders shall be submitted to the Contractor for approval prior to including the revised document in the final O&Maccepted manual. 8.1 Content: Manuals shall include the following information specific to the furnished Equipment:

Table of Contents and index tabs using the following identifiers:

Specifications, design data, test data, and curves.

Description of the Equipment.

Applicable Equipment Tag Numbers.


Final Quality Control Data and Inspection Reports (MTR’s, PMI, X-rays, etc.)

Applicable Equipment Tag Numbers

Instructions in the methods of receiving, inspection, unloading, short term and long term storage, and handling prior to installation.

Installation, startup, and initial test instructions.

Operating instructions including startup, calibration, and initial testing requirements.safety precautions

Safety Precautions

Maintenance instructions and routine adjustments, including recommended maintenance schedule.

Manufacturing records, including certificates of conformity, reports, etc.

Purchase order information, including unpriced copies of purchase orders. List and description of all alarms and trip set points for all devices.

Assembly drawings.

Final reduced drawings (11x17) of general arrangements, cross sections for all equipmentEquipment and other final contract drawings.

All other final drawings reduced to 11 x 17.

Parts lists (including start up, commissioning, and recommended spare parts with unit pricing and ordering information as defined in Section GR-A).

Component Cut Sheets.

Trouble-shooting guides

Wiring Diagrams

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) if applicable.

Paint and coatings manufacturer's data sheets

List of acceptable lubricants and lubrication instructions, which shall list points to be


greased or oiled, shall recommend type, grade and temperature range of lubricants, fill volumes, and shall recommend frequency of lubrication.

Nameplate information and shop order numbers for each item of Equipment and component part thereof.

List of maintenance tools furnished with the Equipment.

Maintenance and major overhaul instructions, which shall include detailed assembly drawings with parts numbers, parts lists, instructions for ordering spare parts and complete preventative maintenance instructions required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of the equipmentEquipment involved.

Manuals covering multiple models shall specifically indicate the model(s) provided. Where information does not apply to the equipmentEquipment or model being supplied, such shall be crossed-out or clearly indicated as irrelevant in the Table of Contents, or the model information can be indicated with an arrow stamp.

The above listed requirements are minimum; however, additional information that is necessary for proper operation and care of the Equipment shall also be included. 8.2 Owner’s Requirements: In addition to the list of information to be included in the Instruction Manuals as noted in Section 8.1, the Owner has requested Performance Data be included as applicable. 8.3 Binding: Each hard copy of the final accepted manuals shall be assembled and bound in white three-ring or posthard back binders designed for rough usage, with. Binders shall be white, 3-post, expansion back from 5 cm to 10 cm, and shall include front, back, and spine window coversinsert wallets. The punched holes shall not obscure any portion of a drawing or document included in the manual. Front covers of the manuals and the backbonespine of the manuals shall be permanently marked with the following:

Marsh Landing Generating Station Antioch, California Specification/Contract Number ______110Equipment Name_

______________ _SCR/CO System

Unit Number___________________ (if applicable) _ _____________

Seller Name____________________ Binder capacitiesVolume ____ of ____


Binders shall not exceed 3 inches8 cm in thickness, nor shall material included exceed the designed binder capacity. 8.4 Submittal: Two (2One (1) complete "proof copies"electronic version of the proposed manual(s) shall be submitted to the Contractor for review and approval. When the manuals aremanual is returned by the Contractor with a status of APPROVED AS NOTED or RETURNED FOR CORRECTION, the Seller shall resubmit Two (2) complete "proof copies", or Two (2) copies of the corrected pages, as noted in the Contractor's transmittal letterthe electronic version for review with the corrected sections included within 14 days of receiving the markups. Upon approvalfinal acceptance of the manual by the Contractor, the Seller shall distribute twelve (12) final copies as follows: Two (2submit three (3) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy (CD) to the EngineerContractor (at the address for Engineering Submittals listed in this Section), and ten (10) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy (CD) to other parties as directed by the Contractor.). In addition to the CDs, a copy of all native electronic files used to develop the project document/data deliverables shall be provided. An example of the native files areincludes, but is not limited to valve list, line list, instrumentation list, parts list, etc. (All lists shall be in MS-Excel or MS-Access) For the parts list, it shall contain the following at minimum:

• Manufacturer’s Name and Part Number. • Part Name/Description. • Manufacturer’s contact information • Technical specification defining size, design parameters, etc. • Number of each part used on each piece of Equipment, along with defining the

applicable piece of equipment or system on which the part exists. • Pricing good through April 1, 2013 • Equipment tag number related to the parts. (iI.e. If all parts are for one

equipmentpiece of Equipment, then equipmentEquipment tag number will be the same for each part.)

9 SYSTEM P&ID'S: The Contractor will designate the format type, instrument tagging, line tagging, valve numbering, etc., that will be utilized. All Contractor-supplied valve and instrument tags shall be incorporated into the Seller’s drawing(s). 10 INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET: The Seller shall complete a Contractor-supplied Device Sheet (or Contractor approved equivalent form) for each instrument furnished. See sample ISA Data Sheet at the end of this section. If the attached datasheets do not coverAn electronic file for all of the instruments being Seller-supplied, seller devices shall request the appropriate datasheet


from the Contractorbe sent to the Engineer to be incorporated into the Engineer’s Instrument Index.

Averaging Pitot Tube Conductivity Analyzer Control Valve Mass Flow Meter / Transmitter Orifice Plate Combustibles Gas Analyzer Conservation Vent Desuperheater Desuperheater Spray Valve Assembly Differential Pressure Gauge Differential Pressure RegulatorSwitch Differential Pressure Transmitter Differential Electrical Switch Flame Arrestor Flow Nozzle Flow Regulator Flow Switch I/I Isolators I/P Transducers I.S. Barrier Level Gauge Glass Level Switch (Float & Displacer) Level Switch Probe Level Transmitters (Ultrasonic & Radar) Level Transmitters (Float & Displacer) Line-Actuated Control Valve Mag Flow Meter mA Receiver Indicator Mass Flow Meter/Transmitter Motor-Operated Drain Valve NOx Monitor O2 Analyzer Opacity Analyzer Orifice Plate pH Monitor P/I Transducer Pressure Gauge Pressure Regulator Pressure Switch Pressure Transmitter Rotameter Rupture Disk


Solenoid Valve Safety/Relief Valve Temperature Assembly (TE & TW) Temperature Switch Temperature Gauge Temperature Regulator Temperature Transmitter Thermocouple/RTD Assembly Temperature Transmitter Vibration System

Thermocouples/RTDs Thermowells Turbine Bypass Valve Turbine Meter Venturi Tube Vortex Meter Weatherizing Enclosures

11 RECEIVING AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS: Written instructions for the unloading, storage, and installation of the Equipment shall be furnished by Seller. 6 weeks before shipment unless otherwise noted. In the event the written instructions are not received by Contractor 30 days prior to shipmentin this timeframe, Contractor reserves the right to delay offloading until such time written instructions are received and reviewed. At a minimum, these instructions shall include a description of the Equipment including Equipment Tag Numbers and manufacturer model numbers if applicable; instructions for receiving and inspection of the Equipment including reference to any special handling required during unloading; the center of gravity and weight (in lbs) shall be indicated on drawings included in the written instructions and shall be clearly indicated on the equipmentEquipment prior to shipment; drawings of any special lifting devices or rigging provided by Seller; instructions for storage of the Equipment including reference to type of storage required (outdoor, indoor, climate controlled, etc.), type of utility connections required during storage; instruction for required in-storage maintenance, if any; instructions for the installation of the Equipment including sequence of installation, lifting plans, piping and utility connections, grouting instructions, or any other similar requirements; and copies of outline or arrangement drawings of the Equipment. The required delivery dates are specified in the Special Conditions of the Contract. 12 SCHEDULE: The time periods and dates listed in Submittal Delivery Schedule (attached)the SDS indicate the latest dates by which the listed activities shall be completedreceived at the office of the Contractor. The award date of the Contract will be the date the Seller will be bound to starting their submittal, not when the factory releases for production, or when a PO is issued, etc. Data, drawings, and lists for planning, engineering, and documentation may be submitted earlier than the indicated dates at the Seller's option. 13 SELLER PRODUCTION SCHEDULE: Seller shall submit monthly engineering and


fabrication/manufacturing progress reports by item or tag number. As a minimum these reports must state the following:

Progress of engineering, including scheduled release of drawings and data, and/or release of specifications/drawings to fabricator/manufacturer. Progress of work in shop on a percentage completion basis. PO issue date for each major item of procurement. Progress of work in shop on a percentage completion basis Completed percentage shall include the actual completed work by the Seller and all the Sub-Vendors. List of all impacts or delays from the Schedule of ActivitiesSDS Change Order Log including all change orders in progress or identified to be submitted Photographs of work in progress that substantiates progress reported. Commodity curves and detailed reporting of all major sub-vendors. Scheduled receipt of Seller and sub-vendor shipments of major buy-out equipmentEquipment or materials. Scheduled date for all inspection activities. (Inspection & Test Plan activities). Scheduled shipping date for each item or tag number Detailed engineering/procurement schedule – resource loaded. Payment status for Contract Any substantial change to the Seller’s financial status.

Production schedules shall be addressed to the Engineer and Contractor as follows (one copy of each):

Kiewit Power Constructors Phone: LATER Attn: LATER Fax: LATER LATER LATER

Kiewit Power Engineers Phone: (913) 928-7108 Attn: Jason Lockwood Fax: (913) 689-4108


9401 Renner Blvd Lenexa, KS 66219

14 ENGINEERING AND DESIGN SOFTWARE/3-D MODELING: Seller shall provide a copy of any and all 3-D model(s) generated so it can be loaded into the Contractor’s 3-D model. Seller’s model shall be an accurate physical representation of the equipmentEquipment being designed, and shall include smaller components such as valves, pipe supports, instrumentation, door swing allowance, equipmentEquipment disassembly areas, allowances in connections and platforms for thermal movements, equipmentEquipment, piping and equipmentEquipment insulation, etc. Excessive detail in the model that causes the file to be too large to easily manage in the overall facility model, shall be omitted. Seller shall work with the Contractor to determine the necessary amount of detail and acceptable file size for the 3D model. The model shall be submitted monthly and shall be up to date. The model shall be compatible with NavisWorks and MicroStation.

END OF SECTION


MARSH LANDING GENERATING STATION

KPE Project No. 2009-019 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL CHECKLIST

KPE Shop Drawing No._______________________

Vendor’s Name, Equipment Name_______________

1. General: Instruction manuals shall be furnished for in accordance with the following requirements:

Yes No N/A

1a. _____ _____ _____ Manuals shall be assembled and bound in three ring or post binders designed for rough usage.

1b. _____ _____ _____ Front cover and backbone of the manuals shall be permanently marked with Project Name, Contract Number, Equipment Name, Unit Number (if applicable), and Seller Name.

1c. _____ _____ _____ Manuals shall be in English and have units of measurement according to the English system as used in the United States.

1d. _____ _____ _____ Manuals shall include Table of Contents and index tabs.

1e. _____ _____ _____ Manuals shall include unloading, short term and long term storage, installation, operation, and maintenance of the Equipment furnished.

1f.

_____ _____ _____ Manuals shall be edited to exclude or cross out text, data, illustrations, curves, etc. that do not apply to the Equipment or model supplied. 1g.

_____ _____ _____ Parts lists shall be complete and parts shall be

identified by the original manufacturer’s complete part numbers as well as applicable Equipment tag numbers.


2. Content: Manuals shall include the following information specific to the furnished Equipment:

Yes No N/A 2a. _____ _____ _____ Instructions in the methods of receiving, inspection,

short term and long term storage, and handling prior to installation.

2b.

_____ _____ _____ Descriptions of operation and maintenance procedures to include installation instructions, operating instructions, and maintenance instructions and schedule including all standard and special safety precautions.

2c.

_____ _____ _____ Descriptions and specifications for each piece of Equipment.

2d.

_____ _____ _____ Shutdown sequences to include a description of all trip sequences.

2e. _____ _____ _____ Identification of all Equipment, devices, and items of control by Equipment tag number, project name, and function.

2f.

_____ _____ _____ Drawings of general arrangements and cross sections.

2g.

_____ _____ _____ Assembly drawings.

2h.

_____ _____ _____ Design data and warranted performance data.

2i.

_____ _____ _____ Shop test results and performance curves for all Equipment.

2j.

_____ _____ _____ List and description of all alarm and trip point set points for all devices (instruments, safety valves, etc.)

2k.

_____ _____ _____ Parts Lists to include nameplate information and shop order numbers for each item of Equipment and component part.

2l.

_____ _____ _____ List of acceptable lubricants and volumes.

2m. _____ _____ _____ Consumable lists with specifications.


2n. _____ _____ _____ Balance compliance document of rotating Equipment. 2o. _____ _____ _____

Material Safety Data Sheets or document certifying that no Material Safety Data Sheets are required.

2p. _____ _____ _____ List of recommended spare parts with ordering information and pricing.

2q.

_____ _____ _____ List of maintenance tools furnished with the Equipment.

2r. _____ _____ _____

As-built drawings (supplied as inserts to instruction manuals after final submittal).

2s.

_____ _____ _____ Certified test data (supplied as inserts to instruction manuals after final submittal).

The above requirements are minimum unless noted as Not Applicable (N/A). Additional information, that is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of the Equipment, shall also be included. Items marked ‘No” above were not found in the submittal. These items must be included and the O&M Manual must be re-submitted. Additional comments:

TABLE SDS - SELLER'S DELIVERABLES SCHEDULE

*Liquidated Damages Apply

Marsh Landing Generating StationKPE Project No. 2009-019 SDS-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System AWARD DATE (TBD)Item Description Wks from Award Date LD

1 SCHEDULE: MILESTONE/ENGINEERING/PROCUREMENT/FABRICATIONMonthly, due the 1st of each

month2 INITIAL DRAWING/DOCUMENT LIST (updates every 2 weeks after) 4

3

OUTLINE/GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS OF SCR UNITS (CASING/STACKS/TRANSITION DUCTS), SKIDS, NOISE MITIGATION PANELS, ETC. WITH INFORMATION NEEDED FOR PIPE INTERFACE DESIGN. INCLUDE CENTER OF GRAVITY LOCATIONS, PICK POINTS AND GROUNDING LUG LOCATIONS.

8 *

4 3D MODEL, ELECTRONIC (monthly updates to follow) 10 *5 MECHANICAL CONNECTION LIST (including compressed air users) 4 *6 PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS 4 *7 PIPING DRAWINGS AND DETAILS (isometrics) 12

COMPONENT DATA (CATALOG CUT SHEETS/PAGES, WITH SELECTIONS MARKED)

Catalysts 8Pumps/Fans/Motors (including pump and fan curves) 12 *Manual Valves 12Control Valves (including actuator maintenance pull space dimensions) 12 *Instrumentation 12 *

9 INSULATION DETAILS/SPECIFICATIONS 1210 GAS FLOW CFD MODEL STUDY RESULTS 12 *

11 CYCLE LIFE ASSESSMENT, FATIGUE LIFE ASSESSMENT AND DYNAMIC THERMAL ANALYSIS

12 *

INSTRUMENTATIONInstrumentation Location Plan- Electronic (Plan and Elevation) 12 *

Instrument and Control Devices List (including Tag Numbers, Manufacturer, Model Number, with basic design info such as ranges) in Electronic Format 12 *

Instrumentation ISA-type Data Sheets 12 *

Instrument Calibration Data Sheets 18 *

CONTROLS INFORMATION

Control Description/Summary, including start-up and shutdown requirements 10 *

Start Up Narrative 12 *I-O List 12 *Logic Drawings (Control Narratives and SAMA diagram) 14 *Ammonia System Panel Drawings 16 *

8

12

13




Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System AWARD DATE (TBD)Item Description Wks from Award Date LD14 PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURE 12 *

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DATAElectrical Connection/Load List including a complete listing of all Contractor electrical power, control, instrumentation and communications connections including voltage, phase, current and power factor (Prelim review version at 8 wks)

8 *

Motor Data Sheets (including motor heater datasheets and starting characteristics)

10 *

16

ELECTRICAL DESIGN LAYOUT DRAWINGS INCLUDING A) CONTRACTOR CONDUIT CONNECTION LOCATIONS AND SIZES ON GA DRAWINGS, B) EQUIPMENT ELEVATIONS TO INCLUDE DOOR LOCATIONS, C) EQUIPMENT LAYOUTS, D) CONTROL PANEL AND JUNCTION BOX ARRANGEMENTS, E) CABLE TRAY, WIREWAY PLANS, F) LIGHTING LAYOUTS, G) MOTOR TERMINAL BOXES

8 *

BMS Panel Layout 20BMS Terminal Block Layout 20

17 ELECTRICAL PLANS AND GROUNDING INFORMATION 8

17

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS NEEDED TO COMPLETE POWER AND CONTROL INTERFACE WIRING INCLUDING A) SCHEMATICS OR WIRING DIAGRAMS SHOWING ALL ELECTRICAL RELATED LOGIC, DEVICES AND ALL TERMINAL NUMBERS, B) INTERCONNECTING DIAGRAM BETWEEN ALL ENCLOSURES OR PANELS AND ANY EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT, C) WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, RECEPTACLES, ETC., D) BREAKER PANEL SCHEDULES

8 *

FOUNDATIONS (See Note 3)Foundation Loads (+15%/-0%)/Requirements needed to complete detailed foundation design (for SCR unit and all associated skids)

6 *

Stack Foundation Loads/Requirements 6 *Freestanding Stairway Foundation Loads/Requirements 6 *Miscellaneous Equipment Skids Loads/Requirements/Pick Points 10 *Anchor Bolt and Base Plate Details 6 *Column Location Plans 6 *

LAYOUT AND ASSEMBLY DRAWINGSOutlet Stack Assembly 12 *Platform/Walkway Layouts 12 *Stairway/Ladder layouts 12 *Free Standing Staircase Layout 12 *Stack Silencer Support Layouts 12 *

15

18

19




Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System AWARD DATE (TBD)Item Description Wks from Award Date LD

FACTORY TESTS

Factory Test Data and Results4 wks after

testing complete

Factory Calibration Data Sheets for Instrumentation 2 wks after 1st delivery

21 FINISHES (Coating Requirements/Specifications) 14WELDING PROCEDURES

Joint Details and Material of Construction for Structural Welds 14

Weld Procedures and Supporting PQRs 14ERECTION

Receiving, Storage, and Handling Requirements 14

Recommended Detailed Installation Instructions and Sequence 14

Field Erection Procedure Manual 14Field Erection Drawings - SCR 14Field Erection Drawings - Stack 14Module Lifting Sled - Drawing/Detail

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Pre-Operational Cleaning Guidelines 14

Priced Startup Spare Parts List 16Priced Operating (2 year) Spare Parts List 16Operations & Maintenance Manual - Preliminary for Review 20 *

Operations & Maintenance Manual per GR-B Article 8- Final 16 *

QUALITY CONTROLQuality Assurance Manual and Quality Control Plans 4Quality Record Matrix 16

Notes:1) Omission of information in the Submittal List above does not relieve the Seller

of responsibility to provide all required information for Contractor to complete design.2) Drawings shall include a Bill of Materials for the equipment shown.

A separate Bill of Material document is required with shipment. 3) Foundation loads and shears reported shall be, at minimum, as follows:

Dead, Live, Wind, Seismic, operating and excursion pressure and temperature. Also refer to technical sections GR-A, B and S1.

25

20

22

23

24

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 GR-C-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS C. SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS 1. PRESHIPMENT INSPECTION: The Contractor reserves the right to inspect the Equipment prior to shipment. The Seller shall notify the Contractor of all shipments at least three (3) weekstwo (2) months prior to the date of shipment to allow the Contractor to inspect the equipmentEquipment if so desired. The Equipment shall be cleaned of foreign objects and should be free of water as well as any oil not necessary to the preservation or maintenance, etc. of the Equipment prior to preparation for shipment. All liquids used for cleaning or hydrostatic testing shall be completely drained from all Equipment before shipment. Moisture cannot be tolerated. The Equipment shall be completely and totally dry prior to closure for shipping. 2. SHIPPING PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS: 2.1 Preparation for Shipment: All equipmentEquipment and materials shall be suitably coated, wrapped, or covered and boxed or crated for shipment and to prevent damage during handling and storage. Note that upon receipt at the Job Site, all materials may be unloaded and subject to inclement weather conditions for a period of time, including but not limited to water spray or mist, snow, and freezing temperatures. The Seller shall take necessary care in preparation to ensure safe storage during this time frame. Equipment having antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be protected by weathertight enclosures. Coated surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damages. Surfaces that are damaged shall be repaired. . All electrical equipment including panels shall be completely covered with high quality waterproof material, vacuum packing, and use of moisture absorbent material as appropriate. Seller shall provide instructions for the removal of all protective coatings. All external gasket surfaces and flange faces, couplings, rotating equipment shafts, bearings, and like items shall be thoroughly cleaned, coated with rust-preventive compound, and protected with suitable wood, metal, or other substantial type covering to ensure their full protection. All exposed threaded parts shall be greased and protected with metallic or other substantial type protectors. All pilferable items shall require adequate packaging to prevent loss. 2.1 Where necessary, heavy parts shall be mounted on skids so that cable slings for handling can be readily attached. Where it is unsafe to apply external slings to a package, attached slings shall be provided so that attachment can readily be made.


All piping, tubing, and conduit connections on equipment and Equipment containing insulating oils, anti-freeze solutions or other equipment openingsfluids shall be closed with rough usage covers or plugs. Female threaded openings shall be closed with forged steel plugs. The closures shall be tapedsuitably tagged to sealindicate the interiornature of the equipment. Open ends of piping, tubing, and conduit shall be sealed and tapedcontents and shipping and storage instructions. Seller shall include Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) with packing list of said oils, solutions and/or other fluids. All accessory items shall be available for shipment with the equipmentEquipment. Boxes and crates containing accessory items shall be marked so that they are identified with the main equipmentEquipment. The contents of each box and crate shall be indicated by markings on the exterior. Each container and bill orof material (BOM) shall have short term and long-term storage requirements clearly indicated. Returnable containers and special shipping devices shall be returned by the Seller’s field representative at the Seller’s expense. 2.2 Packing and Marking Instructions. Each individual package of each shipment shall be plainly tagged or marked for identification, as follows:

Marsh Landing Generating Station CONTRACT NO. _________ (Provided Later) Antioch, California [Specification Title] Specification: [Specification Number] [Equipment Name #1, ] [Equipment Tag Number (Later)] Equipment Name #2, Equipment Tag Number (Later) Equipment Name #3, Equipment Tag Number (Later) Equipment Name #4, Equipment Tag Number (Later) SPEC NO. 110 GROSS WEIGHT: _________LBS.

(Seller: Select the appropriate equipment title(s) for the shipment from the above list.)

Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment. All packages, i.e., boxes, crates, cases, bundles, loose pieces, etc., shall be marked consecutively from No. 1 upward. Skid Mounted materials shall have center of gravity clearly marked. Each packing list shall indicate whether shipment is partial or complete, and shall incorporate the following information for each package.

Package number.


Gross weight and net weight in pounds.

Dimensions in inches.

Complete description of material with identification of all parts to the respective drawings, catalogs, and instruction manuals. The first line of description must exactly match the Specification/Contract title/equipmentEquipment tag number. The identification of the part shall be contained on an indelible identification tag fastened to the respective part.

Specification file number.

Equipment Tag Number(s).

Item numbers used for the packing list must correlate to item numbers used for bill of materials or supply list or material list.

One copy of packing list shall be enclosed inside each box and one other weatherproofed copy securely fastened and weather-proofed to the outside of the package. In addition, the Seller shall email one copy of the packing list to the address provided in GR-C Article 3 below. 2.3 Special Tools: The Seller shall ship with each piece of equipmentEquipment one set of all special tools required for dismantling and maintenance of the equipmentEquipment. The tools shall be boxed separately and the boxes shall be marked with the large painted legend as follows: Marsh Landing Generating Station

CONTRACT NO. _________ (Provided Later) Antioch, California

[Specification Title] Specification: [Specification Number] [Equipment Name] [Equipment Tag Number] Special Tools for: [Specification Title] Specification: [Specification Number] [Equipment Name #1, ] [Equipment Tag Number (Later)] Equipment Name #2, ] [Equipment Tag Number (Later)] Equipment Name #3, [Equipment Tag Number (Later)] Spare Parts for: [Specification Title] Specification: [Specification Number] [Equipment Name #4, ] [Equipment Tag Number (Later)]


SPEC NO. 110 (Seller: Select the appropriate equipment title(s) for the shipment from the above list.) A weatherproofed itemized list of the contents shall also be attached to the outside of each box. 2.4 Shipment of each category of spare parts shall be packed in separate cases and all the details thereof listed in the O&M Manual. 2.5 2.4 Protection: Equipment having antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be protected by weathertight enclosures. Coated surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damages. Surfaces that are damaged shall be repaired. Electrical equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture and water damage. All exposed threaded parts shall be greased and protected. All piping, tubing, and conduit connections on equipmentEquipment and other equipment openings shall be closed with covers or plugs. Female threaded openings shall be closed with forged steel plugs. The closures shall be taped to seal the interior of the equipmentEquipment. Open ends of piping, tubing, and conduit shall be sealed and taped. 2.6 2.5 Rust-Preventive Compounds: Machined surfaces and other ferrous surfaces that should not be coated, but are subject to corrosion, shall be protected with rust-preventive compounds. Rust-preventive compounds that are used to protect surfaces of equipmentEquipment and piping that are exposed to feedwater or steam shall be completely water-soluble. Machined surfaces of weld end preparations shall be coated with consumable rust-preventive compounds that will not affect the quality of the weld. 3. SHIPPING NOTICE: The Seller shall submit to the Contractor two copies of shipping notices describing each shipment of material or equipment. The shipping notices shall be faxed or mailed to arrive approximately two (2) weeks ahead of the estimated shipment arrival and the driver shall call 48 hours prior to arrival. An electronic copy of the packing list shall be emailed one week prior to arrival at the job site to the designated contractcontact (Excel or compatible format). Seller shall request common carriers and/or haulers to contact Contractor’s Material Manager at the jobsite by telephone 48 hours prior to arrival. Jobsite receiving hours are 7:30 AM to 3:30 PM, Monday through Friday. Weekend or holiday deliveries will not be accepted without Contractor’s prior written approval. Trucks that arrive after 32:00 pmPM may not get offloaded until the next workday. Normal unloading hours are [LATER].business day. Contractor will not be responsible for any detention or other charges from carriers for deliveries attempted outside the days/times listed above, or for deliveries that arrive after 2:00PM which require offloading the next business day, or delivery delays caused by inclimate weather or equipment breakdowns.. The addressee for each shipment shall be as follows:


JOB SITE ADDRESS: [LATER]

Attention: [LATER] Email: [LATER] JOB SITE PHONE/FAX: Phone [LATER] Fax [LATER]

3.1 Preliminary Shipping Notice: For each shipment, Seller shall provide a Preliminary Shipping Notice a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to anticipated date of shipment from Seller’s plant or warehouse. Such Preliminary Shipping Notice shall be emailed to Contractor at both the home office and the jobsite at the addresses indicated in GR-B Article 2.2 and GR-C Article 3 above. The Preliminary Shipping Notice shall contain a description of the Equipment and Materials to be shipped, the expected number of pieces (boxes, crates, or other packages), the estimated total weight of the shipment, the estimated date of shipment, the estimated date of delivery, and for any piece greater than 10,000 lbs or eight (8) feet in any dimension, estimated weights and dimensions of individual pieces, as well as digital photos emailed to Contractor of the load departing its originating location. Furthermore, at this time Seller shall notify and provide information to Contractor for any shipped items that require special handling to prevent damaging equipment, such as specific lifting points, spreader beams, fork extensions, etc. 3.2 Packing Lists: Detailed Packing Lists, with all information required in GR-C Article 2.2 above, shall be created for each shipment. In addition to providing one copy on the inside of each package and securely fastening one copy on the outside of each package, the Seller shall email one copy of each packing list to Contractor’s jobsite office at the address listed in GR-C Article 3 above. For all shipments made by common carrier or hauler, the packing list shall be annotated with all jobsite contact information listing in GR-C Article 3 above and with the request to contact Contractor’s Material Manager 48 hours prior to delivery. 4. TRANSPORTATION REQUIREMENTS: See Special Conditions. 5. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: All hazardous materials shall be identified on the packing list and shipping notice. A copy of any hazardous materials documentation and MSDS shall be included with the packing list as well as marking the shipping units as "Hazardous Cargo."

END OF SECTION

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 GR-D-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

D. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM: Seller shall work to a documented quality assurance program including, but not limited to:

Identifying processes to plan and control all quality related activities. Ensuring the availability of resources and information necessary to support the operation and monitoring of these processes. Monitoring, measuring and analyzing the effectiveness of the quality processes. Implementing actions necessary to achieve planned results and continual improvement of these processes. Arranging for the protection of the product to include delivery to the specified destination. Ensuring quality assurance for all subvendors.

Seller shall submit copies of their quality assurance procedures to the Contractor per the Submittal Delivery Schedule (SDS) in Section GR-B. 2. QUALITY CONTROL: 2.1 Quality Control Plans: Seller shall establish and maintain a documented inspection system capable of producing objective evidence that all material, manufactured parts and assemblies comply with the quality requirements of the Contract. These plans shall be submitted to the Contractor for review per the Submittal Delivery Schedule (SDS) in Section GR-B. These plans shall include, but not be limited to: 2.1.1 Drawing Control: A plan to assure that the Contract requirements are incorporated into the design drawings to be submitted. Seller shall have a process for generating, checking, issuing, and incorporating Contractor comments in design drawings and documents. 2.1.2 Design Control: A plan to assure that the Work meets or exceeds the design documented on the latest Contractor-approved design drawings and data. Seller generated records, test reports, and certifications shall reference the appropriate drawing number and revision. The plan shall include the Seller’s process for documenting past equipment operating experience and evaluating this experience for incorporation into the current design. 2.1.3 Material Control: A plan to assure that the Work has materials of construction specified on the latest Contractor-approved drawings and data. Any changes to materials of construction


after design approval shall be documented and submitted to the Contractor for approval before incorporation of the materials into the Work.

2.1.4 Inspection and Testing Control: A plan to assure the following functions are controlled:

Identifying each inspection and test point and its relative location in the production cycle, including incoming, in process, packing, final, and site inspections. This shall include all fabrication checks, inspections, and examinations throughout the manufacturing process to assure compliance with code requirements and the Contract. A schedule of all inspection, hold, and test points shall be maintained and kept current throughout performance of the work. Identification of mandatory hold points for an item or process before the work can proceed.

Identification of the characteristics to be inspected, examined, and tested at each point and procedures and acceptance criteria to be used. This shall include a plan to assure all testing required by code and the Contract is performed, documented, and acceptable to the required standards. Availability at inspection points of applicable drawings, instructions, etc. Maintenance and calibration of suitable inspection and test equipment. Calibration control shall assure that all measuring and test equipment used to verify compliance with the Contract and code requirements is properly calibrated and traceable to a national standard such as NIST. For items supplied that require calibration certification, the calibration data shall be no more than 60 days old at the time of shipment.

Identification of where sub-vendor’s services will be employed and Seller’s plan for inspecting sub-vendor’s work. This list shall include sub-vendors to the subvendor. Seller shall inspect the sub-vendor’s work to the extent necessary to assure that proper materials and equipment are furnished and the fabrication and erection are accomplished in accordance with the Contract and code requirements. 2.2 Contractor Verification: In order to verify compliance with quality requirements, Contractor shall have access at all times, to all places where materials or equipment are being prepared or manufactured, including sub-vendor facilities. Seller shall advise Contractor of the readiness for inspection at least 1 week prior to a selected witness or hold point according to the schedule of inspection, hold, and test points. Any changes to this schedule shall be communicated to the Contractor at least one week prior to the inspection, hold or test point, to allow Contractor to be present. Review of quality procedures and inspection of equipmentEquipment by Contractor may include (but not be limited to) the following activities:

Quality audits of Seller’s implementation of Quality ProceduresAssurance and Quality


PlansControl Program.

Witnessing of inspections and tests and/or verifications of inspection records including:

Compliance of raw material with specified requirements.

Compliance of manufactured parts, assemblies and final items with specifications, drawings, (including incorporation of Contractor’s comments), standards and good engineering practice.

Periodic inspection of Seller’s design and production activities.

Packing for shipment including check for completeness of shipment, handling requirements, and identification.

Seller shall keep Contractor informed, in advance, of progress of the Scope of Work in its various stages so that arrangements can be made for inspections and tests. Seller shall also provide without additional charge, all reasonable facilities and assistance for the safety and convenience of Contractor in the performance of his duties. All of the required tests shall be made to Seller’s expense, including the cost of all samples used. In the event of the postponement, by Seller, of tests previously scheduled, or of the necessity of testsretesting due to unsatisfactory results of the original tests, or other reasons attributable to Seller, Seller will bear all costs for new tests and the costs incurred by Contractor of his nominated representative in re-inspecting the non-conforming item or its replacement. The inspections and tests by Contractor of any components or lots thereof do not relieve Seller of any responsibility, whatsoever, regarding defects or other failures that may be found before the end of the Warranty Period. If the Contractor has material findings as part of the verification of the Work, Contractor shall be reimbursed for the expenses incurred during the verification, and any further expenses incurred in re-verifying repairs and any necessary changes, physical or programmatic. 2.3 Non-conformances: Seller’s and Subvendor’ssub-vendor’s Quality Control Plans shall provide a means to identify and isolate items not conforming to quality requirements and/or the Contract. All such items shall be reported to Contractor via a non-conformance report that shall identify:

The identification and description of the item.

The relevant specification, drawing, etc. including revision number.

The cause of the non-conformance.

The proposal for resolution of the non-conformance.


A concession application including the technical justification and the appropriate supporting documents if applicable.

The proposed action to prevent re-occurrence.

Non-conformance reports shall be submitted within 14 days of discovery of the non-conformance. Contractor shall have authority to reject any equipmentEquipment or part thereof considered unsatisfactory and/or not in accordance with the Contract. All non-conformance reports that document a deviation from Contractor-approved design shall be submitted to the Contractor for review and approval. Any work performed by Seller prior tobefore Contractor approval of the non-conformance shall be at Seller’s risk. 2.4 Quality Records: Seller shall maintain records of all tests, inspections, and examinations as required by code, the quality plans, and the Contract. These records shall be traceable to each individual item supplied under the Contract by reference to a unique item identification and/or serial number. All records, including audit reports shall be made available for inspection by Contractor during all stages of fabrication and/or assembly. Seller shall prepare a Records Matrix that lists all Seller standard quality records produced, which will be included in the equipment O&M Manuals (Preliminary & Final submittals). Seller must make available any quality records that are required by the applicable codes, the Seller’s quality plan, during manufacturing or this Contract at the requestfabrication of the Contractor for no additional charge.Equipment similar to the example at the end of this Section. The Matrix shall be submitted to the Contractor through the Company per the Submittal Delivery Schedule (SDS), and should include a complete list) at the end of all qualitySection GR-B. The Contractor will identify which records that willare required to be submitted to the Contractor. The Seller may submit actual copies of quality records after the before shipment. Within 14 days of the final O&M manuals as inserts. All quality records for shop tests must be sent prior to equipment shipment. , Seller shall submit a complete package or the designated records under separate cover. The package shall be clearly marked “QUALITY RECORDS” and shall be submitted to the Site, ATTENTION: DOCUMENT CONTROL. Records shall be available at the time of equipment delivery. Such records shall include relevant certifications and documentation that would facilitate the general traceability of component items or materials. Records for work performed on the Job Site shall be submitted within 14 days of completion of the work. Duplicate records for multiple components need not be supplied, provided each unique item is traceable to the appropriate record. In cases of multiple shipments, submittal of the records shall be made within 14 days of the final shipment.


All records generated during the course of performance of the Scope of Work shall be retained by Seller for a minimum period of three (3) years (or longer if required by code) from the date of Acceptance or supplied to Contractor for his retention. Review and comment by Contractor of the quality assurance procedures, quality plans, inspection and test arrangements operated by either Seller or his Subvendorssub-vendors, will not relieve Seller of his obligation to provide equipmentEquipment which complies with the requirements of the Contract.Specification.

QUALITY RECORDS MATRIX EXAMPLE Document/Record Disposition at job completion

Audit Records Balance Reports Calibration Records Coating/Thickness Records Concrete Test Reports Corrective Action Records Electrical Continuity checks Electrical Loop Checks Electrical Relay checks Equipment Alignment Reports Final Certification (Site Data Reports - ASME I) Grout Placement Reports Hydrotest/Leak test Reports Material Requests/Issuance Material Test Reports Megger checks NDE Reports Nonconformance Reports Paint Records Personnel qualification records (NDE, welding, etc) Post Weld Heat Treat charts Process sheets/travelers/workplans (ASME Boiler/piping) Process sheets/travelers/workplans (B31.1 Non-boiler piping)

Process sheets/travelers/workplans (Other) Purchase Orders (site permanent plant) Quality Surveillance Reports Receiving Reports Run-in Reports Site Procedures Site Work Instructions Soils/Compaction Tests


Termination Reports Torque records Training Records Trip/Timing Reports Vendor Certifications (CMTR, Data Reports, etc) Welder qualification records

END OF SECTION

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 E1-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

SECTION E1 MOTORS-INDUCTION SQUIRREL CAGE TYPE 1. GENERAL: This Specification details the requirements for squirrel cage induction type motors supplied by AC voltage sources. The types of motors covered by this Specification include the following: 1.1 Motor Types:

a. fractional horsepower motors,

b. integral horsepower motors, 1HP through 249200 HP,

c. integral horsepower motors, 250HP andor greater,

d. hermetic refrigerant motors 1.2 Applicable Standards: The latest revisions of the following publications shall be considered a part of this Specification: 1.2.1 National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA MG 1 "Motors and Generators."

NEMA MG 1 “Motors and Generators”. NEMA General Specification for Consultants, Industrial and Municipal: NEMA Premium® Efficiency Electric Motors (600 Volts or Less).

1.2.2 American National Standards Institute/The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

ANSI/IEEE C50.41-2000 “Polyphase Induction Motors for Power Generating Stations”.

ANSI/IEEE Std. 85 “"Test Procedures for Airborne Noise Measurements on

Rotating Electric Machinery”.".

ANSI/IEEE Std. 112 “ "Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors”.".

AmericanANSI/IEEE Std. 43 “Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery”

1.2.3 Antifriction Bearing Manufacturers Association ABMAAFBMA Standards.


1.2.4 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) – Applicable for motors located in hazardous locations only:

a. UL 674 “Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division I Hazardous Locations”

b. UL 1004 “Electric Motors” 1.3 Motor Selection: The Equipment supplier shall provide motors selected to start and operate the driven loads at the most severe condition of loading. Motor types, horsepower, drive arrangement, and enclosure shall be suitable for the operating conditions and environment of the driven load. Motors between 200 HP and 250 HP shall be selected by the Seller to follow the requirements of section 3 (460V motors) or section 4 (4000V motors) after discussing with Contractor advantages of each design. 1.3.1 Continuous Duty Motors: Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be designed for operation at continuous duty in the ambient temperature and altitude specified in Section GR-A, Article 3 - Site Conditions. Intermittent duty, submersible, and hermetic motors shall be selected and sized based on the anticipated service conditions and operating ambient temperatures where recognized and defined as standard by the Equipmentequipment codes and standards. . 1.3.2 Service Factor: Service factor requirements are detailed in Table 1The motor nameplate horsepower multiplied by the motor nameplate service factor shall be at least 15% greater than the driven equipment operating range maximum brake horsepower. Motor service factor shall not be used in selecting motor for operating or rated conditions, even for short duration loads. Pump motors shall be non-overloading at any point of the head capacity curve. All low voltage motors shall have a 1.15 service factor.

Table 1 - Service Factor Requirements Motor Nameplate Horsepower Service Factor Requirement

Low voltage motors The service factor shall be 1.0 or 1.15. Service factor 1.0 may only be used if the motor nameplate horsepower exceed the maximum expected continuous horsepower by at least 10%.

Medium voltage motors

The service factor shall be 1.0 or 1.15. Service factor 1.0 may only be used if the motor nameplate horsepower exceed the maximum expected continuous horsepower by at least 10%.

1.3.3 Motor Efficiency: In general, motors shall be of the highest efficiency readily available for the specified application. All constant speed, continuously operated motors rated 1 HP up to and including 200 HP shall be of Premium Efficiency design with a 1.15 service factor. Motors


larger than 200 HP but less than 1000 HP shall have a minimum efficiency of 95%. For motors equal to and larger than 1000 hp, the minimum efficiency shall be 96%.

1.3.3 1.3.3.1 Motor efficiency shall be measured in accordance with IEEE Std. 112, Test Method B. These motors shall be identified on the nameplate with an efficiency number in accordance with NEMA Standards. Specific efficiency requirements are detailed in Table 2.

Table 2 - Efficiency Requirements

Constant speed, continuously operated, integral low voltage motors

Premium Efficiency design as described by NEMA

Medium voltage motors less than 1000 hp 95% Medium voltage motors greater than 1000 hp 96%

1.3.4 Motor Bearings: If bearings are provided that require water as the cooling medium the Contractor must review and accept the design. On motor through Frame 449T, bearing shall be anti-friction, or the “re-greasable in service” type, with motors either running or stopped. Anti-Friction Bearings: 1.3.4 Motor Bearings: All horizontal medium voltage motors shall be provided with split sleeve bearings of the oil ring type and include a sample drain line for obtaining bearing oil samples. All vertical medium voltage motors shall be provided with Kingsbury thrust and ball guide type bearings. All other motors, with the exception of those included with forced-feed lube oil systems, will have externally lubricated anti-friction bearings.

1.3.4.1 Where motors are installed in dusty, dirty areas consideration for using anti-friction bearings will be made regardless of size. Antifriction bearings shall provide an L10 life of 100130,000 hours for direct connected motors in continuous use, not less than 50,000 hours for motors used intermittently, and not less than 42,500 hours for belt or chain connected service under continuous duty at rated load and speed calculated in accordance with ABMA Standards. AFBMA Standards. Horizontal motors with antifriction bearings shall be regreasable in service and shall be self-lubricating. Grease cavities with drain plugs, grease fittings, and pipes shall be provided for flushing and regreasing the motor bearings while in service. 1.3.4.2 Medium voltage motors shall be prepared for extended outdoor storage by protecting the motor bearings with either a protective grease covering or liquid preservative. The motors shall be tagged to show that a preservative has been used. The procedure to be followed before motors are placed in operation shall also be indicated on that tag. 1.3.4.3 Thrust bearings or angular contact bearings shall be provided if required by the application and conditions of the driven load and shall have provisions for regreasing and flushing. Thrust bearings for vertical motors shall be capable of operating for extended periods at any thrust loading imposed by the specific piece of driven equipment during starting and normal operation without damage to the bearing, the motor frame, or other motor parts.

1.3.4.4 Vertical motors shall be supplied with thrust bearings suitable for the thrust rating and speed of the application. If spring loading is furnished, the guide bearing shall not be preloaded during normal operation. This shall be true during starting and normal operation and shall not


cause damage to the bearings, the motor frame, or other motor parts. Stacked bearings are not allowed

1.3.4.5 All grease lubricated radial bearings shall be double-shielded. Bearings and bearing housings shall be designed to permit disassembly in the field for inspection of the bearings or removal of the rotor. Bearing seats on the shaft and in the bearing housing shall have accuracy equal to that of the bearing. If the driven equipment has a forced-feed lube oil system then the motor shall also utilize this lube oil system and sleeve bearings instead of antifriction bearings as described below. 1.3.5 Bearing Lubrication: Bearing lubricants shall contain a corrosion inhibitor. The type and grade of lubricant shall be indicated on a nameplate attachment to the motor frame or end shield adjacent to the lubricant-filling device. Self-cooled bearing lubrication systems shall have oil reservoir capacities and ventilation of the bearing housings as required to maintain proper cooling of the oil and bearings under the maximum ambient temperature conditions specified.

Seller shall supply lube oil and cooling requirements with proposal. If the driven Equipment has a forced-feed lube oil system then the motor shall also utilize this lube oil system. 1.3.6 Sleeve Bearing Design: Split sleeve bearings shall be oil ring lubricated type with floating labyrinth seals with oil level sight glasses. Sight glasses shall be marked with required oil level at motor running and motor at stand-still and shall be readily observable. Stationary labyrinth seals shall be bronze material. The oil ring shall be one piece construction; split-type construction will not be acceptable.

1.3.6.1 The internal systems furnished with vertical motors shall include oil reservoirs for the bearings. 1.3.6.2 Sleeve bearings, end bells, and bearing housings for horizontal motors shall be split-type when available for the frame and the enclosure specified. Air gap measurement holes or other acceptable means will be provided in each motor end enclosure for checking air gap of sleeve bearing motors. The sleeve bearings shall be designed and centrally located with respect to running magnetic center to prevent the rotor axial thrust from being continuously applied against either end of the bearing.

1.3.6.3 The motors shall be capable of withstanding, without abnormal damage, the axial thrusts that are developed when the motor is energized. Magnetic drain plugs shall be provided for draining and replacing bearing oil. Drain and fill locations shall be located so that each bearing and reservoir can be conveniently flushed, drained and refilled. Shaft end float on split sleeve bearing designs shall be limited to +/-½" unless the driven equipment requires more float. 1.3.6.4 Motors rated 1500 HP and larger shall have at least one sleeve bearing insulated to prevent the passage of shaft currents. If both shaft end sleeve bearings are interchangeable, both sleeve bearings shall be insulated.


1.3.6.5 Bearings and bearing housings shall be designed to permit disassembly in the field for inspection of the bearings or removal of the rotor. Bearing oil sumps for sleeve bearings shall be provided with heaters for operation below 32oF. Heater voltage shall be 208V, 1 Phase. 1.3.71.3.6 Motor Starting Characteristics: Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall be designed for full voltage, across-the-line starting and frequent starting where required. Unless specific design conditions dictate otherwise, motors shall meet or exceed values of the torque at locked rotor, pull-up and breakdown in accordance with NEMA MG-1 and exhibit the starting characteristics as shown in Table 3. The thermal limit curves of the motor shall be coordinated with the starting time of the load.

Table 3 - Motor Starting Characteristics

Voltage range at which low and medium voltage motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating the driven load to full speed without damage to the motor or the Equipment

+10 to -20% of the motor rated voltage

Normal operating voltage range +/-10% of the motor rated voltage

Nominal locked rotor current not to exceed for motors 15 HP and above

650% of full load current at rated voltage, or NEMA locked rotor code letter G

Voltage range at which the time required to accelerate the load to full speed shall be less than the allowable locked rotor time limit

80% and 100% of rated motor voltage, at operating temperature

Speed torque characteristics

NEMA Design B for all motors through 249 hp. Characteristics shall be as specified in section 4.3 or NEMA Design B, whichever is more stringent, for motors 250 hp and above.

1.3.7.1 Three phase motors of voltage ratings 460 and 4000 volts shall be capable of starting and accelerating the driven load to full speed without damage to the motor or the equipment at +10 to –20% of the motor nameplate rated voltage. Motors shall operate over a +/- 10% range from their rated voltage. 1.3.7.2 Motors 15 HP and above shall have a nominal locked rotor current not exceeding 650% of full load current at rated voltage, or not exceeding NEMA locked rotor code letter G. The thermal limit curves of the motor shall be coordinated with the starting time of the load. The time required to accelerate the load to full speed at 90% and 100% rated voltage shall be less than the allowable locked rotor time limit at 90% and 100% rated voltage at operating temperature.

1.3.7.3 Unless the specific Equipment design conditions dictate otherwise, all motors shall have NEMA Design B speed torque characteristics, class F insulation, and shall meet or exceed values of torque at locked rotor, pull-up and breakdown in accordance with NEMA MG-1.


1.3.7.4 Motors employed in applications with starting times exceeding 15 seconds shall be provided with a clear time vs. current starting curve. All motors shall require a class 10 or 20 overload relay for protection. If a higher class overload relay is required for a long acceleration time, then the motor starters shall be provided by the supplier. 1.3.81.3.7 Variable Speed Drive Duty: Motors furnished for use with variable frequency drive Equipment shall be compatible with the VFD output characteristics, and shall be derated if necessary to prevent overheating at any of the specified speed ranges. Motors shall meet all other requirements specified herein. Seller shall be responsible for supplying VFD Equipment and line side filtering Equipment for all variable speed drive motors. 1.3.91.3.8 Two Speed Motors: Equipment specified for two speed operation shall utilize two speed single winding or dual winding constant horsepower, constant torque, or variable torque motors as required by the driven load. Motors shall meet all other requirements as specified herein. 1.3.101.3.9 Special Service Motors: Special purpose motors provided with a Seller's package Equipment design shall be the Seller's standard proven motor furnished completely assembled, mounted, lubricated and ready for operation. Special purpose motors shall be suitable for the location, atmosphere, ambient temperature, duty cycle, and operating conditions of the package Equipment. Continuous running motors shall meet the Premium efficiency, starting requirements, service factor, and duty requirements as specified herein. Special service motors may include but not be limited to the following:

a. Crane motors

b. Elevator motors

c. Hoist motors

d. Door operators

e. Gate operators

f. Reversing valve operators

g. Submersible sump pumps

h. D.C. motor drives (from AC rectifiers)

i. Submersible motors 1.3.111.3.10 Windings: All motors shall have copper windings. The winding temperature rise for all motors shall not exceed a class B insulation system temperature rise as defined by ANSI C50.41.


1.3.121.3.11 Terminal Box: Terminal boxeshousings for totally enclosed motors shall be cast iron. Terminal boxeshousings for all other motors shall be cast iron, pressed steel, or fabricated steel. Terminal boxesHousings shall be diagonally split with a gasket between the split halves of the housing. Each terminal boxhousing shall have a threaded opening to provide a watertight, rigid connection with the conduit, and shall be designed for rotation in 90-degree increments, or have provisions included otherwise, to receive conduit from any of four directions. Motor lead positioners shall be furnished between the terminal box and the motor frame. All motor power lead terminal boxeshousings shall be sized to accommodate the terminations defined in the tables below or as defined during the design prcess:at least one size larger than normally furnished as standard.

600V Cable Termination Requirements Maximum Full-Load Current (Amp min – Amp max)

QTY of Terminations per Phase

Cable Size per Phase

<25A LATER LATER 25-49A LATER LATER 50-99A LATER LATER 100-149A LATER LATER 150-199A LATER LATER 200-249A LATER LATER 250-300A LATER LATER 301-400A LATER LATER 401-500A LATER LATER 5000V Cable Termination Requirements Maximum Full-Load Current (Amp min – Amp max)


Cable Size per Phase

<25A LATER LATER 25-49A LATER LATER 50-99A LATER LATER 100-149A LATER LATER 150-199A LATER LATER 200-249A LATER LATER 250-300A LATER LATER 301-400A LATER LATER 401-500A LATER LATER 1.3.12 Space Heaters: All medium voltage motors, all outdoor motors, all motors located in damp indoor areas, and all indoor motors 25 HP and larger shall have motor space heaters. Voltage requirementsSpace heaters shall be suitable for space heaters are shown in Table 4.


Table 4 - Heater Voltage Requirements Heater Capacity (W) Heater Rated Voltage Heater Operating Voltage Less than 1200W 240 VAC single phase 115 VAC single phase Equal to or greater than 1200W 480 VAC three phase 208 VAC three phase

1.3.13 operation on 115 VAC. Space heaters shall be rated at twice (as a minimum) the application voltage. Space heaters shall be located and insulated so they do not damage motor components or finish. Space heaters shall be sized as required to maintain the motor internal temperature above the dew point when the motor is idle. The space heaters shall not cause winding temperatures to exceed rated limiting values, nor cause thermal protective device "over temperature" indication when the motor is not energized. Space heater leads shall be stranded copper cable with 600 volt insulation and shall include terminal connectors. 1.3.141.3.13 Vertical Motors: Vertical motors shall have the same general requirements as horizontal motors except as follows: shafts may be solid or hollow as applicable to the application, enclosures shall be WPI except medium voltage motors or motors with frames larger than 449T shall be WPII, bearings shall be thrust-type locked for thrust in both directions, and motors shall be provided with reverse direction ratchets when on pumping applications where water can turbine through the pump backwards. 1.3.15 Air Conditioner Motors: 1.3.15.11.3.14 Air conditioner motors (and fans) shall be mounted on anti-vibration bases to isolate the units from the building structure. 1.3.15.21.3.15 Where shipment permits, motor output shafts shall be complete with motor half-coupling mounted, connected to the driven Equipmentequipment, and adjusted ready for operation. Where motor size prevents shipment with motor connected to driven Equipmentequipment, the motor half-coupling shall be factory-mounted for field connection to the driven Equipmentequipment. 2. FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS 2.1 General: Fractional horsepower motors shall be provided as required to drive the specified Equipment. Motors shall conform to the applicable standards referenced in Section 1.2 "Applicable Standards." Motor selection in regards to sizing, service factor, and starting conditions shall be as specified in Section 1.3 "Motor Selection." Fractional horsepower motors may be of either a general purpose or special purpose design as specified in Section 1.3.9. 10, Fractional horsepower motors shall be single speed, squirrel-cage induction, energy efficient, mill and millchemical duty type as specified herein. Cast iron frames and copper windings only. 2.2 Fractional Horsepower Motor Voltage Ratings: Unless otherwise specified, typical voltage ratings for fractional horsepower motors shall be as follows:


a. Below 3/4 ½ HP and smaller: 115 VAC, single phase, 60 hz., except for reversing motor operated valve service or damper operators which shall be 460VAC, three phase, 60 hz.

b. Between 3/4Greater than ½ HP and 249HP: 460 VAC, three phase, 60 hz.

Motor nameplate horsepower ratings shall not be exceeded when the equipment is operating within the limits of the design conditions specified. The motor loading shall not exceed the motor service factor rating on startup conditions or at the equipment maximum load point. 2.3 Integral Thermal Overloads: All single phase fractional horsepower motors shall be provided with integral thermal overload protection. Thermal overloads shall typically be automatic reset type unless the Seller's package Equipment design using special purpose motors requires manual reset thermal overloads. If manual reset overloads are used with package Equipment, the reset means shall be easily accessible without major disassembly of the Equipment. 2.4 Enclosures: All fractional horsepower motors shall be self-cooled and shall have a cast iron frame.. Fully guarded enclosures shall be furnished on all motor enclosure types having accessible moving parts other than shafts. All fractional horsepower motors shall be open drip proof (ODP) for clean, dry indoor locations, and shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) for outdoor locations or damp indoor or dusty indoor locations. If explosion proof enclosures are required, the motor shall be UL listed for the Class and Group of the hazardous area location as defined by the National Electrical Code for any application. Each TEFC or TENV motor shall be provided with a condensation drain hole and a breather/drain plug. Explosion proof motors shall have a combination breather/drain U.L. listed for the Class and Group of the hazardous area. Motor enclosures shall have all exposed metal surfaces protected with a moisture and corrosion-resistant polyester paint or coating. Assembly hardware shall be zinc plated or stainless steel. Mounting shall be foot mounted base or C-face mounting as required by the Equipment. Shafts of motors shall be furnished with corrosion-resistant treatment or shall be of corrosion-resistant metal. All motors shall be completely assembled with the driven equipment, lubricated, and ready for operation. In addition to the preceding requirements for outdoor service motors, totally enclosed motors with NEMA waterproof features shall have enclosure interior surfaces and the stator and rotor air gap surfaces protected with corrosion-resistant alkyd enamel or with polyester or epoxy paint or coating. Bolts, nuts, screws, and other hardware items shall be corrosion-resistant or heavy cadmium-plated metal. A rotating labyrinth shaft seal shall be furnished on the shaft extension end of the motor. In addition to the preceding requirements for outdoor service motors, totally enclosed motors with NEMA waterproof features shall have enclosure interior surfaces and the stator and rotor air


gap surfaces protected with corrosion-resistant alkyd enamel or with polyester or epoxy paint or coating. Bolts, nuts, screws, and other hardware items shall be corrosion-resistant or heavy cadmium-plated metal. A rotating labyrinth shaft seal shall be furnished on the shaft extension end of the motor. 2.5 Insulation: All fractional horsepower motors shall have Class F non-hygroscopic insulation with Class B temperature rise limits per NEMA MG-1. Insulation shall be treated to prevent deterioration due to high humidity, corrosive vapors, or abrasive dust. 2.6 Capacitors: Single phase fractional horsepower motors shall be capacitor start type unless the special purpose motor requirements of package Equipment does not require capacitor start motors. Capacitor enclosures and mounting hardware shall be compatible with the motor enclosure type. Capacitors shall be furnished in removable metal enclosures mounted on the motor frame. Lock washers shall be provided under the heads of the enclosure hold-down bolts. 2.7 Motor Leads: Terminal lead details including identification, dimensions, terminal type, etc. shall be in accordance with NEMA MG-1. Permanent instructions for voltage connections shall be permanently marked inside the terminal housing, on the nameplate, or engraved on the motor frame. 2.8 Terminal Box: GeneralTerminal boxes shall be provided for general purpose fractional horsepower motors. Boxes shall be providedconsistent with terminal boxesthe motor enclosure type and be large enough to attach a conduit and terminate wiring to the motor leads. A grounding means shall be provided in the terminal box for attaching an Equipment ground conductor to the motor frame. Special purpose fractional horsepower motors using line cords shall be provided with an 8 foot SJO cord (2 conductor with ground) with a NEMA 5-15 plug, and a bushed cable protector at the entrance into the motor. 2.82.9 Nameplates: All fractional horsepower motors Each motor shall be provided with a permanent stainless steel or aluminum nameplate firmly attached to the motor frame with corrosion-resistant metal attachment pins. Nameplates shall be either embossed raised letter or engraved and enamel filled. Nameplates on motors designed for service in hazardous areas must include the location class and group design and the maximum operating temperature value or operation temperature code number in addition to the following specified motor data. Nameplate information shall be described in English units, . Minimum information with minimum data according to NEMA MG-1, ANSI C50.41,MG1 and as follows:

a. Motor manufacturer and serial number

b. Horsepower, NEMA design letter

c. Speed in RPM

d. Voltage/phase/hertz


e. Service factor

f. Running load amps/locked rotor amps or locked rotor KVA code letter

g. Duty rating and ambient temperature

h. Insulation class

i. Enclosure type j. Nominal efficiency

2.92.10 Rotation Indication: All motors shall have the direction of rotation marked by an arrow mounted visibly on the stator frame near the terminal housing or on the nameplate, and the leads marked for phase sequence T1, T2, T3, to correspond to the direction of rotation and supply voltage sequence. 2.102.11 Tests: Routine factory tests in accordance with NEMA MG-1 shall be performed to determine that there are no mechanical or electrical defects associated with the fractional horsepower motors. 2.112.12 Fractional HP Motor Submittal Data: The attached Motor Data sheet shall be completed and submitted for each fractional HP motor furnished. 3. INTEGRAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS, 1 HP THROUGH 249200 HP 3.1 General: Integral horsepower motors, rated 1 HP through 249up to and including 200 HP, shall be provided as required to drive the specified Equipment. Motors shall conform to the applicable standards referenced in Section 1.2 "Applicable Standards." Motor selection in regards to sizing, service factor, efficiency, and starting conditions shall be as specified in Section 1.3 "Motor Selection." Integral horsepower motors, 1 HP to 249200 HP, may be of the horizontal direct coupled, horizontal belt driven, or vertical type, single speed, squirrel-cage induction, energy efficient, mill and chemical duty type as specified herein. Cast iron frames and copper windings only. 3.2 Integral Horsepower Motor Voltage Ratings, 1 HP through 249200 HP: Unless otherwise specified, typical voltage ratings for integral horsepower motors shall be 460 VAC, three phase 60 hz. Motors may be dual rated 230/460 VAC, but shall be furnished for 460 VAC, three phase, 60 hz operation. 3.3 Enclosure: Integral horsepower motorsMotors rated 1 HP through 249200 HP shall be provided with enclosures suitable for the location, atmosphere, ambient temperature, and operating condition of the driven load. Motors shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) and the fan covers shall meet NEMA MG 1 requirements for a fully guarded machine. All TEFC motors shall be provided with condensation drain holes and rotating shaft seals. Drain holes


shall be provided with Crouse-Hinds Type ECD “Universal” combination water drain-breather plugs, or approved equal.

3.3.1 Motors located in areas defined by the National Electrical Code as classified hazardous areas shall be listed as suitable for the Class and Group associated with the hazardous area and have appropriate explosion proof enclosure and accessory boxes. Motors specified for Class I, Group D locations shall be UL approved and labeled. Explosion proof motors shall have a combination breather/drain U.L. listed for the Class and Group of the hazardous area location. 3.3 3.3.2 TEFC and explosion proof enclosures shall have cast iron frame, bearing supports and end housing. Aluminum enclosure parts are not acceptable. Motors specified for Class I, Group D locations shall be UL approved and labeled. All TEFC motors shall be provided with condensation drain holes and rotating shaft seals. Drain holes shall be provided with Crouse-Hinds Type ECD “Universal” combination water drain-breather plugs, or approved equal. Explosion proof motors shall have a combination breather/drain U.L. listed for the Class and Group of the hazardous area location. Foot mounted motors shall have feet integrally cast with the frame. "C" face motors shall be provided where required for the driven Equipment. Motor enclosures shall have all exposed metal surfaces protected with a moisture and corrosion-resistant polyester paint or coating. Assembly hardware shall be zinc plated or stainless steel. Lubricating oil, seal oil and transformer accessory motors shall be totally enclosed. In addition to the preceding requirements for outdoor service motors, totally enclosed motors with NEMA waterproof features shall have enclosure interior surfaces and the stator and rotor air gap surfaces protected with corrosion-resistant alkyd enamel or with polyester or epoxy paint or coating. Bolts, nuts, screws, and other hardware items shall be corrosion-resistant or heavy cadmium-plated metal. A rotating labyrinth shaft seal shall be furnished on the shaft extension end of the motor. In addition to the preceding requirements for outdoor service motors, totally enclosed motors with NEMA waterproof features shall have enclosure interior surfaces and the stator and rotor air gap surfaces protected with corrosion-resistant alkyd enamel or with polyester or epoxy paint or coating. Bolts, nuts, screws, and other hardware items shall be corrosion-resistant or heavy cadmium-plated metal. A rotating labyrinth shaft seal shall be furnished on the shaft extension end of the motor. 3.4 Insulation: All integral horsepower motors rated 1 HP, including frames 143T through 249 HP449T, shall have Class F non-hygroscopic insulation with Class B temperature rise limits per NEMA MG-1. Class F non-hygroscopic insulation shall be furnished, but shall be limited to Class B temperature rise. Insulation shall be treated to prevent deterioration due to high humidity, corrosive vapors or abrasive dust. Motors for cooling tower fan drive service shall be vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) with an epoxy resin thermal setting compound for additional moisture protection. The insulation resistance of the entire winding, corrected to 40°C shall not be less than motor rated kV+1 MΩ for all windings.


3.43.5 Rotor and Stator: Integral horsepower rotors rated 1 HP through 249 HP shall be solid cast squirrel cage type adequately sized to avoid overheating of the motor during acceleration. Rotor and shaft shall be dynamically balanced with vibration limits not exceeding peak to peak amplitude values per NEMA MG-1. Stator windings shall be constructed with copper magnet wire, random wound. Stator core shall be constructed from high grade electrical steel to reduce magnetic and load losses. 3.53.6 Motor Leads: Motor leads for all integral horsepower motors rated 1 HP through 249 HP shall be marked and terminated with compression type, double indent two-hole lugs in accordance with NEMA MG-1. 480V AC power cables smaller than #6 AWG will use one-hole lugs. Leads between motor stator and conduit terminal box shall be insulated copper. When dual voltage motors are furnished, the leads shall easily be connected or reconnected for the desired operating voltage. Permanent instructions for voltage connections shall be furnished on the motor nameplate. Leads shall be flexible, non-wicking with a gasketed exit bushing from the motor frame into terminal box. All leads shall be permanently wired in accordance with the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 2. 3.63.7 Terminal Box: All integralIntegral horsepower motors 1 HP through 249 HP shall have leads brought into frame mounted terminal boxes. Terminal boxes shall be oversized, split diagonal type for motors 7½ HP and larger with a gasket between the split halves of the housing. A clamp type grounding terminal shall be provided inside the terminal box for terminating a dedicated Equipmentequipment grounding conductor routed with the motor circuit conductors. Locations of terminal boxes shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Locations of terminal boxes shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. For motors 100 horsepowerHP or larger, drawings shall be submitted with terminal box housing dimensions and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. 3.73.8 Frame Ground Lug: All integral horsepower motors rated 1100 HP through 249 HPand larger shall be provided with a ground pad or ground bolt tapped and mounted on the motor frame in addition to the terminal box mounted ground lug. 3.83.9 Nameplates: All integral horsepower motors rated 1 HP through 249 HP shall be provided with a permanent stainless steel or aluminum nameplate firmly attached to the motor frame with corrosion-resistant metal attachment pins. Nameplates shall be either embossed raised letter or engraved and enamel filled. Nameplates on motors designed for service in hazardous areas must include the location class and group design and the maximum operating temperature value or operation temperature code number in addition to the following specified motor data. Nameplate information shall be in English units, with minimum data according to NEMA MG-1, ANSI C50.41,MG1 and as follows:

a. Motor manufacturer, model or serial number, frame size, enclosure type

b. Horsepower, NEMA design letter, speed in RPM, service factor

c. Voltage, phase, hertz


d. Running amps, locked rotor amps or locked rotor KVA code letter, full load amps

e. Duty rating, ambient temperature

f. Insulation class

g. Efficiency data

h. Bearing data including ABMAAFBMA bearing identification number for motors furnished with rolling element bearings.

i. Voltage or speed connection diagram

j. Frame size and enclosure type

k. Starting limitations, if any

Separate permanent nameplates shall be provided identifying the following; space heater wattage and voltage, bearing lubrication requirements, the direction of rotation for the supply voltage sequence T1-T2-T3, and the magnetic center at rated load. Separate permanent nameplates shall be provided identifying bearing lubrication requirements. 3.9 Shaft Couplings: Direct connected integral horsepower motors rated 1 HP through 249 HP shall be connected to driven Equipment through a flexible coupling. Motor shafts shall be keyed. Maximum end float shall be limited to motor manufacturer's recommendations to prevent axial thrust from being transmitted to the motor bearings.. 3.10 Shaft: The shaft shall be furnished with corrosion-resistant treatment or shall be of corrosion-resistant material. 3.11 Mountings: Unless mounted on a common frame with the driven Equipment, horizontal integral horsepower motors rated 1 HP through 249 HPmotors shall be furnished with a matching soleplate such that the motor can be removed without disturbing the alignment or position of the driven Equipment, and be installed and realigned with the use of shims on the motor. Vertical jacking bolts shall be provided on the motor base for motor alignment. For horizontal sleeve motors, the rotor end float and coupling end-play shall be in accordance with NEMA MG-1. Vertical mounted pump integral horsepower motors rated 1 HP through 249 HPmotors shall be NEMA "P" face type. Motors greater than 75lbs Integral horsepower motors shall be provided with lifting eyebolts or lifting lugs for hoisting motors during for installation, maintenance purposes, and alignment. 3.12 Noise: Unless otherwise specified, the motor manufacturers standard production sound level from ANSI C50.41 for the enclosure type and speed rating will be acceptable. The manufacturer’smanufacturers typical sound levels shall be determined in accordance with IEEE Std 85 "Test Procedures for Airborne Noise Measurement on Rotating Electric Machinery."


Noise shall be less than 85 dBA at three feet from motor boundary.. For outdoor motors, options shall be provided for reducing noise levels, particularly single frequencies. 3.13 Tests: Integral horsepower motors, 1 HP through 249200 HP shall undergo standardroutine factory testing in accordance with NEMA and IEEE 112 standards to verify freedom from mechanical and electrical defects. Motor test shall be performed with motor terminal housing installed on motor. As a minimum motors shall be factory tested for the following:

a. No load running current

b. Insulation resistance (hi-pot)

c. Winding resistance

d. Mechanical balance

e. Locked rotor current

f. No load speed

g. Motor efficiency Routine test reports shall be furnished for all integral horsepower motors 100 HP and larger. The test report shall include complete nameplate information, and shall be patterned after IEEE Std. 112 Form A-1. 3.14 Motor Data Submittal: The attached Motor Data Sheet shall be completed and submitted for each motor furnished. Seller shall be responsible for providing enough information to confirm that NEMA Premium efficiency motors have been provided where applicable. All motors in applications with starting times exceeding 15 seconds shall be provided with a time vs. current starting curve as described in bullet “c” below. In addition to the Motor Data Sheet, the following Seller's information shall also be submitted for review for motors rated 100 HP and larger:

a. Motor time/current/thermal curve indicating running overcurrent time limits at rated voltage and locked rotor time limits at rated voltage, 90%, and at 80% of rated voltage. Locked rotor time limit curves shall be indicated also for cold rotor (ambient) and hot rotor (operating temperature).

b. Motor speed versus torque and current curves indicated at both rated voltage,

90%, and at 80% of rated voltage.

c. Acceleration time versus current curves for nameplate horsepower at rated voltage, 90%, and at 80% of rated voltage.


d. Motor outline drawings showing detailed motor dimensions, terminal box location and dimensions, shaft dimensions, mounting dimension clearances, wiring termination details on winding leads and accessories, rotor and coupling end float limits, approximate weight of rotor, total motor weight.

4. INTEGRAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS, 250 HP andor greater 4.1 General: Integral horsepower motors, rated 250 HP andor greater shall be provided as required to drive the specified Equipment. Motors shall conform to the applicable standards referenced in Section 1.2 "Applicable Standards." Motor selection in regards to sizing, service factor, efficiency, and starting conditions shall be as specified in Section 1.3 "Motor Selection." Integral horsepower motors 250 HP and greater mayor greatermay be of the horizontal direct coupled, horizontal belt driven, or vertical type, single-speed, squirrel-cage, induction as specified herein. 4.2 Integral Horsepower Motor Voltage Ratings, 250 HP and greater: Unless otherwise specified, typical ratings for motors rated 250HP andor greater shall be 4000Volt4000 Volt AC, three phase, 60 hz., except motors provided for electric fire pump service and cooling tower fans. Motors rated 250 HP through 400 HP for electric fire pump and cooling tower fan service shall be 460 Volt AC, three phase, 60 hz, suitable for reduced voltage auto transformer or primary resistor starting.

4.3 Torque Characteristics: Unless specified otherwise, motor torques in percent of full load torque at rated voltage and frequency, shall not be less than 200 percent breakdown, 85 percent pull-up, and 100 percent locked-rotor. At 85% rated voltage, the torque of the motor shall be 15% above the load torque requirement throughout the entire speed range with 80% pullup torque as a minimum. Locked rotor KVA/HP at rated voltage and frequency shall not exceed 5.77 for motors rated through 500 HP and 5.99 for motors rated above 500 HP.

4.4 Critical Speeds: Motors shall be designed to keep torsional and rotational natural frequencies of vibration at least 25 percent above or below, preferably above, the motor rated speed ranges to avoid vibration over the operational speed range of the Equipmentequipment-motor unit.

4.4 Enclosures: Motors rated 250 HP and250HP or greater shall be provided with enclosures suitable for the location atmosphere, ambient temperature, and operating conditions of the driven load. Outdoor motors shall be weather protected Type II (WPII). Indoor motors shall be ODP provided with drip proof guarded enclosures. All enclosures shall be provided with removable dry type filters and stainless steel screens. 4.4.1 Motors located in areas defined by the National Electrical Code as classified hazardous Division I areas shall be listed as suitable for the Class and Group associated with the hazardous area and have appropriate explosion proof enclosure and accessory boxes. Motors specified for Class I, Group D locations shall be UL approved and labeled. Explosion proof motors shall have a combination breather/drain U.L. listed for the Class and Group of the hazardous area location.


4.4.24.5 All TEFC motors shall be provided with condensation drain holes and rotating shaft seals. Drain holes shall be provided with Crouse-Hinds Type ECD “Universal” combination water drain-breather plugs, or approved equal. Assembly hardware for all motors shall be zinc-plated corrosion resistant steel or stainless steel. Enclosures shall be of cast iron or formed steel not less than .125 inches thick and shall be suitably treated to resist corrosion and braced to prevent distortion and vibration. Aluminum enclosure parts are not acceptable. Motor enclosures shall have all exposed metal surfaces protected with a moisture and corrosion-resistant polyester paint or coating. Assembly hardware shall be zinc plated or stainless steel.

4.4.3 In addition to the preceding requirements for outdoor service motors, totally enclosed motors with NEMA waterproof features shall have enclosure interior surfaces and the stator and rotor air gap surfaces protected with corrosion-resistant alkyd enamel or with polyester or epoxy paint or coating. Bolts, nuts, screws, and other hardware items shall be corrosion-resistant or heavy cadmium-plated metal. A rotating labyrinth shaft seal shall be furnished on the shaft extension end of the motor. Fan covers of TEFC motors shall meet NEMA MG 1 requirements for a fully guarded machine. 4.6 4.6 Insulation: Class F non-hygroscopic insulation will be furnished per ANSI C50.41-2000 but temperature rise shall be Class B per NEMA MG 1. Windings on medium voltage motors rated 4000 volts and above shall be form wound and vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) with an epoxy resin thermal setting compound to prevent deterioration due to humidity, abrasive dust, or corrosive vapors. The insulation resistance of the entire winding, corrected to 40°C, shall not be less than the motor rated kV +1 Mega-Ohm for all windings. 4.7 Bearing Temperature Detectors: Type K (chromel-alumel) thermocouple type bearing temperature detectors, one dual element unit per bearing, complete with thermowell and detector head and holder assemblies, as required, shall be furnished for all medium voltage motors. Thermocouple type detectors for bearings shall be insulated with magnesium oxide packed in a stainless steel protective sheath. Thermocouple wire insulation shall be color coded with standard colors to represent the thermocouple metals. Insulation shall be provided on bearing temperature detectors and on oil piping connections when required to prevent circulation of shaft current through bearings. Where sleeve type bearings are furnished, each detector tip shall be held within 1/16 inch of the Babbitt material, but not extending into the Babbitt material. The thermocouples shall be factory wired in rigid galvanized steel raceway and liquid tight flexible metallic conduit from the thermowell housings to the stator RTD terminal box, and terminated on dedicated terminal blocks listed for type “K” thermocouple use. Explosion proof designs shall utilize conduit seals as required for the hazardous location. 4.8 Winding Temperature Detectors: Stator winding temperature detectors shall be furnished, installed, and completely wired for all medium voltage motors with two detectors installed per phase as a minimum. Temperature detectors shall normally be 100 ohm platinum three-wire resistance temperature detectors (RTDs). Temperature detector and detector lead insulation class shall be the same as the stator coil insulation class. Detector leads shall be provided with an abrasion-resistant covering or sleeve external to the slot. Stator RTD's shall be


embedded in the stator windings at locations of highest probable temperature. RTD wiring shall be brought out to a dedicated frame mounted accessory terminal housing (isolated from space heater box) with internal terminal blocks and connection nameplate. 4.9 Temperature Detector and Terminal Block Requirements: All temperature detectors shall be ungrounded with detector leads wired to terminal blocks furnished in the accessory terminal housings. A separate ungrounded terminal for each temperature detector shall be included with the detector lead terminals for connection of the cable shield drain wire. 4.10 Rotor and Stator: The rotor shaft assembly for all motors rated 250HP and greater shall be fabricated copper bar construction. Rotor and shaft shall be dynamically balanced with vibration limits not exceeding peak to peak amplitude values per NEMA MG-1. Rotors shall be adequately sized to avoid overheating during acceleration of the driven load. Stators shall be constructed from high grade electrical steel with copper windings to reduce load and magnetic losses. 4.11 Motor Leads: Winding leads for all motors rated 250HP and greater shall be terminated utilizing conductor size/material matched single-conductor, two-hole, die-crimp type compression lugs. Subject terminations shall be landed on insulator supported copper bus bar configuration consistent with NEMA MG-1 standard requirements for "Type II" Terminal Housings. Copper busses shall be drilled for bolt on connectors. Medium voltage power cables shall be terminated with prefabricated terminal kits. Lugs will be long barrel, double indent two-hole copper compression type. Leads entering terminal box shall be sealed or gasketed between terminal box and shall be permanently identified. Provisions shall be made for connection of shielded medium-voltage feeder cables to the bus bars using two-hole NEMA side-by side lugs. All leads shall be permanently wired in accordance with the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 2.

4.12 Terminal Boxes: Motors rated 250HP and greater shall have motor leads brought into frame mounted terminal boxes. Terminal boxes shall be oversized to allow termination of medium voltage shielded cable, two runs per phase, with stress cones. Terminal box size and configuration furnished shall provide insulator supported copper bus bar for terminations consistent with NEMA MG-1 Standard requirements for "Type II" Terminal Housings. See additional terminal box space requirements below for motors 2500 hp and above. 4.4.44.12.1 Terminal boxes shall be consistent with the motor enclosure type; i.e., ODPWPI, WPII, TEFC, or explosion proof. A ground clamp or ground pad shall be provided in the motor terminal box for terminating a dedicated Equipment ground conductor. Separate auxiliary boxes shall be provided on the motor frame for terminating space heater leads, stator RTD wiring, and bearing thermocouple wiring. Auxiliary boxes shall have motor auxiliaries wired to terminal blocks mounted in the auxiliary terminal boxes. Drawings shall be submitted with terminal box dimensions and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Location of terminal boxes shall also be subject to approval by the Engineer. See additional terminal box space requirements below for motors 1500 hp and above.


4.13 Frame Ground Lugs: In addition to the terminal box ground lug, motors shall be provided with 2 diagonally opposite frame grounding pads. Pads shall be copper with drilled and tapped holes suitable for attaching two-hole NEMA grounding lugs. 4.14 Accessories: All motors rated 250HP andor greater shall be provided with the following accessories:

a. Condensation space heaters. Space heaters leads shall be brought out to a dedicated frame mounted terminal box with internal terminal blocks and connection nameplate. Heaters which total more than 1200 watts in capacity shall be rated for 480 volt AC three-phase and heaters totaling less than 1200 watts in capacity shall be rated for 120 volt AC single phase. They shall be derated for extended life and shall be sized to prevent condensation at the ambient conditions at specific site.

b. Stator RTD's, two per phase

c. Bearings thermocouples, one per bearing

b. Stator RTD's, two per phase, 100 ohm platinum shall be provided. RTD wiring

shall be brought out to a dedicated frame mounted terminal box (isolated from space heater box) with internal terminal blocks and connection nameplate.

c. Bearings thermocouples shall be provided, type K, one per bearing for all 4000V

motors with sleeve and plate type thrust bearings. Thermocouples shall be factory wired from the thermowell housings to the stator RTD terminal box, and terminated on dedicated terminal blocks. Thermocouples wiring leads between thermocouples and terminal box shall be routed in rigid galvanized steel raceway and liquid tight flexible metallic conduit. Explosion proof designs shall utilize conduit seals as required for the hazardous location.

d. Surge protection and common-side current transformers for motor differential

protection Surge protection shall be provided for all motors larger than 15003500 hp.

e. For motors 30003500 hp and larger, common-side differential protection current

transformers shall be provided as follows. Both ends of each winding shall be brought out to the terminal box for application of differential relay protection with the terminal box sized for the common side current transformers. Final connections shall be provided and completely installed for the common side windings. The 5A CT secondary leads shall be terminated on grounding-type terminal blocks in a secondary compartment. The CTs shall be ANSI relaying class C400 or higher. Seller shall be solely responsible for ensuring adequate space in the terminal box.


4.15 Nameplates: All motors rated 250HP and greater shall be provided with a permanent stainless steel or aluminum nameplate firmly attached to the motor frame with corrosion-resistant metal attachment pins. Nameplates shall be either embossed raised letter or engraved and enamel filled. Nameplates on motors designed for service in hazardous areas must include the location class and group design and the maximum operating temperature value or operation temperature code number in addition to the following specified motor data. Nameplate information shall be in English units, with minimum data according to NEMA MG-1MG1, ANSI C50.41, and as follows:

a. Motor manufacturer, model or serial number, frame size

b. Horsepower, NEMA design letter, speed in RPM, service factor

c. Voltage, phase, hertz

d. Running amps, locked rotor amps or starting KVA code letter, full load amps

e. Duty rating, ambient temperature

f. Insulation class

g. Efficiency data

h. Bearing data including ABMAAFBMA bearing identification number for motors furnished with rolling element bearings.

i. Voltage or speed connection diagram

j. Frame size and Enclosure type

k. Maximum permissible number of starts and the required cooling period when

motor is started under conditions of (a) cold rotor and (b) warm rotor (after running continuously at full load for a period of one hour).

Separate permanent nameplates shall be provided identifying the following; space heater wattage and voltage,. Separate permanent nameplates shall be provided identifying bearing lubrication requirements, the . Separate permanent nameplates shall be provided identifying the direction of rotation for the supply voltage sequence T1-T2-T3, and. Separate permanent nameplates shall be provided identifying the magnetic center at rated load.


4.16 Shaft Couplings: Direct connected motors rated 250 HP and greater shall be connected to driven Equipment through a flexible coupling. Motor shafts shall be keyed. Maximum end float shall be limited to motor manufacturer's recommendations to prevent axial thrust from being transmitted to the motor bearings. 4.174.16 Shaft: The shaft shall be furnished with corrosion-resistant treatment or shall be of corrosion-resistant material. 4.184.17 Mountings: Unless mounted on a common frame with the driven Equipment, horizontal motors rated 250HP and greaterMotors shall be furnished with a matching soleplate such that the motor can be removed without disturbing the alignment or position of the driven Equipment, and be installed and realigned with the use of shims on the motor. Vertical jacking bolts shall be provided on the motor base for motor alignment. For horizontal sleeve motors, the rotor end float and coupling end-play shall be in accordance with NEMA MG-1. Vertical mounted pump motors 250HP and greater shall be NEMA "P" face type. Motors shall be provided with lifting eyebolts or lifting lugs for hoisting motors during installation, maintenance purposes, and alignment. 4.194.18 Noise: Unless otherwise specified, the standard sound level from ANSI C50.41 for the enclosure type and speed rating will be acceptable. The manufacturer’smanufacturers typical sound levels shall be determined in accordance with IEEE Std 85 "Test Procedures for Airborne Noise Measurement on Rotating Electric Machinery." Noise shall be less than 85 dBA at three feet from motor boundary.the noise emitter. For outdoor motors, options shall be provided for reducing noise levels, particularly single frequencies. 4.204.19 Tests: Motors rated 250 HP andor greater shall undergo factory testing in accordance with NEMA and IEEE 112 standards to verify freedom from mechanical and electrical defects. Motor test shall be performed with motor terminal housing installed on motor. As a minimum, motors shall be factory tested for the following:

a. No load running current, power, and speed at rated voltage and frequency

b. Insulation resistance (hi-pot)

c. Winding resistance

d. Mechanical balance

e. Locked rotor current

f. No load speed, percent slip at full load

g. Efficiency at 100%, 75% and 50% load

h. Power factor at 100%, 75% and 50% load and locked rotor


i. Full load, locked rotor, breakdown torque

j. Speed torque, voltage, and current curves Test reports shall be furnished for all motors 250HP andor greater. The test report shall include complete nameplate information, and shall be patterned after IEEE Std 112 Form A-2. 4.214.20 Motor Data Submittal: The attached Motor Data Sheet shall be completed and submitted for each motor furnished. Seller shall be responsible for providing enough information to confirm that NEMA Premium efficiency motors have been provided where applicable. In addition to the Motor Data sheet, the following Seller's information shall also be submitted for review for motors rated 250HP andor greater:

a. Motor time/current/thermal curve indicating running overcurrent time limits at rated voltage and locked rotor time limits at rated voltage, 80%, and at 90% of rated voltage. Locked rotor time limit curves shall be indicated also for cold rotor (ambient) and hot rotor (operating temperature).

b. Motor speed versus torque and current curves indicated at both rated voltage,

80%, and 90% of rated voltage.

c. Acceleration time versus current curves for nameplate horsepower at rated voltage, 80%, and 90% of rated voltage.

d. Motor outline drawings showing detailed motor dimensions, terminal box

locations and dimensions, shaft dimensions, mounting dimensions, clearances, wiring termination details on winding leads and accessories, rotor and coupling end float limits, approximate weight of rotor, total motor weight.

e. Number of starts allowed per hour.

f. Superimposed speed-torque curves for each motor driven Equipmentequipment

match. Speed-torque curves shall include the motor speed-torque curves at a minimum specified starting voltage and at 110 percent rated voltage, superimposed on the driven Equipmentequipment speed-torque curve during acceleration.

g. Motor thermal limit curve superimposed on time-current curves during

acceleration of the driven Equipmentequipment for each motor. The thermal limit curve for each motor shall be based on initial motor parts temperatures equal to the service factor load operation temperatures in the maximum specified ambient. For each motor, time-current curves during acceleration of the driven Equipmentequipment shall include acceleration at minimum specified starting voltage and acceleration at 110 percent rated voltage. Each thermal limit curve shall include the following components:


Locked-rotor thermal limit for values of current from 110 percent rated voltage to the minimum specified starting voltage. Accelerating thermal limit for values of current from locked-rotor current to the current at breakdown torque, at minimum specified starting voltage. Running overload thermal limit at rated voltage, for values of current from the current at service factor load torque to the current at breakdown torque.

h. Parameters for relaying settings with respect to voltage imbalances.

5. HERMETIC REFRIGERANT MOTORS 5.1 General: Hermetic refrigerant motors shall be the Equipmentequipment Seller's standard proven design. The motor design and construction shall be coordinated with the driven Equipment requirements. 5.2 Rating: The motor nameplate horsepower rating shall not be exceeded when the Equipment is operating within the limits of the maximum load requirements. Motors shall be designed for operation at the required speed and shall be suitable for full voltage starting, frequent starting duty if required, and continuous duty in at maximum designa 40oC ambient temperature. All motors shall be designed for operation on 230/460 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz, 3/4 above 1/2 horsepower and above and for operation on 115 volts single-phase, 60 hertz for motors less than 3/41/2 horsepower. DC motors shall be rated 120 VDC and below. 5.3 Insulation: Motors shall have insulation suitable for operation in the refrigerant utilized and shall be tested for cleanliness. 5.4 Leads: All motor lead shall be completely wired to the control cabinets as required. Leads for dual voltage rated motors shall be easily connected or reconnected in the cabinet for the required operating voltage. Instructions for making these connections shall be furnished inside the cabinet or on the nameplate. 5.5 Terminals: Motor leads shall be furnished with compression type connectors. A motor ground connector shall be provided inside the control cabinet. The ground connector shall be attached to the ground conductor installed in the conduit with the power conductors. 5.6 Rotors: Motors shall have squirrel-cage rotors adequately sized to avoid overheating during acceleration of the motor and driven Equipment. Rotors shall be keyed or otherwise securely mounted on the motor shaft and shall be dynamically balanced. 5.7 Thermal Protection: The Seller's standard thermal protectors shall be provided on all motors below 25 horsepower. Three thermistors (one per phase) and associated control relay shall be provided on all motors 25 horsepower and above. The thermal protectors shall


automatically reset, shall be integral with the motor, and shall be wired to open the control circuit or power circuit to interrupt current to the motor. 5.8 Factory Testing: Each motor shall be tested and inspected at the Seller's factory to determine that it is free from electrical or mechanical defects and to provide assurance that it meets the requirements of these Specifications. Test procedures for 3-phase motors shall be in accordance with IEEE No. 112. 5.9 Nameplate Data: Nameplate data required for hermetic refrigerant motors shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code Article 440 "Air Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment." 5.10 Submittal Data: Complete nameplate information on the package Equipmentequipment shall be submitted indicating all electrical and operating information required per NEC articles 440-4 and 440-5. 6. APPROVED MOTOR MANUFACTURERS 6.1 General: Motors provided by the Seller shall be manufactured by one of more of the following companies. Motors less than 10 HP not manufactured by one of the listed companies in Paragraph 6.3 shall be approved by the Contractor. 6.2 Motors – Medium Voltage: General Electric, Siemens, Reliance, TECO – –Westinghouse Motor Co., US Motors, Louis Allis, Reliance, ABB, WEG, HICO, Toshiba,Hitachi America, and Hyundai and Federal Pacific. 6.3 Motors – Low Voltage larger than 10HP: General Electric, Siemens, TECO – –Westinghouse Motor Co., US Motors, Louis Allis, Reliance, ABB, WEG, HICO, Toshiba, Hyundai, and Baldor.


MOTOR DATA SHEET

FRACTIONAL HP MOTORS

Motor Application:________________________________ Equip. Tag. No. ________________ Motor manufacturer:______________________________ Model No. _____________________ Motor HP:___________ Voltage: _____________ Phase: ____________ HZ. _______________ S.F.: _____________ F.L. Speed (RPM): _____________ NEMA Design Letter: ____________ Insulation: ________________ Temp Rise (by resistance): _______________°C at 40°C ambient Duty Rating:_______________ Enclosure: __________________ Frame: __________________ F.L. Amps: _____________ L.R. Amps: ___________ Locked Rotor KVA Letter: ___________ Starting Method:______________________ Overload Protection: _______________________ Belted or Direct Couple Duty:_____________________ Mounting:_____________________ Bearing Type: ______________________________ Motor Weight: ______________________

ADDITIONAL DATA FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE

FRACTIONAL HP MOTORS

Max. Safe Stall Time: _________________ Max. Duty Cycle Time: _________________ Number of Starts per Hour: _____________________________________________________ DC Motor Armature Voltage: __________________ Armature Amps: __________________ DC Motor Field Voltage: ______________________ Field Amps: _____________________


MOTOR DATA SHEET

INTEGRAL HP MOTORS, 1 HP through 249200 HP

Motor Application:________________________________ Equip. Tag. No. ________________

Motor manufacturer:______________________________ Model No. _____________________

Motor HP:__________ Voltage: _____________ Phase: _______HZ._________Poles:________

S.F.: _____________ F.L. Speed (RPM): _____________ NEMA Design Letter: ____________

Insulation: _______________ Temp Rise (by resistance): _______________°C at 40°C ambient

Duty Rating:______________ Enclosure: ________________ NEMA Frame: _______________

F.L. Amps: _____________ L.R. Amps: ___________ Locked Rotor KVA Letter: ___________

Belted or Direct Couple Duty:____________________ Mounting:______________________

Bearing Type: ______________________________ Motor Weight: ______________________

Motor F.L. Torque (lb. ft.): ____________ Motor L.R. Torque (lb. ft.): _________________

Motor Nom. Efficiency: 50% Load _________ 75% Load ________ 100% Load ____________

Motor Nom. Power Factor: 50% Load _______ 75% Load ________ 100% Load ____________

Space Heater Voltage: _ _____ _ Heater Quantity: ______ __ Watts Ea.___ _ _

Maximum/Minimum StartingMinimum VoltageStarting Voltage:

________

________________ ___

Starting MethodStarting Method:

Safe Stall Time Rated Voltage; Ambient: _____________ Operating: ___________________

_________ ____ _______

Safe Stall Time 80% Voltage; Ambient _______________ Operating:_____________

Combined Motor & Load Acceleration Time; 100% Volt.: _______

______

______ 80% Volt.: ____

____

Rotor Inertia (lb. ft.2): ____________________ Load Inertia (lb. ft.2): ____________________

_______________

Motor Pullup Torque (lb. ft.): ___________ Motor Breakdown Torque (lb. ft.):_____________

Motor X/R Ratio: ______________ Motor Locked Rotor Power Factor: ___________________

Consecutive Starts; Motor @ Ambient: ____________ Motor @ Oper. Temp: _____________

Cooldown Time Between Starts; Motor Standing: _______ Motor Running: ____________

Additional Comments:___________________________________________________________

Noise Emmissions: dBA @ 3ft ______________dBA @ operating frequency: ____________

Allowable Voltage imbalance:_____________


MOTOR DATA SHEET

INTEGRAL HP MOTORS, 250HP OR AND GREATER

Motor Application:________________________________ Equip. Tag. No. ________________

Motor manufacturer:______________________________ Model No. _____________________

Motor HP:___________ Voltage: ____________ Phase: _______ HZ. ________Poles:________

S.F.: ____________ F.L. Speed (RPM): _____________ NEMA Design Letter: ____________

Insulation: _______________ Temp Rise (by resistance): _______________°C at 40°C ambient

Duty Rating:_____________ Enclosure: _________________ NEMA Frame: _______________

F.L. Amps: _____________ L.R. Amps: ___________ Locked Rotor KVA Letter: ___________

Belted or Direct Couple Duty:____________________ Mounting:______________________

Bearing Type: _____________________________ Lubrication Method:___________________

Motor F.L. Torque (lb. ft.): ____________ Motor L.R. Torque (lb. ft.): _________________

Motor Nom. Efficiency: 50% Load ________ 75% Load _________ 100% Load ____________

Motor Nom. Power Factor: 50% Load ______ 75% Load _________ 100% Load ____________

Space Heater Voltage: __________ Heater Quantity: __________ Watts Ea.________________

Phase: ________

Stator RTD's; Quantity: ______________________ __ Type: ___________________________

Alarm/Trip Setpoint: _____________

Bearing Thermocouples: Quantity: _____________________ Type: ___

__________________

Bearing Oil Sump Heater: Voltage _____________________ Watts: _____________________

_ Alarm/Trip Setpoint: _____________

Rotor Construction/Material: ______________________ Rotor Weight: ___________________

Total Motor Weight: _____________________ Allowable Voltage imbalance:_____________ Maximum Continuous Voltage: __________ __ Maximum Continuous Voltage: _________ _ __

Maximum/Minimum Starting Voltage: ___________________ Starting Method:

____________________

Safe Stall Time Rated Voltage; Ambient: _____________ Operating: ___________________

Safe Stall Time 90% Voltage; Ambient _______________ Operating:___________________

Combined Motor & Load Acceleration Time; 100% Volt.: ________ 90%Min

Volt:_____________

Rotor Inertia (lb. ft.2): ____________________ Load Inertia (lb. ft.2): ____________________


Motor Pullup Torque (lb. ft.): ___________ Motor Breakdown Torque (lb. ft.):_____________

Motor X/R Ratio: ______________ Motor Locked Rotor Power Factor: ___________________

Consecutive Starts; Motor @ Ambient: ____________ Motor @ Oper. Temp.: _____________

Cooldown Time Between Starts; Motor Standing: ________ Motor Running: ____________

Additional Comments:___________________________________________________________

Noise: dBA @ 3ft ________________ dBA@ rotating frequency:_________________________


SECTION E2 SELLER FURNISHED CONTROLS AND WIRING 1. GENERAL: This Specification details the requirements for Seller furnished wiring and package control systems supplied with Seller furnished Equipment when specified. Typical electrical parameters for Seller supplied Equipment and controls are as follows: 1.1 All DCdc electrical control devices shall be designed for continuous operation on an ungrounded station battery at any voltage from 90 to 140 VDCvolts dc. Electrical devices served from this supply shall not impose any ground connections on it. 1.2 All ACac electrical control devices shall, unless otherwise specified, be designed to operate satisfactorily under with variations of ± 10 percent in the conditions listed in Table 1.

Table 1 - AC Control Devices Operating Conditions

120 VAC supply voltage variation +/- 10% AC Frequency variation +/- 5% Dropout voltage for relays < 75 V Dropout voltage for contactors and starters < 90 V

1.2 supply voltage of 120 volts and ± 5 percent frequency variation alternating current. The dropout voltage shall be less than 75 volts for relays and 90 volts for contactors and starters. Alternating current electrical control devices operating at nominal voltages other than 120 Vvolts shall be designed for continuous operation over proportional voltage variations. 1.3 All devices shall be guaranteed to operate satisfactorily under voltageundervoltage conditions specified in the above paragraphs and at maximuman ambient temperature or maximum indoor temperature (if devices are furnished indoors), whichever is greater, as specified in Section GR-Aof 40oC. 2. AUXILIARY POWER: Auxiliary Equipment, such as motors, transformers, panels and rectifiers, requiring electrical power shall be designed to operate from one of the nominal electrical power sources as follows:

Volts

Phase Hertz

4160

3

60

480 3

60

208 3

60

208 1

60

120 1

60

125 DCDc

-- (Emergency)


Terminations quantity and size shall be provided as indicated for all incoming 480V and 4160V power feeds: 600V Cable Termination Requirements 2.1 Alternating Current motor voltage ratings with relation to horsepower shall be in accordance with the following unless otherwise noted in the design documents: 600V Cable Termination Requirements Main Disconnect Rating (Amp min – Amp max)


Cable Size per Phase KAIC Rating

<25A Later Later Later 25-49A Later Later Later 50-99A Later Later Later 100-149A Later Later Later 150-199A Later Later Later 200-249A Later Later Later 250-300A Later Later Later 301-400A Later Later Later 401-500A Later Later Later 5000V Cable Termination Requirements Main Disconnect Rating (Amp min – Amp max)


Cable Size per Phase KAIC Rating

<25A Later Later Later 25-49A Later Later Later 50-99A Later Later Later 100-149A Later Later Later 150-199A Later Later Later 200-249A Later Later Later 250-300A Later Later Later 301-400A Later Later Later 401-500A Later Later Later 2.22.1 Motors shall be furnished in accordance with the requirement of Section E1 "Motors-Induction Squirrel Cage Type". 2.32.2 Emergency motors shall be designed to operate from a nominal 125 VDCvolt dc supply. Direct current motors shall be capable of continuous operation at any terminal voltage from 90 to 140 VDCvolts dc. 3. RACEWAY: Unless specified otherwise, all raceway provided by the Seller for interconnection between devices, panels, boxes, and fittings shall conform to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. All conduit connections shall be of the threaded type. Unless specified otherwise, all exposed conduit shall be hot dipped after fabrication rigid galvanized steel or aluminum. PVC


coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used in corrosive areas. Conduit embedded in a concrete floor will be PVC with galvanized steelfiberglass risers. Conduits entering enclosures shall enter either from the side or bottom. Top entries are not allowed. All conduit entering outdoor enclosures shall enter through hubs or threaded openings. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch for exposed and 1 inch for embedded. 3.1 Connections to all motors and other Equipment subject to vibration, thermal movement, or requiring the flexibility to be moved aside during maintenance shall be made with liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit with proper end fittings. Length of liquid-tight flexible conduit will be limited to a maximum of 3 ½ feet 3.2 Grounding type bushings shall be provided on all conduit containing power circuits and on all conduit on Equipment to be located in hazardous areas. Hazardous areas shall be as defined by the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) and the National Electrical Code (NEC). Standard bushings shall be galvanized. 3.3 Conduit fittings used on outdoor Equipment shall be sealed and gasketed. 3.4 A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends, including those immediately at outlets and fittings. Bends in conduit shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the conduit. 3.5 All conduit runs shall be rigidly supported. Each conduit shall be supported within 1 foot of junction boxes and fittings. Piping shall not be utilized for conduit support.

3.6 Cable raceway, including conduit shall have the minimum separation distances listed in Table 2:

Table 2 – Conduit Minimum Separation Distances

Medium Voltage to Low Voltage Power [7.5”] Low Voltage Power to Control [7.5”] Control to Instrumentation [7.5”] Medium Voltage to Control [15”] Medium Voltage to Instrumentation [22.5”] Low Voltage to Instrumentation [15”]

3.63.7 Moisture pockets shall be eliminated from conduits. Conduit in wet locations shall have provisions for moisture drainage (i.e. condulet “tee” fittings with bottom breather/drains at low points and panel entries). If water cannot drain to the natural opening in the conduit system, a hole shall be drilled in the bottom of a pull box or a "C-type" conduit fitting shall be provided in the low point of the conduit run. 3.73.8 The raceway system provided for all interconnecting wiring shall be acceptable to the Engineer.


4. ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES: Area classifications shall be in accordance with NEC Articles 500, 501, 502, and 503. Enclosures for use with electrical Equipment shall be as follows:

a. NEMA 1 for electrical gear in indoor, conditioned room locations.

b. NEMA 12 for use in dry, unconditioned indoor locations c. NEMA 3R for outdoor applications

c.d. NEMA 4 for use in wet indoor and outdoor locations

d.e. NEMA 4X for use in all corrosive locations

e.f. NEMA 7 for use in hazardous locations

4.1 All junction boxes or pull boxes 4 inch trade size or smaller in any dimension shall be galvanized malleable iron, fiberglass, or acceptable equal cast ferrous metal with cover plate. 4.2 Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be in accordance with the requirements of NEC, Article 314, and shall be without knockouts. 4.3 All junction boxes and pull boxes larger than 4 inch trade size in all dimensions for use in indoor locations shall be sheet steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or fiberglass, and those for use in outdoor or damp locations shall be galvanized malleable iron, fiberglass, or acceptable equal cast ferrous metal, sheet steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, or sheet steel epoxy coated inside and outside after fabrication. Gasketed covers shall be provided.

4.4 All metal electrical enclosures with hinged doors and electrical devices mounted on the door face shall have a grounding stud provided on the enclosure door with a door bonding jumper installed. 5. CONTROL PANELS: This Article covers the design, fabrication, and installation of floor mounted, wall mounted, or skid mounted control panels. 5.1 Control panels shall meet applicable requirements of NEMA as defined in this Section. 5.2 Panels shall be of all welded steel construction. Exterior surfaces shall be smooth and free of defects and imperfections. All welds shall be ground smooth. Exposed edges, corners, and edges of cutouts shall be smooth and rounded. 5.3 Control panel doors taller than 36" shall be provided with full length piano type hinges and three point latching system fasteners with stainless steel locking handles. The locks shall be keyed alike. Control panel doors shall be provided with a grounding bond jumper to the panel


enclosure. Panel doors 36" and shorter shall use stainless steel door clamps on three sides and have padlock hasps. Control panel doors shall be the double swing half type.

5.4 Control panel doors shall be provided with a grounding bond jumper to the panel enclosure. 5.45.5 Braces and stiffening members shall be provided as required to prevent any panel distortion. Braces and stiffeners shall not interfere with instrument locations. 5.55.6 Panel tubing and wiring shall be neatly routed and supported and shall not block access to instruments. Tubing and wiring shall be terminated on tubing terminal plates or terminal strips, respectively. 20%Twenty percent spare terminals shall be provided. 5.65.7 All devices and components in the rear or interior of the panel, as well as back of door mounted Equipment, shall be identified with nameplates. Nameplates shall be installed on the front of the panels to identify all instruments, gauges, etc. Each panel shall have a unique panel identifier nameplate located on the panel door. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated plastic with white face and black characters. 5.75.8 Free-standing panels shall be provided with internal fluorescent lighting fixture and door switch, and (1) 120 VAC duplex GFCIR electrical outlet. Internal lighting fixture and GFCIR shall be wired to a junction box and fed from a separate external circuit. 5.85.9 Ground fault circuit interrupting receptacles (GFCIR) shall be self-contained units manufactured for installation in conventional outlet boxes and installed within panel interiors. Each unit shall be designed and tested per UL 943 for a maximum 6 and a minimum 4 milliampere ground-fault trip level. Units shall have the capability of being tested and reset after tripping. Receptacles with ground-fault protection shall be UL listed with the receptacle portion conforming to UL 498. Each GFCIR shall be mounted in an outlet box of adequate size for the receptacle and wiring. 5.95.10 Panels shall be designed to prevent overheating and moisture condensation. Panels located in areas subject to temperature variation shall be provided with thermostatically controlled condensation heaters. 5.105.11 Control panels shall be cleaned, primed, and finish painted with the Seller's standard painting system. Interiors of the panels shall be white. 5.115.12 Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be furnished without knockouts. 5.125.13 Internal swing panels are not allowed in floor standing enclosures.

5.14 Working clearance in front of all panels shall be maintained at minimum distance per NEC.


6. CLASSIFICATION IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS AREAS: All electrical Equipment and devices located in areas subject to conditions classified in the National Electrical Safety Code and the National Electrical Code as hazardous shall be furnished with a nameplate stating the Equipment classification. The nameplate data shall include the class, group, division, and operating temperature and “T-Rating” designations as applicable, and the NEMA type. Classification identification nameplates and attachment pins shall be corrosion-resistant metal. 7. WIRING: In general, all Equipment and devices furnished under these Specifications and requiring electrical connections shall be designed for wiring into electrical enclosures with terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be furnished for conductors requiring connection to circuits external to the specified Equipment, for internal circuits crossing shipping splits, and where Equipment parts replacement and maintenance will be facilitated. Terminal blocks for external connections shall be grouped and identified for Customer use. An interconnection drawing showing the physical arrangement and function of the terminals shall be provided as part of the subcontractor drawing submittal for approval. Subcontractor shall be responsible for engineering costs incurred if he revises this drawing after being approved. 7.1 Splices will not be permitted in power, lighting, control wiring or instrument leads. 7.2 Internal panel wiring shall be accomplished in a neat and orderly manner. Where practicable, wiring trough or gutter with readily removable covers shall be used, and any two or more wires run together outside of trough shall be clamped or tied in straight lay bundles at approximately 15 inch intervals. Ties or clamps shall be nonmetallic. Wiring shall be arranged so as to be readily accessible for inspection and maintenance, and in no case shall wiring arrangement impede access to panel mounted devices or spaces for future Equipment. All cables shall be identified with a permanent tag securely affixed to the cable termination point. Cable tag shall be visible from cabinet or panel opening. 7.3 All wiring leaving an enclosure shall leave from terminal blocks and not from other devices in the enclosure. 7.4 All connections to panel mounted Equipment shall be made on one side of the terminal blocks, and not more than two wires shall be connected under a single terminal screw. 7.5 Terminal blocks for current and potential transformer circuits and for 120 VAC volt ac and 125 VDCvolt dc power supply circuits and for analog low voltage instruments shall be separate from each other and from terminal blocks for control wiring. 7.6 All electrical cables shall be selected for the electrical and environment conditions of the installation. Oil-resistant and proper temperature application cable shall be used throughout. Except where required to be otherwise to perform satisfactorily in the service, all electrical conductors shall be Class B, stranded tinned copper switchboard wire, 16 AWG or larger with flame retardant cross link polyethylene (FRXLPE). Thermoplastic insulation (THHN/THWN), and asbestos insulations or coverings are) is not acceptable.


7.7 Control panel and cabinet wiring, except for shielded wiring and as otherwise noted, shall be stranded copper conductor with flame retardant insulation suitable for the application. 7.87.7 Hinge wire shall be fine stranded, flexible type, secured on each side of the hinge and formed with sufficient slack to minimize strand fatigue and breaking. The hinge wire shall be protected by a spiral wrap or tape. 7.97.8 General service power and control cables, integral to the Equipment furnished but not part of the internal wiring of control cabinets or panels, shall be rated for the maximum service voltage, but not less than 600 Vvolts. 7.107.9 All thermocouple wire shall be solid conductor with twisted and shielded conductor pairs. Insulation shall be color coded in accordance with the requirements of ANSI MC96.1. These requirements also apply to thermocouple extension wire which is furnished internal to Seller-furnished Equipment. The shield wire for each thermocouple furnished for external connections shall be terminated on an ungrounded terminal, each being a separate terminal for each thermocouple. 7.117.10 Control conductor terminal connectors for screw type terminals shall be solid ring type connectors with solid barrel type lugs and shall be properly sized for the conductor and the terminal except for DCS I/O cabinets and PLCs, which at these devices compression connections may be used. The connectors shall be constructed of copper and shall be tin-plated. 7.127.11 Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks shall be industrial duty, barriered, and shall be furnished with white marking strips and, where permitted by the safety codes and standards, shall be without covers. Not less than 20% percent spare terminals shall be furnished. All terminal blocks for external control wiring shall be rated for 600 Vvolts minimum and shall have strap screw terminals suitable for 10 AWG and smaller 600 Vvolt insulated conductors except for the DCS I/O cabinets which will have Phoenix type terminal blocks or equivalent. 7.137.12 Each terminal block, terminal, conductor, relay, breaker, fuse block, and other auxiliary device shall be permanently labeled to coincide with the identification indicated on the drawings. All terminals provided for termination of external circuits shall be identified by inscribing circuit designations acceptable to the Engineer on the terminal block marking strips with indelible black ink. All other wiring terminations shall be identified by printing on flame-resistant conductor identification sleeves. Terminating a conductor shall include installing cable pre-fabricated termination kits for shielded cable, attaching the conductor at its designated location, and insulating the entire connection where specified or required by the application. A conductor identification sleeve shall be provided on each end of each internal conductor. Each sleeve shall be marked with the opposite end destination identification. 7.147.13 The arrangement of connections on terminal blocks shall be acceptable to the Engineer.


7.157.14 All temporary wiring installed in the factory for Equipment testing shall be removed prior to shipment of the Equipment. 8. TERMINATION OF 600 VOLT POWER CABLE: The capacities of conduit entrances, terminal enclosures, and conductor terminals for 600 Vvolt power cable terminations in Equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be as required to accommodate copper phase conductors and copper ground conductors which are sized in accordance with the requirements of this Article. An integral incoming power disconnect shall be provided for each source of incoming power. Disconnected and branch circuit over-current protection devices shall be magnetic instantaneous trip-only type circuit breakers 8.1 Safety-type disconnecting switches shall be type "HD", heavy duty. Switches shall be rated at 240 or 600 Vvolts as required by the voltage of the circuit on which type are utilized and shall be rated in horsepower. Each switch shall be capable of interrupting the locked rotor current of the motor for which it is to be used, which current will be assumed as ten times the full rated load current. 8.2 Disconnects shall be of the quick-make, quick-break type, and all parts shall be mounted on insulating bases to permit replacement of any parts from the front of the switch. All current-carrying parts shall be of high-conductivity copper, designed to carry rated load without excessive heating. Switch contacts shall be silver-tungsten type or plated to prevent corrosion, pitting, and oxidation and to assure suitable conductivity. Switch operating mechanisms shall be designed to retain effectiveness with continuous use at rated capacity without the use of auxiliary springs in the current path. Switches shall be capable of withstanding the available fault current or let through current before the fuse operates, without damage or change in rating. 8.3 Fuses, if required, shall be UL listed, rated for 600 Vvolts, and dual element type. Fuses shall have a thermal element that restricts the temperature rise and an element of low peak type which limits the let through fault current. 8.4 Disconnects shall be located within panel interiors with operator handles located on panel exteriors. Mechanical interlocks shall be provided to prevent opening panel door when the disconnect handle is in the "ON" position. Disconnect handles shall be provided with padlock provisions. Mechanical interlock shall have defeat mechanism to allow qualified personnel to access while energized. 8.5 If disconnects are furnished for locations remote from control panels, the disconnect enclosure shall be suitable for the environment and meet the requirements of Article 4.0, "Electrical Enclosures" of this Specification. Remote mounted disconnects shall have engraved nameplates. 8.6 Conduit Entrances and Terminal Enclosure. The capacities of conduit entrances and terminal enclosures for phase conductors shall be as required for conductors sized in accordance with the requirements of the National Electric Code.


8.7 Compression type, double indent, two-hole copper lugs will be used for all power cables. Power cables rated 600V and smaller than #6 AWG will use one hole lugs for termination. 9. CONTROL PANEL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES: As a minimum, Seller supplied control panel Equipment and devices shall conform to these requirements. 9.1 Relays: Auxiliary control relays shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS and shall be plug in, octal base type with contacts rated 10 amperes continuous. Relays shall have a minimum of two Form C contacts. All relays shall have 120 VVolt, 60 hertz AC operating coils unless otherwise required by system design. Plug-in relays shall be provided with hold-down clips. 9.2 Control Switches: Control switches shall be 600 V, 20 ampere, multistage, rotary type with a minimum of 10 contacts. Control switch contacts for engineered systems shall be dual rated for AC and DC operation. See minimum contact ratings in section 9.3 below.

9.3 Unless otherwise stated in this specification, all auxiliary relays and control switches, shall have the following minimum contact ratings:

Contact Closing Rating: 20A Continuous Current Carrying Rating: 10A continuously Interrupting Rating: see tables below VDC Non-Inductive

Amps Inductive Amps

6-24 15.0 6.0 48 8.0 3.5 125 3.0 1.0 250 1.0 0.3 VAC Non-Inductive

Amps Inductive Amps

115 30.0 20.0 230 20.0 10.0 460 8.0 5.0 9.29.4 Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, Indicating Lights and Pushbutton Stations: Pushbuttons, selector switches, and indicating lights shall be heavy-duty oil-tight and shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS. Contact rating shall be 10 amperes at 600 VVolts 60 hertz. Indicating lights shall be long-life, LED-type at a The voltage rating appropriate forof the applicationlights shall be 120 Volts 60 hertz. Units shall be provided complete with contact blocks, legend plates, plastic caps, etc., for a complete installation. Emergency stop pushbuttons shall be of the red mushroom head type.


Indicating light lens colors shall be coordinated with indicated conditions as specified in the following table. Indicating lights shall be energized when the condition exists and shall be de-energized when the condition does not exist. Both red and green lights shall be energized for valve in intermediate position. Lens Color

Condition

Red Equipment in operation, such as motor running, valve not closed, or breaker closed. Green Equipment not in operation, such as motor stopped, valve not open, or breaker open. Amber Status indication, such as power monitoring, trip coil monitoring, test. White Equipment abnormality, such as motor trip or breaker trip. 9.39.5 Control Power Transformers: Seller supplied control panels shall be provided with dry type control power transformers to supply all required control voltages which differ from the control panel, single point power input source. Control power transformers shall be adequately sized to supply all required control power plus 100 VA, and have both primary leads and one secondary lead fused. The other secondary side of the control power transformers shall be grounded. 9.49.6 Power Supplies: Seller supplied control panels requiring DC control voltage or filtered power shall be provided with all necessary power supply Equipment, rectifiers or filters. 10. MOTOR CONTROL: When Seller is required to supply local starters and contactors for control of Seller supplied Equipment, motor controls shall conform to the following minimum requirements: 10.1 Starters and contactors supplied with Seller furnished controls shall be open type and located within Seller's control panels. Magnetic starters and contactors shall be two or three pole type with 120 VAC operating coils. Coil power shall be supplied from Seller panel control power transformers complete with both primary leads and one secondary lead fused. The other secondary lead shall be grounded. Each magnetic starter or contactor shall be provided with line side short circuit protection consisting of a UL approved molded case thermal magnetic circuit breaker or motor circuit protector (MCP). Magnetic starters shall be provided with manual reset solid state overload relays, sized to match motors furnished. Overload relay manual reset shall be operable from the panel door. Magnetic starters shall be NEMA rated and selected to match the horsepower nameplate of the motors provided. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as required by the Seller’s design, plus a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed spare contacts. Each contactor or starter provided in this Section for motor or Equipment operation shall be provided with a dedicated auxiliary N.O. contact to provide Equipment “running” or


“on” status to the plant distributed control system. [NEED TO DISCUSS WITH GARDNER] All AC and DC motor starters shall have red and green indicating lights and a HAND-OFF-AUTO switch on its motor control panel door. Control transformer leads, starter overload relay contacts, contactor operating coils, and starter auxiliary contacts shall be wired to marked unit terminal blocks. 10.2 If a motor heater is required by section E1 it shall be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the motor starter and shall be energized when the motor is not running. This circuit shall be wired to be fed from an external source separate from the motor starter feeder circuit. A separate local disconnect shall be provided for this circuit along with an NEC compliant warning label describing multiple sources of power. 11. CONTROL SCHEMATICS: Seller supplied control systems shall be provided with detailed control schematics, wiring diagrams, wire list, loop diagrams, and termination information. Field wiring by others shall be clearly indicated on Seller schematics as dashed lines. Dedicated terminal blocks for field wire terminations shall be arranged for field wiring to be landed at a common location. 12. ALARM INDICATION: Discrete alarm indication shall be provided on the front of Seller furnished control panels. Each discrete alarm shall be annunciated by a dedicated pilot lamp with nameplate or by other means such as LED readout or flashing annunciator plates. A “common alarm” relay shall be provided for each panel that activates for any of the discrete panel alarms. A dedicated N.O. and N.C “Form C” auxiliary contact from each common alarm relay shall be provided for status output to the plant distributed control system. 13. EQUIPMENT SAFETY GROUNDING. All electrical Equipment that is part of an integral shipping unit or assembly shall be furnished with a bare copper grounding pad. The pad shall be suitable for field connection to the station ground grid. 13.1 Isolated logic system or single-point ground connections required for proper operation of electronic Equipment shall be insulated from the Equipment safety ground. Such connections will be extended, using insulated cable, to a single termination point suitable for field connections to the appropriate ground system. 13.2 Electrical Equipment shall include all enclosures containing electrical connections or bare conductors with the exceptions of control devices, such as solenoids, pressure switches, and limit switches, unless such devices require grounding for proper operation. 13.3 Any skid mounted raceway system shall not be considered to be a ground conductor except for itself. All conduits containing power circuits shall be connected to the enclosure or Equipment grounding pad or grounding bus with bare copper conductor. Grounding bushing ground conductors shall be not less than 10 AWG bare copper conductor. 13.4 Ground conductors shall be soft drawn bare stranded copper strand Class II. All clamps, conductors, bolts, washers, and nuts used with the grounding system shall be copper.


14. INSTRUMENTATION: See section M2 for general instrumentation requirements for skid-mounted and Seller-engineered systems.

END OF SECTION


SECTION E3

VALVE MOTOR OPERATORS 1. GENERAL: This Specification details the requirements for Seller furnished motor operated valve operators. 2. DESIGN CRITERIA: Valve operating speeds and differential and static pressures, when specified by the Engineer, are included in the technical sections of these Specifications. Where the valve operating speeds and differential and static pressures are not specified by the Engineer, the valve operating speeds and torques shall be coordinated by the Seller with the Equipment requirements and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. The motor duty may be rated at either 15 minute or 30 minute depending on the length of time required for a full cycle of valve, open-close-open. If this time exceeds 10 minutes, a 30 minute duty motor must be supplied. Motor starting torque shall not be less than 500 percent of rated full load torque. Where specified or necessary for the service, valves designed for modulating service shall have motors rated for continuous duty and for frequent starting and stopping service. Sufficient torque shall be provided to open or close the valve against maximum differential pressure and static pressure at 90 percent nominal voltage. The torque provided between 90% and 110% of nominal voltage shall be equal to or greater than 125% of the torque required for closing the valve at full operating pressure. 3. CONSTRUCTION: Motor operators supplied shall be Limitorque or Rotork only. Motor operators shall be furnished with cast iron or steel, totally enclosed, nonventilated, weatherproof, dust-tight enclosures suitable for outdoor service. and shall be removable from the valve without dismantling the valve. Valve motor operators shall have all metal gear trains. Double-shielded, grease prelubricated, regreaseable, antifriction bearings having ABMAAFBMA minimum L-10 rating life of not less than 15,000 hours shall be furnished. Motor leads shall be terminated in the starter control compartment. Grounding lugs shall be provided in the limit switch compartment. Grounding lugs shall be clearly labeled. All motor operators shall be supplied with 120 volt ac, single-phase, space heaters located in the limit switch compartment. Motor operators provided with a motor 7-1/2 hp or larger shall also be supplied with 120 volt ac, single-phase, space heaters located in the motor. Motor space heater leads shall be terminated in the starter control compartment. Control circuits shall operate on nominal 120 volts ac, single-phase. Local/remote control stations and reversing starters shall be furnished integrally with motor operator units. The motor operators shall be designed for remote or local maintained type open or closed control. Control


schematics for motor operators shall match the attached example schematic for wiring and terminal identification. A handwheel and a mechanical dial type position indicator shall be provided for manual operation of each valve. Provisions shall be made for manual engagement of the handwheel at any time except when the motor is energized, during which time the handwheel shall be automatically disengaged. Motor operators shall be designed for installation in any position that ensures againstwithout lubricant leakage or other operating difficulties or deleterious effects of lubricant leakage and high temperature. .. Motors shall be designed for high torque, reversing service in a 50°C ambient temperature. Motors shall be rated for minimum three times the breakawaybreak away torque to move the valve off its seat. Motor shall have Class F non-hygroscopicnonhygroscopic insulation sealed with two additional dips and bakes of epoxy varnish. Temperature rise shall not exceed 70°C rise by resistance in 50°C ambient for the time rating furnished. Motors shall be rated 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz, unless otherwise indicated in the technical Sections of these Specifications. 4. OPERATOR CONTROL: Each motor operator shall have rotary drum limit switches, rated NEMA 4X minimum, each capable of being set to trip at any point between fully open and fully closed positions. Each rotary drum limit switch shall have two normally open and two normally closed contacts. Double torque limit switches for the motor operator shall be provided to limit opening and closing thrust. Dedicated contacts for Contractor use (valve position) shall be provided. Each valve motor operator shall be provided with an integral 3 phase reversing motor starter. Each integral reversing starter shall include a control power transformer (sized to supply operating control and power for condensation heaters), a reversing contactor with thermal overloads, and an operator control station. The operator control station shall consist of a padlockable "local/off/remote" selector switch, a red pilot lamp which indicates valve in fully open position, a green pilot lamp which indicates valve in fully closed position, and open/stop/close momentary pushbuttons for operation of the valve with selector switch in "local" position. A smart digital valve positioner shall be provided and wired to dedicated terminals which provides a 4-20 mA valve position feedback signal to the Plant DCS. For critical loop identified valves, a separate, hardwired feedback module shall be supplied with the digital valve positioner that provides analog input to the DCS. Self-locking gearing or spring-loaded operators shall be furnished to compensate for excessive thrusts and to prevent repeated reverse operation of the motor.


END OF SECTION

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 M1-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

SECTION M1

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1. GENERAL: The Seller shall comply with all requirements of this Section. 1.1 Refer also to the following related Sections:

Section E1 – Motors-Induction Squirrel Cage Type Section E2 – Seller Furnished Controls and Wiring Section E3 – Valve Motor Operators Section M2 – General Instrumentation Requirements for Skid-Mounted and Seller-Engineered Systems Section S1 – Wind, SeismicS – Structural Loading and Snow Design

2. SKID-MOUNTED AND SELLER-ENGINEERED SYSTEMS: The following requirements apply to Seller-furnished skid-mounted systems, packaged modular designs and/or sellerSeller-engineered systems. 2.1 Mechanical Design Criteria:

2.1.1 Pump design margins, as a minimum, shall be as follows:

5 % on total head and 10 % on flow Maximum total dynamic head developed at shut-off (at design speed) shall be at least 115% but not more than 125% on multiple stage and 140% on single stage (excluding circulating water pumps) The pump head curves shall rise continuously from design head point to shut-off.

2.1.2 Pumps shall be suitable for operation at the design point as well as the normal operating range.

2.2 Insulation thickness shall be as required to produce an outside lagging surface temperature of not over 140oF at 80oF ambient dry bulb temperature with 3 mph wind. Insulation for personnel protection shall be provided on surfaces above 140oF, which are within three (3) feet horizontal and seven (7) feet vertical of walkways, ladders, platforms, floors, and other areas where operating personnel may be present.

2.3 Seller’s Equipment, valves, piping and specialties shall have dimensions controlled to tolerances of +/- 1/8”.

2.4 Seller’s engineered skids shall ensure that the Equipment is accessible for maintenance such that interconnecting components will not be damaged during routine maintenance.

3. EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT: Equipment shall be arranged to optimize maintenance work by providing adequate space around equipment and control panels. Install


and orient all glass gauges, local instrumentation and controllers for operation and maintenance as practical and standard to the industry. Provide adequate work platforms and locate manual operators, etc. within reach of plant operators.

3.1 Operability and Safety: Equipment, valves, instrumentation, motor controls and testing devices shall be designed for ease of operation and easy access, i.e. without the need for portable ladders. The design shall comply with OSHA and CAL-OSHA requirements.

3.2 Sample and Test Connections: Piping shall be provided with adequate permanent connections to perform acceptance testing. Wastewater streams leaving the system shall be provided with sampling facilities for manual extraction of representative samples.

3.3 Root Connections: Root connections on horizontal or sloping lines shall not be located below the center of the line. The following guidelines shall apply:

Root connections for service on steam and condensate vapors or wet gas shall be located at any point above the center of the pipe.

Root connections for service on liquids shall be taken only from the side of the pipe with the root nipple horizontal.

Root connections for service on dry gas shall be taken from the top of the pipe.

3.4 Vents, Drains and Manholes: High points shall be vented and low points drained to ensure quick and efficient startup and operation of all mechanical systems. Silencers shall be provided for all venting during startup and operation. Vents and drains shall be located on the piping drawings. Vent and drain valves shall be provided by the Seller.

Drains from skid-mounted equipment shall be located to allow routing to the floor drains without piping or effluent running across the floor.

3.5 Pipe Line Marking: Process lines shall be clearly marked indicating service and direction of flow.

3.6 Nameplates and Labels: Permanent instruction plates, nameplates and labels shall be provided for all items of the plant giving particulars of duty, size, serial number and full information for identification and operation. Warning labels and emergency equipment shall have red lettering in place of the black. Labels shall be of sufficient size to carry a full description of the plant item and unique item identification alphanumeric.

4. ENGINEERING DATA AND DRAWINGS: The Seller shall provide sufficient engineering data, as specified in Section GR-B, Engineering Data and Submittal Schedule, to allow the Contractor to install and/or complete the installation of the system provided by the Seller.

4.1 Process and Instrumentation Drawings (P&IDs): The Seller shall provide P&ID’s including, but not limited to, the following:


All lines, valves, mechanical specialties, in-line devices, process equipment, and instrumentation.

Line designations showing service, pipe size and line identification number.

Line symbols to differentiate between shop-installed piping and field-installed piping.

Instrumentation tag numbers as assigned by Contractor’s EngineerContractor.

Valve tag numbers as assigned by Contractor’s Engineer.

Interface connections including pipe size, schedule, ASTM material, type of end connection, etc.

Legend for all symbols used.

4.1.1 Numbering System: Refer to Section GR-B. Unique numbers for manual valves, mechanical specialties and equipment not tagged by the EngineerContractor, shall be assigned by the Seller.

4.1.2 Piping Line List: The Seller shall provide a piping line list showing the P&ID line number, classification, size, insulation symbol, material, design flow pressure and temperature, and “normal” operating flow, pressure and temperature.

4.1.3 Interface Connection List: The Seller shall provide the following additional information at system interface connections:

Connection information including size, type, pipe schedule, bevel detail and any requirements for connection to Contractor’s piping

Design flows in gpm or lb/hr with corresponding temperature, pressure, density or specific gravity, etc. to convert between mass flow and volumetric flow.

Corresponding pressure drops and heat loads for cooling water.

Allowable loads for Engineer’sContractor’s pipe stress analysis if applicable.

4.2 Electrical and Controls Interface: Refer to related Electrical Sections, if required.

4.3 System Controls Narrative: The Seller shall provide a written description of how the Seller’s system is designed to operate.

5. ALIGNMENT AND BALANCE: All rotating parts shall be true and dynamically balanced. Excessive noise or vibration, in the opinion of the Contractor, will be sufficient cause for rejection of the Equipment. The Seller shall provide data showing tested vibration levels at time of delivery.


5.1 Balance: All rotating components and assemblies shall be balanced to a level of 1W/N in gram/inches or better. If this is not achievable, Seller to propose their standard balance level for review by Contractor. All documentation attesting to the degree of compliance shall be included in operations and maintenance manuals. Equipment found to be in non-compliance after installation, can be rejected, and shall be the Seller’s responsibility to correct.

6. CORROSION PROTECTION: All equipment, except surfaces specified to be field-coated or covered by insulation and lagging, shall be protected from corrosion due to the specified environment and service. Corrosion-resistant materials and coatings shall be utilized, and dissimilar metals shall be electrically isolated where necessary. All external screw fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized, zinc or cadmium plated or stainless steel.

7. LUBRICATION: Equipment shall be lubricated by systems designed for continuous operations. All moving parts shall be efficiently lubricated by either oil or grease. A separate nipple shall be used for each grease lubricating point for valves, shafts, etc. in accordance with ANSI Standards. Where material thickness is such as to preclude the use of these nipples without recourse to special adaptors, lubrication nipples in accordance with ANSI Standards or other approved equivalent may be fitted subject in each case to the Engineer’sContractor’s approval.

Oil lubricant level indicators shall be furnished and marked to indicate proper levels under both standstill and operating conditions.

8. ENCLOSED GEAR DRIVE UNITS: Enclosed gear drive units furnished as a part of the Equipment specified shall be designed for continuous service and shall be in accordance with the latest AGMA standards for the type of gear drive being furnished. Each gear drive unit shall be capable of withstanding the motor torque developed during start acceleration, and deceleration if stalled.

9. SAFETY GUARDS: Guards shall be provided for protection of personnel for all exposed moving and/or rotating machine elements. Guards shall be easily removable for servicing of Equipment. Guards shall meet or exceed OSHA and CAL-OSHA requirements.

10. EQUIPMENT BASES: A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment that is to be installed on a concrete base.

11. SHAFT COUPLINGS: Shaft couplings shall be used between all drives and driven equipment. Couplings shall be attached to driver and driven shafts by press fits and keys. Couplings shall be of the all-metal lubricated gear flexible type by Falk, Zurn or acceptable equal.

Shaft couplings shall be capable of developing maximum brake horsepower requirements of the driven equipment with a service factor of not less than 2.0. On applications where the motor is furnished under separate specifications, the motor half coupling shall be machined to the motor shaft dimensions on the motor drawing as viewed by the


Engineer and shipped to the motor supplier for shop mounting. The responsibility for proper fit of the coupling shall rest with the Seller. 12. PIPING: All piping shall be in accordance with ASME B31.1 - Power Piping and other codes and standards referenced in Section GR-A. Pipe stress analysis shall be performed in accordance with ASME / ANSI B31.1 for lines where the maximum fluid temperature is 300oF or greater, or other lines where required by the Seller’s design. All pipe supports shall be suitable to restrain the piping where subjected to external loads as stipulated in Section S1, “Wind, SeismicS, “Structural Loading and Snow Design”.

12. Minimum pipe size shall be ¾”, except for connections to equipment. Pipe sizes 1-1/4”, 3-1/2”, 5”, 7” and 9” shall not be used, even for connections to equipment.

Unions shall be provided for 2-inch and smaller piping as required to facilitate assembly or disassembly of equipment. Unions for piping 2-inch and smaller shall be socket welded depending on the piping system. Piping 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged or butt welded in accordance with the specified pipe code. Butt weld end preparation shall be made in accordance with the most current editions of ANSI/ASME B31.1, Chapter V and ANSI B16.25 or any other end preparation that meets the procedure qualifications. Butt-welding end connections shall be prepared in accordance with the following (except to match connecting components):

Piping with a nominal wall thickness greater than 1”, use “J” Bevel end preparation in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.25, Figure 6 Type B. Piping with a nominal wall thickness greater than 7/8” to 1”, use “J” Bevel end preparation in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.25, Figure 5 Type B. Piping with a nominal wall thickness 3/8” to 7/8”, use “V” Bevel end preparation in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.25, Figure 2C. Piping with a nominal wall thickness less than 3/8”, use “V” Bevel end preparation in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.25, Figure 2A. For wall thickness 3/8” to 7/8”, ANSI/ASME B16.25 Figure 2A may be used for shop weld end preparation. Figure 3A may be used for shop welds with a wall thickness greater than 7/8”. Note: Backing rings shall not be used, but dimensions shall match details.

All butt welded end connections that are to be field welded shall be of materials assigned to an ASME Section IX P-Number Group. If this is not the case, the Seller shall identify all field welded materials that are not assigned an ASME Section IX P-Number Group.

Pipe, flanges, fittings, nuts, studs and bolts manufactured in the People's Republic of China will not be allowed. If materials of Chinese origin are discovered in any components of the supplied product, it will be removed and replaced at the Seller’s expense, regardless of whether the


materials isare “certified” or not. Liquidated damages will be assessed if there are schedule impacts resulting from the replacement of Chinese components. 12.1 Design Temperature and Pressure: The design pressure and temperature for piping shall be consistent with conditions established for the design of the associated system. The design pressure of a piping system generally shall be based on either the maximum sustained pressure that may act on the system, plus 25 psi minimum (rounded up to the next 5 psi increment), or to the relief valve set point, but in no case shall the design pressure be less than 50 psig. The design temperature of a piping system generally shall be based on the maximum sustained temperature which may act on the system plus 10°F rounded up to the next 5°F increment. 12.2 Corrosion Allowance: Pipe wall thickness shall be calculated using the following corrosion allowances: Carbon Steel Pipe: 1/16” Chrome Alloy Steel Pipe: 1/32” Stainless Steel Pipe: 0” 12.3 Materials: Material selection shall be based on the design pressure, temperature, and service conditions. Piping materials shall be in accordance with applicable ASTM and ANSI standards and local codes. Materials selected for use with the main steam cycle systems shall be free of copper materials to allow the cycle to be treated at the optimum pH for corrosion protection of carbon steel components. Brass with high zinc content shall not be used in the construction of those parts of valves, strainers and other equipment that will be in contact with chlorinated water. Piping materials shall generally be in accordance with the following: 12.3 12.4 Carbon Steel Piping: Carbon steel piping 2 inch nominal size and smaller shall be ASTM A53 or A106, Grade B or Grade C. Carbon steel piping 2-1/2 inches through 24 inches nominal size shall be seamless, ungalvanized ASTM A53 Grade B or A106 Grade B (ERW pipe may be used for Class 125150 or less air and water systems). Carbon steel piping larger than 24 inches nominal size shall be ASTM A672 or API 5L Grade B for cold-water service, with the industrial grades as a minimum. Schedules, sizes, and dimensions shall conform to ANSI/ASME B36.10. 12.4 12.5 Stainless Steel Piping: Stainless steel pipe shall be ASTM A312, Grades Type 304, 304L, 316, or 316L EFW or seamless piping, except that all stainless steel fuel gas piping shall be seamless. All stainless steel piping materials shall be fully solution annealed prior to fabrication. Type 316 materials shall be utilized for high resistance to corrosion. The Type 316L materials shall be utilized for applications requiring hot working (bending, etc.). Schedules, sizes, and dimensions shall conform to ANSI/ASME B36.10 or B36.19, as applicable. All stainless steel pipe and materials used in systems with design temperatures over 800ºF shall have a minimum carbon content of 0.04%. All piping for lubrication services shall be stainless steel, pickled, passivated and solvent cleaned after fabrication. All lube systems (except field installed) shall be flushed to an acceptable level of cleanliness and laid up for transit and storage prior to shipping. Certified documentation of the cleaning shall be provided to Contractor prior to delivery of the equipmentEquipment.


12.5 12.6 Galvanized Carbon Steel Pipe: Galvanized steel pipe shall be ASTM A53 Grade B. The piping shall be hot-dip galvanized. Schedules, sizes, and dimensions shall conform to ANSI/ASME B36.10. The use of galvanized steel pipe shall be limited to systems where a degree of corrosion resistance is required or where codes require the use of galvanized steel pipe rather than black steel pipe. 12.6 12.7 Low Chrome Alloy Pipe: Low chrome alloy pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM A335 Grades P11, P22, P91, or P5 seamless. 12.7 12.8 Alloy Steel Pipe: Steel piping for acid service shall be Alloy 20. 12.8 12.9 Rubber Lined Pipe: Lining materials, manufacturers and method of application for rubber lined carbon steel pipe shall be chosen to meet or exceed the service requirements. The lining application, inspection and testing shall be in strict accordance with the rubber and cement manufacturers’ current requirements. 12.9 12.10 Copper Alloy Pipe: Copper alloy pipe shall conform to ASTM B43, Seamless Red Brass Pipe. 12.10 12.11 Polypropylene Lined Pipe: Polypropylene lined pipe shall be ASTM A53 steel pipe with an applied liner of polypropylene and shall be used only with approval of the EngineerContractor. 12.11 12.12 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe: Fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe shall be chosen in accordance with the specific service requirements, and shall be used only with approval of the EngineerContractor. 12.12 12.13 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe conforming to ASTM D1785 or ASTM D2241, Sch 80 minimum, shall be used only with approval of the EngineerContractor. 12.13 12.14 Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe conforming to ASTM F441 shall be used only with approval of the EngineerContractor. 12.14 12.15 Carpenter Steel Pipe: Cr-Ni-Fe-Mo-Cu-Cb stabilized alloy piping (carpenter steel) shall conform to ASTM B464. 12.15 12.16 High Density Polyethylene Pipe: High-density polyethylene piping conforming to ASTM D3350 with a Plastic Pipe Institute rating of PE 3406 or 3408 shall be used only with approval of the EngineerContractor. 12.16 12.17 Underground Piping Materials: Buried pipe shall be non-metallic, ductile iron, concrete, carbon steel or stainless steel. The material selection shall be in accordance with the service requirements. Metallic underground piping shall be wrapped in accordance with AWWA standards.


12.17 12.18 Stainless Steel Tubing: Stainless steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A213, Type 316. All stainless steel tubing shall be of the fully annealed type, with carbon content greater than 0.04 percent. Stainless steel tubing for use with crimp or bite type tubing fittings shall not exceed Rockwell B80 hardness. 12.18 12.19 Copper Tubing: Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B75 or B88, Type K or Type L. All copper tubing shall be of the fully annealed type. Fittings shall be soldered or brazed or two (2) ferrule compression-type. See Article 12.26 of this Section related to control and instrument tubing requirements. 12.19 12.20 Scale free piping materials such as cleaned carbon steel, stainless steel or nonmetallic shall be used as follows. Piping applications requiring a high degree of cleanliness generally including injection water supply piping after strainers, air compressor inlet piping, miscellaneous lubricating oil system piping, and sampling piping after process isolation valves. Fiberglass reinforced plastic piping materials shall be used only in applications requiring corrosion-resistant materials. 12.20 12.21 Fittings shall be constructed of materials equivalent to the pipe with which they are used, except for polypropylene lined cast iron or ductile iron fittings that shall be used with polypropylene lined steel pipe, and rubber lined cast iron or ductile iron fittings that shall be used with rubber lined steel pipe: 12.20.1 12.21.1 Steel Fittings: Steel fittings 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be of the butt welding type and steel fittings 2 inches and smaller shall be of the socket welding type unless specified otherwise by the EngineerContractor. 12.20.2 12.21.2 Butt Welding Fittings: The wall thickness of butt welding fittings shall be equal to the pipe wall thickness. The fittings shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.9, ANSI/ASME B16.28, and ASTM A234 or ASTM A403.

12.20.3 12.21.3 Forged Steel Fittings: Forged steel fittings shall be used for socket weld and steel threaded connections and shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.11. 12.20.4 12.21.4 Cast Steel Flanged Fittings: Cast carbon steel flanged fittings shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5 and shall be of materials conforming to ASTM A216 WCB. 12.20.5 12.21.5 Adapters: Reducing outlet tees should be used in lieu of specially designed adapters for branch piping 2-1/2 inches and larger whenever possible. Specially designed adapters may be used in lieu of reducing outlet tees if standard reducing outlet tees are not available for the run and branch sizes specified. Specially designed adapters must be post weld heat treated as specified in ANSI/ASME B31.1. Branch connections 2 inches and smaller shall be made with special reinforced welding adapters, or shall have special welded and drilled pads.


12.20.6 12.21.6 Galvanized Pipe Fittings: Fittings for galvanized steel pipe shall be screwed malleable, iron Class 300, conforming to ASTM A197, or grooved in accordance with ASTM A536, or galvanized forged steel. 12.20.7 12.21.7 Rubber Lined Pipe Fittings: Flanged cast iron or ductile iron fittings used with rubber-lined pipe shall be lined with the same materials as the pipe with which they are used. 12.20.8 12.21.8 Brass and Bronze Fittings: Screwed brass and bronze pipe fittings shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.15. Flanged brass and bronze pipe fittings shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.24. 12.20.9 12.21.9 Polypropylene Lined Ductile Iron Fittings: Flanged ductile iron fittings used with polypropylene lined steel pipe shall be the ductile iron fittings conforming to ANSI A21.10 and shall be lined with the same material as the pipe with which they are used. 12.20.10 12.21.10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Fittings: Fittings for use with fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe shall be manufactured from material of the same type as the pipe. Joints shall be as required by the application. Engineer’sContractor’s approval is required prior to using FRP pipe. 12.20.11 12.21.11 Polyvinyl Chloride Fittings: Polyvinyl chloride pipe fittings shall be manufactured from PVC material of the same type as the pipe with which they are used. The fittings shall have socket ends with internal shoulders designed for solvent cementing and shall be Sch 80 minimum. Engineer’sContractor’s approval is required prior to using PVC pipe. 12.20.12 12.21.12 High Density Polyethylene Fittings: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings shall be manufactured from HDPE materials of the same type as the pipe with which they are used. The fittings shall have butt fusion ends. Engineer’sContractor’s approval is required prior to using HDPE pipe. 12.20.13 12.21.13 Tubing Fittings: Stainless steel fittings shall be used with stainless steel tubing. Fittings for use with stainless steel tubing in sizes smaller than 3/4 inch shall be of the flareless "compression" type, and fittings for use with tubing in sizes 3/4 inch and larger shall be socket weld type conforming in general design to ANSI/ASME B16.11. Fitting material and bursting strength shall be equivalent to the tubing with which they are used. All compression fittings for tubing shall be as manufactured by Swagelok, Parker, Gyrolock, or Contractor-approved equal. 12.20.14 12.21.14 Brass fittings shall be used with ASTM B75 copper tubing and shall be of the flareless "compression" type.. Braze or solder joint fittings shall be used with ASTM B88, Type K copper tubing and shall be wrought copper, bronze, or brass, conforming to ANSI/ASME B16.22. 12.21 12.22 Flanged joints shall be in accordance with the following requirements:


12.21.1 12.22.1 Flange Selection: Flanges mating with flanges on piping, valves, and Equipment shall be of sizes, drillings, and facings that match the connecting flanges of the piping, valves, and Equipment. Flange class ratings shall be adequate to meet the design pressure and temperature values specified for the piping with which they are used. Flanges shall be constructed of materials equivalent to the pipe with which they are used. 12.21.2 12.22.2 Steel Flanges: Steel flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5. 12.21.3 12.22.3 Steel flanges 2-1/2 inches and larger except for grooved pipe shall be of the weld neck or slip-on type and all steel flanges 2 inches and smaller shall be of the socket type. Slip-on flanges shall generally be used only when the use of weld neck flanges is impractical. Steel flanges shall have raised face flange preparation. Flat face flanges shall be used to mate with cast iron, ductile iron, fiberglass reinforced plastic, polyvinyl chloride, or bronze flanges. 12.21.4 12.22.4 Carbon steel flanges shall be of ASTM A105 material. Carbon steel flanges shall not be used for design temperatures exceeding 775°F. 12.21.5 12.22.5 Chromium alloy steel and stainless steel flanges shall conform to ASTM A182. 12.21.6 12.22.6 Brass and Bronze Flanges: Brass and bronze screwed companion flanges shall be plain faced and shall conform to Class 150 or Class 300 classifications of ANSI/ASME B16.24. Drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME Class 125 or Class 250 standards. 12.22 12.23 Compressed fiber gaskets shall be used with flat face flanges and raised face slip-on flanges. Spiral wound gaskets shall be used with raised face flanges, except for raised face slip-on flanges.. Gaskets containing asbestos are not acceptable. 12.22.1 12.23.1 Compressed Fiber Gaskets: Compressed fiber gaskets shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.21, and materials shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 600 psig and a maximum working temperature of 750°F. 12.22.2 12.23.2 Spiral Wound Gaskets: Spiral wound gaskets shall be constructed of a continuous stainless steel ribbon wound into a spiral with non-asbestos filler between adjacent coils. Spiral wound gaskets shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.20. 12.22.3 12.23.3 Rubber Gaskets: Rubber gasket materials shall be cloth-inserted sheet and shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.21. 12.22.4 12.23.4 Teflon Gaskets: Teflon gasket materials shall be glass reinforced PTFE sheet. Teflon gaskets shall be restricted for use with ANSI/ASME Class 150 and Class 300 systems at temperatures 400ºF and below. 12.23 12.24 Flange bolting shall conform to the following requirements:


12.24.1 Alloy steel bolting shall be used for joining all steel flanges, except steel slip-on flanges, with Class 150 or greater ratings. 12.23.2 12.24.1 Bolting shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B16.5. 12.23.3 12.24.2 Material for studs shall be ASTM A193, Grade B16 for piping design temperatures 750° F and above, and Grade B7 for piping design temperatures less than 750° F. 12.23.4 12.24.3 Material for nuts shall be ASTM A194, Grade 3 or Grade 7 for piping design temperatures 750° F and above, and Grade 2H for piping design temperatures less than 750° F. Nuts shall be heavy hex. 12.24.5 Carbon steel bolting shall be used for joining all other flanges, including steel slip-on flanges, and shall conform to the following:

Bolting shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B16.1 and ANSI/ASME B16.24. Bolting for bolt sizes 1-1/2 inches and larger shall consist of threaded studs and two nuts. Bolting for bolt sizes less than 1-1/2 inches may be threaded studs and nuts or bolts and nuts. Bolts and nuts shall be heavy hexagonal head conforming to ANSI/ASME B18.2. Alloy or carbon steel bolting used on stainless steel, fiberglass, PVC, galvanized, copper, brass, or polypropylene piping shall be zinc or cadmium plated or Contractor-approved alternate.

Bolted flange joint assemblies shall meet the requirements of ASME PCC-1: Guidelines for Pressure Boundary Bolted Flange Joint Assembly. 12.24 12.25 Piping unions shall be of the ground joint type constructed of materials equivalent in alloy composition and strength to other fittings in the piping systems in which they are installed. Union class ratings and end connections shall be the same as the fittings in the piping systems in which they are installed. 12.25 12.26 Control and Instrument Piping: Control and instrument piping shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1. Piping for control and instrument air lines shall be 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch outside diameter copper or stainless steel tubing., ASTM A213 TP316H, cold finished and annealed. Schedule 40, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel pipe, or copper pipe, shall be used for larger sizes. Piping and tubing materials shall be as specified herein.


Tubing wall thickness shall be suitable for the service conditions, but not less than 0.049 inch for 1/2 inch OD tubing and 0.035 inch for 3/8 inch OD tubing. Copper tubing shall not be used for instrument and/or compressed air service. 12.25.1 12.26.1 Air tubing supplied with pneumatic devices shall be 1/43/8 inch to 1/2 inch copper or stainless steel. Fittings for tubing shall be flareless compression type, Swagelok Type 316 stainless steel, or acceptableContractor-approved equal. Tubing supports shall be furnished to minimize vibration and shall be hot-dip galvanized Unistrut or acceptableContractor-approved equal. Tubing bends shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the tubing. All tubing shall be blown clean with dry compressed air after routing, but prior to attachment to devices at either end. 12.25.2 12.26.2 Each control enclosure or skid requiring a control air supply shall be furnished with a control air header and with a ball valve to shut off the air supply to the header and a blowdown valve at the low point. An air supply shutoff valve shall be furnished for each internal air line connection to the control air header.

12.25.3 12.26.3 Instrument impulse lines shall be constructed of high quality seamless stainless steel tubing that meets B31.1 and ASTM minimum wall standards. Material selection and wall thickness shall be suitable for the service conditions but not less than 316 stainless steel 0.049 inch wall, ½” nominal1/2 inch OD tubing. 12.25.4 12.26.4 Piping within control and instrument enclosures shall be arranged to allow any device to be serviced, disconnected, or removed from the enclosure without disconnecting piping or other devices. Tubing for external connections shall be terminated on bulkhead fittings in the bulkhead plate. 12.25.5 12.26.5 Each tubing termination and each air supply shutoff valve shall be identified by a metal tag stamped with the identification number furnished by the EngineerContractor for the connected device. 12.25.6 12.26.6 Piping schematic, connection, and interconnection diagrams shall be submitted to the EngineerContractor for acceptance. 13. VALVES: Valve pressure classes, sizes, types, body materials, and end preparations shall generally be in accordance with the following requirements. Valves shall be appropriate for the service intended. Any valve used for modulating/control service shall be specifically designed for such service. Special features and special application valves shall be utilized where required. Valves over 2-inch nominal bore which are intended for low pressure steam or steam drain services shall have bodies of cast or forged steel; those intended for water, water drains or air services shall have cast iron bodies. Valves of 2-inch nominal bore and under shall have bronze bodies and may have female threaded ends. All valves of 2-inch nominal bore and under shall have a rating classification of 600 psig for all services.


All piping and instruments rated ANSI 1500900 or greater shall utilize double block valves. All isolating valves shall be capable of being locked in both open and closed positions. All valves shall be fitted with open/shut indicators that may be readily seen from the operator’s level and in the case of those valves fitted with extended spindles (stems); indicators shall be fitted both to the extended spindle and to the valve spindle. Spindles of all valves for use outdoors shall have covers for weatherproof protection. Steel valves shall have cast or forged steel spindles. Each valve shall be tagged with a permanent stainless steel tag with the unique number stamped on the tag. All valves shall be arranged to close when the hand wheel is rotated in a clockwise direction when looking at the hand wheel from the operating position. The direction of rotation to close the valve shall be clearly marked on the face of each hand wheel. Valve materials shall be suitable for operation at the maximum working pressure and temperature of the piping to which they are connected. Seats and faces shall be of low friction, wear-resistant materials. Valves in throttling service shall be selected with design characteristics and of materials that will resist erosion of the valve seats when the valves are operated partly closed. Valves with position stops that limit the travel of each valve in the open or closed position shall have the stops located on the exterior of the valve body to provide clear indication of full open and close positions. In general, the valves specified shall be standardized to use the same valve type and manufacturer to the extent possible. All steam and water valves operating at less than atmospheric pressure shall have vacuum packing suitable for the design conditions. Valves shall be installed to meet the valve manufacturer’s requirements. For example, if the manufacturer requires a valve to be oriented with the actuator vertical, the actuator shall not be installed in any other way but with the valve actuator vertical. Valves shall not be installed in an inverted position unless approved by the EngineerContractor. Valves and valve components manufactured in the People’s Republic of China are not allowed for pressure classes greater than Class 300. If materials of Chinese origin are discovered in any components of the supplied valve, it will be removed and replaced at the Seller’s expense, regardless of whether the materials are “certified” or not. Liquidated damages will be assessed if there are schedule impacts resulting from the replacement of Chinese components. 13.1 Valves having butt welded, flanged, socket welded, or screwed connections shall have ends prepared in accordance with the applicable ANSI standards. Steel flanges shall be raised face type unless otherwise required. Cast iron and bronze flanges shall be flat faced type. Butt


weld end connections shall be prepared in accordance with the followingparagraph 12 of this specification. 13.2 Steel body gate, globe, angle, and check valves shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.34, as applicable. Valve bodies and bonnets shall be designed to support the valve operators (hand wheel, gear, or motor) with the valve in any position without external support. Steel valves shall have cast or forged steel spindles. Cast carbon steel, A216 Gr WCB, valves shall be limited to a maximum system design temperature of 775 ºF. Valves shall be manufactured by Velan, Crane, / Pacific Valves, Anderson Greenwood-Crosby, Edward Vogt, SPX Corporation, Fisher Controls InternationalBonney Forge, William Powell, Yarway, Zytech, or Dresser, IncContractor-approved equal. 13.3 Steel Body Valves 2" and Smaller: Steel body valves 2 inches and smaller will have forged steel bodies and shall be socket weld unless specified otherwise by the EngineerContractor. Forged steel valves complying with the standards and specifications of ANSI/ASME B31.1 shall be used within the manufacturer's specified pressure temperature ratings. The use of Class 1500 and 2500 forged steel valves will be limited in accordance with the pressure temperature ratings specified in ANSI/ASME B16.34 and the criteria established in MSS SP-84. Valves shall be manufactured by R-P&CBonney Forge, Conval, Mogas, Velan, Edward Vogt, or Yarway, Contractor-approved equal. 13.4 Steel Body Valves 2 1/2" and Larger: Steel body valves 2 1/2 inches and larger shall have cast steel bodies. The face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.10. The use of these valves shall be in accordance with the pressure temperature ratings specified in ANSI/ASME B16.34, as applicable. 13.5 Gate, globe, and angle valves shall be provided with back seating construction. Gate, globe, and angle valves shall be outside screw and yoke construction. Gate valves 4 inches and larger shall have flexible wedge disks or parallel slide type, and, when in the fully open position, the bore will not be obstructed by any part of the gate. ValvesGate valves shall have full size ports, except for selected large diameter, high-pressure valve applications where the use of valves with venturi ports may be used only with the approval of the EngineerContractor. Globe and angle valves shall be supplied with industry-standard conventional ports. 13.6 Check valves used on pump discharge installations, and on other applications in which the valves may be subjected to significant reverse flow water hammer or fluid surges, shall be of the non-slam, tilting disc type. All other check valves shall be of the guided piston, swing disc, or double-disc check type. The use of swing check valves shall be limited to 6 inches and smaller. The use of double-disc spring check valves shall be limited to 14 inches and larger in cold-water services only. All check valves shall be designed for installation in either horizontal or vertical piping with upward flow. Stop check valves, where specified, shall be Y-pattern globe type. 13.7 Iron Body Valves: Iron body gate, globe, and check valves shall have iron bodies and shall be bronze mounted. The face-to-face dimensions shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.10.


13.8 Butterfly Valves: Butterfly valves shall be used only where specifically approved by the EngineerContractor, and only in lines 3 inches and larger. Rubber-seated butterfly valves shall generally conform to the requirements of MSS Standard Practice SP-67, Butterfly Valves, with sealing between the disc and body by a renewable, resilient seat secured to the body. Valves of the wafer or lug wafer type shall be designed for installation between two ANSI flanges. Valves with flanged ends shall be faced and drilled in accordance with the pressure temperature ratings specified in ASME B16.10, for the pressure temperature ratings specified by the manufacturer. Butterfly valves shall be suitable for bi-directional shutoff at rated pressure. Butterfly valves shall be manufactured by Pratt, Bray, SPXAmri, Centerline, Tyco Valves & Controls, Crane,or Xomox, Metzo Automation, Amri, or Centerline. 13.9 Bronze Body Valves: Bronze gate and globe valves 2 inches and smaller shall have union bonnet joints and screwed ends. Bronze gate and globe valves used in control air service shall have brazed joint ends. Gate valves shall be inside screw, rising stem type with solid wedge disks. Globe valves shall have renewable seats and disks. Valves shall be manufactured by Crane, Powell, or Stockham. 13.10 Bronze check valves 2 inches and smaller shall be Y-pattern swing disc type or guided piston type designed for satisfactory operating in both horizontal piping and vertical piping with upward flow. 13.11 Bronze valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall have bolted flange bonnet joints and flanged ends. Gate and globe valves shall be of the outside screw rising stem construction. Gate valves shall have either integral or renewable seats. Globe valves shall have renewable seats. The use of these valves shall be in accordance with the pressure temperature ratings specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with the criteria established in MSS SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 13.12 Plug Valves: Plug valves shall be of the eccentric lubricated, or teflon sleeve plug type, as required by the service. Plug valve bodies shall conform to the requirements of ANSI for dimensions, material thickness, and material specifications. Bonnets shall be of the bolted flange type. Body ends shall be flanged, faced, and drilled for installation between ANSI flanges. The use of these valves shall be in accordance with the pressure temperature ratings specified by the manufacturer. 13.13 Ball Valves for High Temperature Service: Ball valves for high temperature service shall have metal seats, hardened balls, and shall meet temperature/pressure ratings of ASME B16.34. Valves shall have blowout proof stems. 13.14 Ball Valves for Regular Service: All other ball valves shall have full area ports, teflon seats and seals, and chrome plated carbon steel or stainless steel balls, and shall not require lubrication. Ball valve bodies 2 inches and smaller shall have threaded end connections. Ball valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall have flanged ends. Ball valves shall have provisions for locking in-place if used for other than full open or closed service.


Where welded end connections are required, ball valves shall be 3-piece, or top entry, to permit valve disassembly prior to welding. 13.14.1 Ball valves for natural gas service shall conform to API-607. 13.15 Diaphragm Valves: Diaphragm valves shall be straightway or weir bodies with flanged ends faced and drilled for installation between ANSI flanges, and shall not be used unless approved by the EngineerContractor. 13.16 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Valves. PVC and CPVC valves will be constructed entirely from polyvinyl chloride, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride, and teflon. Bodies will be double entry flanged or true union screwed type. 13.17 Branch Isolation Valves: Isolation valves shall be provided in 2-inch and smaller branch lines from main piping headers and equipment. 13.18 Valve Operators: Valves shall be provided with manual or automatic operators as required for the service application and system control philosophy. Automatic operators shall be motor, piston, or diaphragm type, and shall be provided where required for automated process control or for safety reasons. Air-operated valves shall be provided for modulating service and/or where a valve is required to fail in the open or closed position. Manual operators shall be lever, hand wheel, or gear type, with the use of lever operators to be limited to valves requiring a maximum of 90 degree stem rotation from full open to full closed position on valve sizes 6 inches and smaller. Gear operators shall be used on all valve sizes greater than 6-inch, and on any valve requiring more than 75 pounds rim pull to operate the valve at the maximum differential pressure. All operators shall be sized to operate the valve with the valve exposed to maximum differential pressure. Isolation valves installed in areas inaccessible from platforms shall be furnished with chain wheels. 13.19 Valve Special Features: Valves shall be provided with locking devices, hand wheel extensions, vacuum service packing, limit switches, and other special features as required. 13.20 Locking devices, when furnished, shall allow the valve to be locked either opened or closed with a standard padlock. Limit switches, when furnished, shall be provided for the opened and closed position of the valve. 13.21 All valve bonnets for valves potentially exposed to high temperatures (over 150 oF150oF) shall be provided with internal drains. The drains shall prevent the bonnets from being exposed to excessive pressure when the bonnet is full of water and the valve is exposed to elevated temperatures. 13.22 Valves shall not be equipped with bypasses unless specifically required. 13.23 Manually Operated Valves: Manual valves that are normally operated during facility operation, and manual block valves that are required for normal plant start-up and shut-down,


shall be located such that operation can be performed either from grade, platform, by chain, or by extended stem operator, in that order of preference. 13.24 Valves for Oil Services: All valves intended for fuel oil or lubricating oil services shall be of cast or forged steel construction with flanged, butt weld, screwed or socket-welded ends. Weld-on flanges will not be acceptable. All valves shall be fire safe and shall be provided with suitable features in the valve to ensure electrical continuity between the valve stem and the body of the valve. No aluminum or zinc alloys or similar low melting material shall be included in their construction. All isolation valves shall provide reliable tight shut-off and be capable of easy operation after long periods in one position. 14. CONTROL VALVES: Control valves shall be Fisher, Valtek, Leslie or CCI. Deviations from this requirement will not be accepted. 14.1 Control valve sizing shall consider valve application and the minimum, normal, and maximum-operating conditions specified to ensure suitable valve capacity, trim and rangeability. Control valve sizing shall be based on ISA Standard 75.01. Valves shall be designed to pass the maximum flow at 70% to 85% of valve capacity and normally be no less than 10% open at minimum required Cv conditions. 14.2 Cast iron bodies for control valves are not acceptable. 14.3 Two (2) isolating gate valves and one (1) globe bypass valve adequate for full flow shall be provided for control valves unless specifically stated otherwise. Double-block and bleed shall be provided where practical. 14.4 Control valves in general shall be of the single seat, cage guided, globe pattern type with bolted bonnets for steam and clean liquid/gas applications. Valves for liquid/gas applications containing suspended solids, and valves that are too small for cage guiding, shall be top guided. Stem and port guided valves are not acceptable for any application. Other valve body pattern types (butterfly, ball, eccentric disc, etc.) may be used if worst-case service conditions are acceptable to the valve manufacturer. Valve body materials shall be based on the design service conditions for use under ANSI/ASME B31.1 code. Valve bodies shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with ANSI B16.37. Valve bodies shall be marked in accordance with MSS SP25. 14.5 Control valve body size shall be no more than two (2) nominal sizes smaller than the line in which the valve is to be installed. Valve body sizes of 1 1/4 inch, 2 1/2 inch, 3 1/2 inch and 5 inch shall not be used. Control valves shall conform to the face-to-face or end-to end dimensions of ANSI B16.10, and tested in accordance with ANSI B16.34. All welding performed on valves shall conform to ASME IX. All welds shall be nondestructive inspected to the requirements of ASME B31.1. Steel valves 2" nominal size and smaller shall be furnished with socket weld ends. Steel Valves larger than 2" nominal size shall be furnished with butt weld ends per ASME B16.25. and paragraph 12 of this specification. Flanged end and threaded end valves shall not be used without approval of the EngineerContractor.


14.6 Control valve noise levels shall meet the requirements in Section GR-A, General Description and Scope of Work. 14.7 Valve seat leakage class and valve failure positions shall be determined by the process requirements. Valve leakage class shall conform to ANSI/FCI 70-2. 14.8 An arrow shall be clearly displayed on the valve body in the form of castings, stamping or plate indicating the direction of the flow. 14.9 On/off valves for combustible fluid valves shall have fire safe seats and seals for valves and actuator where required by applicable codes and regulations.

14.10 Control valve actuators shall be the pneumatic-spring diaphragm or piston type. The actuator shall be sized to shut off against at least 110% of the maximum shutoff pressure. Actuators shall be designed to function with instrument air pressure ranging from 60 to 125 psig. Control valve accessories, excluding controllers, shall be mounted on the valve actuator unless severe vibration is expected.

14.11 Control valve trim shall be stainless steel minimum, hardened for erosive service required by the design conditions. Severe service conditions may dictate consideration of other materials.

14.12 Packing glands shall be equipped with flange-style gland followers, secured by two bolts. Packing shall be Teflon below 450oF and Graphoil for temperatures of 450oF and higher. No asbestos is permissible.

14.13 Extension bonnets shall be provided on throttling services above 450oF and below 0oF, or in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. On-off control valves shall use high temperature packing in lieu of extension bonnets when practicable.

14.14 Piston actuators shall be furnished with pneumatic trip valve, volume tank, piping, and necessary components to lock-in supply air pressure on loss of supply air pressure to actuator to ensure proper failure position. 15. SPECIALTIES: Butt weld end connections for mechanical specialties shall be prepared in accordance with paragraph 12 of this specification. Mechanical specialties shall be meet the following requirements: 15.1 High-Pressure Steam Traps (ANSI Class 600 and above): High-pressure steam traps shall be of impulse type or inverted bucket type with integral strainers, socket weld ends, and steel, chrome moly, or stainless steel bodies as required by design temperature. Traps shall be installed with shutoff valves and bypass valves. Trap bodies and covers shall be cast or forged steel and be suitable for operating at the maximum working pressure and temperature of the piping to which they are connected.


15.2 Low-Pressure Steam Traps (ANSI Class 300 and below): Low-pressure steam traps shall be of the float type or thermostatic type with integral strainer and internal check valve. Traps shall be installed with shutoff and bypass valves. Trap bodies and covers shall be cast or forged steel and be suitable for operating at the maximum working pressure and temperature of the piping to which they are connected. 15.3 Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be suitable for the pressure, temperature, and axial/lateral movements required by the system design. All joints shall be designed for full vacuum. End connections, size, and materials shall be compatible with adjacent piping or Equipment. 15.3.1 Metal expansion joints shall have stainless steel bellows and carbon or alloy steel pipe ends. Bellows shall be ASTM type 316 stainless steel. Joints shall be supplied with internal liners, protective outer shrouds, and restraining rods. Metal expansion joints shall conform with Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association (EJMA), ASME, and ANSI standards. 15.3.2 Rubber expansion joints shall be constructed of multiple layers of fabric impregnated with rubber and reinforced with steel as required. Expansion joints shall be furnished with tie rods. Rubber expansion joints shall be in accordance with Rubber Expansion Joint Division of the Fluid Sealing Association. 15.4 Strainers: Strainers shall be furnished and installed based on system requirements. This shall include all permanent and temporary startup strainers. Strainer type, size, body materials, and inlet/outlet connections shall be selected based on system design requirements. Basket strainers shall be in accordance with applicable ASME and ANSI standards. All strainer bodies, except tee type strainers, shall have tapped and plugged drain connections. Tee type strainers shall have a quick open, hinged access covers. 15.5 Safety and Relief Valves: Safety and relief valves shall be provided as required to protect piping systems and Equipment and as required by code. The valve type and materials of construction shall be selected based on system pressure and temperature requirements. The valves shall be designed to allow an adjustment range of 10 percent above and below set pressure. All valves shall be designed to relieve to atmospheric pressure unless a backpressure or differential is required. Relief valve vent stacks for steam service shall be sized to prevent blowback and shall be routed vertically and away from platforms and walkways for personnel safety. Safety valves shall be ASME code stamped, factory calibrated, and provided with a certified calibration sheet. Nameplates on safety and relief valves shall indicate manufacturer’s name, model number, size, set pressure, capacity, orifice size, materials, and approving authority stamp symbol. 15.5.1 Safety valves shall be of the high capacity, flat seated, reactive type attaining full lift on pop and having a maximum blow down of three (3) percent (or as specified by the applicable Code and Standards) of the set gauge pressure. Safety valves shall be of the spring loaded or torsion bar, angle valve type, and shall have welded or flanged ends at the inlets and flanged outlets. Relief valves shall be of the spring loaded, angle valve type. The open spring casing type shall be used for air and saturated steam only.


15.5.2 Silencers are not required for safety relief valves unless otherwise noted in the detailed specifications. 16. MOTOR OPERATED VALVES: Motor operated valves, if required, are specifiedshall be in accordance with Section E3 and this specification.

END OF SECTION


SECTION M2

GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FOR

SKID-MOUNTED AND SELLER-ENGINEERED SYSTEMS 1. INSTRUMENTATION, GENERAL: Instrumentation components furnished with the Equipment shall be in accordance with the following Articles and shall be constructed to withstand the pressures, temperatures and other environmental conditions, including vibration, encountered in the actual service. Instruments and devices shall be suitably protected for shipment and the rigors of construction. Explosion proof construction shall be furnished where required by applicable code or the detailed Specifications. 1. The instrumentation for critical equipment shall be designed in such a way that no single control system, instrument failure, controller failure, fuse, or circuit breaker shall interrupt the operation of more than one piece of redundant equipment.

All instrumentation shall be certified, labeled, designed, built, rated, and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the applicable ANSI standards. Components that are standard UL listed and labeled shall be provided where routinely available. Instruments shall be wired to common junction boxes. Instrument analog signals for electronic instrument systems shall be 4 to 20 ma dc. Instrument analog signals for pneumatic instrument systems shall be 3 to 15 psig. Use of pneumatic controls shall be limited to applications where sub-supplier standard designs cannot be provided without them and only with approval of the Contractor. All process control units of measurement shall be English. All instrumentation, devices, monitors and indicators shall be English. All instrument drawings, specifications, calculations and documentation shall be prepared in English units. All documentation shall be in the English language. The following table details specific units per measurement parameter.

Parameter Units of Measurement

Temperature degrees Fahrenheit (o F)

Pressure pounds per square inch gauge (psig)

inches of water column (in wc) or (inH2O)

pounds per square inch absolute (psia)

inches of mercury absolute (in HgA)

Level

General percent

Tank Gauge linear feet, inches, and tenths of inches


Parameter Units of Measurement

Deviation from normal level

Flow

Liquids gallons per minute (gpm)

pounds per hour (pph or #/hr)

Gases and Vapors standard cubic feet per minute at 60 OF (SCFM)

standard cubic feet per hour at 60 OF (SCFH)

Steam, and Boiler Feedwater, and Condensate

pounds per hour (pph or #/hr)

Solids pounds per hour (pph or #/hr)

tons per day (tpd)

Steam & Water Sampling

PH pH (pH Units)

Specific conductivity µS/cm

Cation conductivity µS/cm

Degassed cation conductivity

µS/cm

Dissolved oxygen parts per billion (ppb)

Silica or sodium parts per billion (ppb)

Oxygen scavenger parts per billion (ppb)

Sulfate, phosphate, chloride

parts per billion (ppb)

Turbidity NTU

Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/L [ADD THE FOLLOWING TO THE TABLE: TURBIDITY (NTU), TOTAL SUSPENDED SOLIDS (TSS) (MG/L) If measurements for something other than what is listed belowabove are required, the units shall be submitted to the Contractor for approval. 1.1 Calibration: All instruments shall be factory calibrated and provided with certified calibration sheets as specified in Section GR-B, Engineering Data and Submittal Schedule.


1.2 Instrument Tags: Each instrument shall have a stainless steel instrument tag permanently attached to them. If this is not possible, the instrument tag shall be fastened to the instrument with stainless steel wire. The instrument tag shall be stamped or etched with the instrument identification number (tag number). This tag is in addition to the nameplate, which provides the manufacturer's model number and other data. Phenolic laminated nameplates shall be provided for each board or locally mounted instrument indicating tag number, service and pertinent information such as chart factors if required.

2. SWITCHES, GENERAL: Switch elements shall be one DPDT or two SPDT set to actuate at the same set point. Switch elements shall be snap action hermetically sealed elements. Contact ratings shall be 5A at 120 VAC or 0.5 A at 125 VDC. Mercury type switch elements are not acceptable. Switch housings shall be rated NEMA 4X as a minimum. Switch conduit connections shall be 1” FNPT. In general, switches shall be applied such that the actuation point is within the center one-third of the instrument range. Switch action for alarms, shutdowns, and interlocks shall normally be closed circuit at normal operating conditions and open circuit for abnormal condition (i.e. Open-to-Alarm). Switches shall be suitable for the area electrical classification, if specified.

2.1 Limit Switches: Limit switches, when furnished on a control valve, shall be provided for the open and closed position of the valve.

When specified, limit switches shall be securely fastened to the valve yoke in such a manner as to not interfere with any valve or accessory function.

Limit switches, except those integrally mounted on motor operated valves, shall have NEMA 4X enclosures. Limit switches shall be suitable for the Area Electrical Classification if specified.

Switch settings shall be factory calibrated based on the detailed requirements specified.

Motor- and solenoid-operated valves and dampers shall have either two or three operator interface functions, i.e. open, close, and auto (if automatic operation is required). Open and closed indications (with both shown when the device is in its intermediate position) shall be locally indicated for operator feedback.

2.2 Pressure and Differential Pressure Switches: Pressure and differential pressure switches’ operating mechanismssensing switches for alarm and shutdown shall be diaphragm actuator, force-balance piston actuated, or a combination diaphragm-piston actuated, or Contractor-approved technologyhave separate housings. Unless the process dictates otherwise; the body, diaphragm, wetted components, and process connection material shall be a minimum of 316 stainless steel. All measuring elements shall be able to withstand the full rating of the switch in either direction without damage, without changing repeatability or any zero shifts. The switch set point shall be adjustable over the full range of the measuring element. Accuracy of switches will be 0.5% of range or better and repeatability will be 0.1% of range or better. Pressure sensing switches for alarm and shutdown shall have separate housings.

Pressure connections shall be 1/2 inch FNPT. Alarm and shutdown switch settings shall not be adjustable from outside the housing.


Pressure and differential pressure switches shall be Ashcroft, Merriam, Midwest, or Contractor-approved equal.

2.3 Level Switches: In general, levelLevel switches shall normally be the external float cage type with side and bottom 1-inch socket weld connections, constructed to ANSI/ASME B31.1 requirements, and suitable for the pressure, temperature, and general service conditions and functions specified. Internal trim shall be stainless steel unless other materials are required for the service.

Floats shall be fabricated of 316L stainless steel as a minimum and shall be encased in a cage. All cages shall have a flanged connection to permit removal of the float.

All electrical conduit connections shall be 3/4 inch NPT.

Switch element leads shall be of high temperature construction as required by the service and shall be terminated on terminal blocks within the switch housing.

Float switches shall be Magnetrol, SOR, or ContractorEngineer approved equal. 2.4 Temperature switches: Temperature switches, locally mounted in Division 1 or 2 locations, shall be filled system bulb type or expansion type. They shall meet the electrical classification and shall have micro switches. Separable sockets shall be furnished. Temperature switches mounted on a local panel shall normally be thermocouple actuated with cold-junction compensation and be completely adjustable. Thermowells shall be furnished for all temperature switches and shall be as specified in this Section. Temperature switches shall be Ashcroft or Contractor-approved equal. 2.5 Flow switches: Flow switches for direct operation by process fluids may be of the sight flow, rotameter, or paddle type for low accuracy requirements. Orifice plate and differential-pressure type shall be used for high accuracy requirements. 3. GAUGES, GENERAL: Gauges on process piping shall generally be visible 10 feet from an operator's normal stance at floor level and shall be resistant to Facility atmospheres. Gauge faces shall not be obstructed by Equipment, other devices, piping, conduit, or supports. Weep holes shall be provided on the case bottom of all gauges located in humid areas unless the case already has sufficient ventilation. 3.1 Level Gauges: Level gauges shall be suitable for the design and the expected range of service conditions. Gauge glasses used in conjunction with level instruments shall cover a range slightly greater than the highest and lowest trip/alarm setpoints. Level glasses shall be visible from grade, platform, or the related instrument.

Materials of Construction: All metal parts of level gauge glasses and gauge cocks shall be rust proof. Brass and bronze are not acceptable for any wetted parts. Alloy construction (normally 304 stainless steel) shall be used for all wetted parts where the application requires it, and on applications below 20°F. GaugesGauge shall have tempered borosilicate glass or equivalent


material resistant to thermal and mechanical shock. Glass gauges for high temperature use shall be coated with Mica coating. Gauges for caustic, steam or water service greater than 200°F shall be furnished with Mica or approved shields. Level gauges shall be of the following type:

Transparent glass for: Translucent or opaque liquids

Reflex glass for: Transparent liquids

Level gauges shall be supplied with drain valves, shut-offs valves, ball check valves and gauge guards. Upper and lower check valves shall be equipped with B31.1 complaint ball checks which, in the event of glass breakage, shall automatically seal to prevent the leakage of vessel contents. Gauge cocks shall be offset pattern type, unless required otherwise by the Seller’s design.

Connections of gauge glasses shall normally be 0.5-inch or 0.75-inch NPT female top and bottom. Other connection orientations may be used where required.

Level gauges shall be Jerguson, Yarway, or ContractorEngineer approved equal.

3.2 Pressure Gauges: Gauges for control air supply and signal pressures integral to the instrument shall be in accordance with the control manufacturer's standards. All other gauges shall be 4-1/2 inch with markings for approximately 270 degrees of the dial. Ranges shall be selected so that the operating pressure appears in the middle third of the dial. Units of measurement shall be shown on the dial face. Dials shall be white with black markings. Accuracy shall be within 0.5% of full scale, per ASME B40.1 Grade 2A. All gauges shall have stainless steel movementsmoveable parts and ½” MNPT process connections. Gauges shall have externally adjustable pointers. Each gauge case shall have shatterproof glass and a blowout disk in the back. Bourdon tubes shall not contain copper material. Pulsation dampers or manufacturer’s mechanical options shall be provided on all severe service applications such as pump discharge pressure measurements. Diaphragm seals shall be provided for freeze protection, corrosive fluids, and “dirty” services that can clog the measuring element. Diaphragm seals shall have ½” FNPT process connections. Pressure gauge calibration reports showing the numbers and full calibration information including when and where the calibration occurred shall be supplied. Pigtail siphon tubes shall be provided for all steam pressure measurements. Pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft or ContractorEngineer approved equal.

3.3 Temperature Gauges: Temperature gauges for local mounting shall be bimetallic type with 5-inch dials minimum, white faces, black scale markings, and shatterproof glass. For high temperatures or for remote mounting, temperature gauges shall be minimum 5-inch dial gas actuated gauges. Ranges shall be selected so that the operating temperature appears in the middle third of the dial. Temperature gauges shall have an external zero adjustment and be of the “every angle” configuration. For high temperatures, or for remote mounting, thermometers shall be minimum 5 inch dial gas actuated thermometers. Thermowells shall be furnished for all temperature gauges and shall be as specified in this Section. Temperature gauges shall be Ashcroft EI case style or EngineerContractoror Engineer approved equal.


4. TRANSMITTERS, GENERAL: Electronic transmitters for pressure and differential pressure measurement shall be Rosemount 3051 "SMART" transmitters. The transmitter shall be of the loop powered, two-wire type, 4-20 mA output signal, with 12 to 42 VDC power supply capable of driving a load of up to 750 ohms. Transmitters using a digital signal based on HART Protocol shall be supplied. Transmitter housing shall have a minimum rating of NEMA 4X. Unless the process dictates otherwise; the body, wetted trim, and process connections materials shall be 316 stainless steel at a minimum. Accuracy of electronic transmitters shall be ±0.10% of range or better and repeatability shall be ±0.10% of range or better. Range span shall be a minimum ratio of 10:1. Wherever possible, conduit size shall be ½” NPT. Transmitters shall be suitable for the area electrical classification, if specified.

4.1 Pressure Transmitters: All pressure and differential pressure transmitters shall be provided with B31.1 compliant instrument manifolds to permit isolation from the process, equalization, and calibration. Process connections on manifolds will be 1/2" FNPT. Static pressure transmitters shall be equipped with a two-valve manifold, and differential pressure transmitters shall be equipped with a three-valve manifold. Pressure transmitters with flanged connections shall be silicone-filled and provided with flushing connection ring.

4.2 Level Transmitters: Sensing elements for level transmitters shall be as follows:

Gauge pressure transmitters for vessels exposed to atmospheric pressure.

Enclosed, pressurized vessel level shall be measured using radar, ultrasonic, guided wave radar or differential pressure transmitters.

4.2 4.3 Flow Transmitters: Flow transmitters, in general, shall be differential pressure types. Square root extraction shall generally be performed electronically in the control system which receives the transmitter output signal. However these differential pressure transmitters shall have square root extrapolation capabilities for flow indication.

Flow measurements shall be taken using differential pressure type instruments, vortex shedding meters, magnetic flow meters as described later in this specification, or other Contractor-approved applications as required by the process. or other Engineer approved applications as required by the process. Averaging pitot type devices shall be used for non-critical flow measurement and shall be constructed of stainless steel as a minimum. Flow nozzles shall be used for critical measurements and shall be calibrated to provide a total system accuracy of 1 percent. Instrument selection shall maintain as much uniformity in device types as possible. Configuration of differential pressure flowmeters and associated connecting piping system to transmitters shall be in accordance with recommendations in ASME MFC-3M-2004 and Manufacturer's installation manual.

5. TEMPERATURE DEVICES

5.1 Temperature Detectors: Temperature detectors shall be thermocouples or resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) as required by the following paragraphs and the technical Specifications.


Temperature detectors equipped with thermowells shall be spring-loaded and shall be furnished as complete assemblies, each including a thermowell, nipple, and weatherproof connection head with terminal block. Thermowells shall be as specified in this Section.

The cast aluminum or zinc plated cast iron head shall be approximately 4 inches in diameter with a weatherproof screw cover that is chained to the head. The arrangement shall be such that rotation of the screw cover does not damage the internal components. A grounding terminal shall be provided in each connection head. The head shall be “explosion proof” rated where required for hazardous areas. The cap shall be chained to the thermocouple head to prevent its loss.

Thermocouples shall be duplex with ungrounded measuring junctions. The 304 stainless steel sheath shall have compacted magnesium oxide (ceramic) insulation and be made of be 304 stainless steel, 316 stainless steel, or Inconel. Thermocouple assembly extensions shall be nipple union nipple type with the upper nipple the thermocouple spring loaded fitting. Thermocouples shall be Watlow, Pyromation, STI manufacturing, or Contractor-Engineer approved equal.

ThermocouplesTemperature detectors for bearing, metal, and fluid temperatures shall be ISA Type K (chromel-alumel) thermocouples with Type KX extension wire. Thermocouple and RTD wires shall be low voltage level code 4. Thermocouples and extension wire shall comply with special limits of error in accordance with the latest version of ANSI MC96.1, "Temperature Measurement Thermocouples." Color code shall be per ISA standard for ISA thermocouple types. Where the process accuracy demands cannot be satisfied by a thermocouple, a resistance temperature detector may by supplied. Resistance temperature detectors shall be 100-ohm platinum, metal sheathed, ceramic packed, ungrounded resistance temperature detectors. RTDs shall be duplex.

Temperature elements measuring inaccessible points shall be wired out to a place safely accessible to maintenance personnel while the unit is operating. Temperature elements used for control and safety shutdown purposes must be wired out to transmitters. Multiple temperature elements located in close proximity should be wired out to junction boxes and terminal strips designed for the temperature element in use, located in a place safely accessible to maintenance personnel while the unit is running. Temperature elements used for monitoring only may also be wired to transmitters. If a thermocouple or RTD is inaccessible under normal operating conditions, the leads shall be brought out to an accessible junction box and terminated on terminal blocks suited for the purpose.

5.2 Thermowells: Fluid system temperature sensors shall be equipped with stepless, tapered stainless steel thermowells manufactured to ASME PTC 19.3 standards. Thermowells shall be made of one-piece, solid bored, construction and be designed to withstand the maximum system pressure, velocity and velocity induced vibration. Thermowells installed in carbon steel pipe shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Thermowells installed in alloy pipe shall be constructed of matching alloy. The bore of each well shall be concentric with the outside diameter within ±10 percent of the wall thickness. Thermowells shall extend at least one-third (1/3) of the pipe diameter into the process stream as allowed by the ASME PTC-19.3 vibration


analysis. The instrument tag number shall be stamped or etched on the upper hex or round portion of the thermowell.

Thermowells shall be threaded or socket welded to fit the Seller’s process connection. Thermowells installed in alloy, steam, and boiler feedwater systems shall have 1.5 inch socketweld piping connections. All other thermowells shall have 1 inch NPT piping connections. Threaded connections shall be constructed to allow seal welding after installation, as required. Additionally, each thermowell shall have a lagging extension equivalent to the pipe insulation thickness and have wrench flats to facilitate removal. Thermowells shall be procured from the temperature element provider.

5.3 Test Wells: Test wells shall meet all the criteria for material, design, construction, and certification specified for thermowells. Test wells shall have a 0.385 inch bore. Each test well shall be supplied with a threaded brass plug that is to be connected to the upper portion of the thermowell with a stainless steel chain.

6. SOLENOID VALVES, GENERAL: Valves shall be selected to incorporate body construction, trim materials, and internal arrangements suitable to the application and shall be acceptable to the Contractor. Solenoid enclosures shall be NEMA 4X, unless otherwise specified. Solenoid coils shall be Class H high temperature construction and shall be suitable for continuous duty. Solenoid valves coils shall be 120 VAC unless otherwise specified. Solenoid valves shall be suitable for the area electrical classification, if specified.

Solenoid valves shall be mounted on the motorairmotor operated valve yokes unless specified otherwise.

When required, solenoid valves shall be three-way, connected so as to vent the top works on loss of power unless specified otherwise. Minimum connection size shall be ¼” NPT.

Solenoid valves shall be Asco or Contractor-approved equal.

7. FLOW DEVICES

7.1 Differential Pressure Flow Elements and Restriction Orifices: Sizing calculations shall be submitted for EngineeringContractorEngineering review before manufacturing of the instrument takes place. Calculations shall be certified and conform to the requirements of ASME MFC-3M-2004, “Principles and Practices of Flow Meter Engineering” by L.K. Spinks or “Flow Measurement Engineering Handbook” by R.W. Miller. Piping layouts for flow elements used for performance testing shall comply with ASME PTC-19.5-2004. Piping layouts for flow elements not used for performance testing shall comply with ASME MFC-3M-2004.

Orifice plates shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel as a minimum. Orifice plates shall be one-piece construction and shall be concentric, square edge, paddle type. Orifice plates used for flow measurement shall be installed between raised face, weld neck, orifice flanges. Weep holes shall be provided in steam and gas flow installations where there is possible condensation or in liquid flow where there is possible gas entrainment. Orifice plates used for flow measurement


shall have a beta ratio (d/D), the ratio of the orifice diameter (d) to the inside diameter (D) of the pipe shall be between 0.2 and 0.70, inclusive.

For gas and vapor service, the differential pressure range in inches of water normally shall not exceed the static absolute pressure in psia.

Flange taps shall normally be used in accordance with ASME MFC-3M-2004. For special alloys and 14-inch-and-larger pipe sizes, in Class 150 classification, throat taps may be used. One-half-inch NPT is the normal tap size for Class 300 through Class 600 flange rating. Three-quarter-inch is the tap size for Class 900 through Class 2500 flange rating. Where threaded connections are not permitted by the pipe class, socket weld connections shall be used. The minimum orifice flange rating shall be ANSI Class 300. The use of higher rated flanges, or of facing type, shall be as called for in piping specifications. Ring-type plate holders shall be manufacturer's standard plate mounting. Ring facing shall be oval ANSI standard unless otherwise required by piping specifications.

Flow element pressure taps for horizontal pipe runs shall normally be oriented horizontal for clean liquids and steam, and vertical-up for dry gases. Flow orifice plates shall be installed only after applicable piping has been flushed or blown clean. Venturi tubes, low-loss tubes, and flow nozzles shall be used where high-pressure recovery is necessary and/or where only low inlet pressure is available. Averaging pitot tubes may be used where the pipe diameter is too large for acceptable orifice plate design in applications such as pump minimum flow bypass control, or where normal straight pipe requirements are not met. Acceptable vendors are Dietrich Standard, Deltabar/Midwest Instruments, Veris or Engineer approved equal. Other types of flow elements should be considered where their use is desirable and the above-mentioned elements are not applicable. Integral orifice meters (combination primary element-measuring device) shall normally be used for meter runs of less than 1.5 inches with a suitable strainer upstream of the meter. This type of flow meter shall not be used in outdoor installations where there is a risk of freezing temperatures. Eccentric type orifice plates shall be used for fluids containing two phases. The eccentric-type orifice plates shall have the bottom of the orifice bore flush with the bottom ID of the pipe. Eccentric orifice plates shall be used only in horizontal runs.

Orifice flanges and flow nozzles or venturis shall be oriented such that taps are horizontal, neither above nor below the centerline of the pipe. Flow orifice plates shall be installed only after applicable piping has been flushed or blown down. Orifices, Orifice flanges and flow nozzles andor venturis shall be Daniel Industries Inc., Fluidic


Technologies, Triad, PFS or Contractor-Engineer approved equal. Vortex meters and magmeters shall be Rosemount or Contractor-Engineer approved equal. 7.2 Other types of flow elements should be considered for non-critical services where their use is desirable and the above-mentioned elements are not applicable. Piping layouts shall be per manufacturer’s standard. Averaging pitot tubes may be used where the pipe diameter is too large for acceptable orifice plate design in applications such as pump minimum flow bypass control, or where normal straight pipe requirements are not met. Pitot tubes shall be constructed of stainless steel material as a minimum. Acceptable vendors are Dietrich Standard, Deltabar/Midwest Instruments, Veris or Contrator-approved equal. 8. INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION: Instrument, control, and sampling tubing systems shall be designed, fabricated, and tested in accordance with ANSI ISA RP 7.1.

All pipe-mounted temperature and pressure indicators and bridle-mounted level gauges shall be mounted so as to provide direct visual readings from operating decks and accessibility for maintenance.

Temperature, pressure, and differential-pressure transmitters, switches, and transducers shall be mounted on either stands or racks or in local instrument cabinets as long as instruments are properly protected, including environmental protection (heat traced). Instruments that can be logically grouped shall be installed on racks or in local instrument cabinets. Instrumentation, accessories, and all other equipment shall be located and mounted such that calibration, maintenance, and removal work can be performed on any one piece of equipment without disturbing another. Adequate clearance shall be provided so that calibration, adjustments, and connections are easily accessible without need of instrument removal. All instrument covers shall be provided with adequate clearance space for removal. Equipment shall be arranged such that work can be performed easily, without need for special tools.

Instruments and manifold valves shall be easily accessible for calibration. Each pressure connection, except for relief valves, shall have a root valve. All external electrical connections of junction boxes and cabinets shall be made to terminal blocks. The wiring and terminal blocks for different voltage classes shall be physically separated in order to minimize electrical noise and hazard to personnel. Terminal blocks shall be provided with marker strips. Instruments shall be mounted in a manner that prevents vibration effects. Where necessary, pulsation dampeners will be supplied. Instrumentation installation shall be designed for proper sensing of process variables. Taps on process lines shall be located such that sensing lines do not trap air in liquid service or liquid in


gas service. Calibration tees shall be provided for all instruments requiring calibration. In general, impulse lines measuring liquids in horizontal piping shall be connected to the process piping at an angle between horizontal and 45º down from horizontal. In general, impulse lines measuring vapors, gas and air in horizontal piping shall be connected to the process piping at an angle between vertical and 45º down from vertical. For vertical piping, there are no restrictions on tap orientation. The height of the parallel legs of differential pressure elements must be identical and shall emanate from the same side of the pipe to facilitate the connection of winterization tubing bundles. The process connection shall be located to allow for correct orientation of the instruments while maintaining accessibility. Instruments measuring the pressure or flow of steam or liquids or measuring levels shall be located below the process connections. Instruments measuring the pressure or flow of vapors, gas or air shall be mounted above the process connections. Impulse lines connected to steam or hot water services shall be of sufficient length to allow for cooling of the liquids before they come into contact with the transmitter cell. Sample tubing connection to be 1/2” minimum nominal diameter.

Pressure transmitters, switches, etc. connected to steam lines shall be remote mounted. Inline instruments, including analyzers, shall be removable from the line for servicing without requiring a unit shutdown. Sample tubing systems carrying high temperature samples shall be insulated in areas that require personnel protection. Personnel burn protection limit shall be at 140ºF sustained.

Where applicable, the instrumentation’s interface with the process shall be capable of being thermally insulated and heat traced to prevent freezing without damage or obstruction of instrument operation, readouts, or displays.

9. HEATED INSTRUMENT ENCLOSURES: Local instruments shall be installed in heated enclosures as required. Heated enclosures shall contain a maximum of two (2) field devices. Enclosures shall be O’Brien or Contractor-Engineer approved equal.

The enclosures shall give total protection of the instrumentation, leaving no parts of the instrumentation exposed to the weather. The enclosure shall be designed to protect the transmitter and any direct mounted manifold from freezing at the plant low ambient design temp and maximum wind speed. The enclosures shall be complete with all other appurtenances necessary for freeze protection at the conditions noted. Enclosures shall include an instrument mounting system and mounting brackets as required for a complete installation suitable for manifold mounting each transmitter. Mounting brackets will not be provided with supplied instruments. A longitudinal mounting rail design shall be used to allow adjustment of the instrument position.

Interior instrument supports shall be directly connected through the enclosure wall to the exterior support. Enclosures shall be the clamshell type with lid support and hinged at the top, rear. Enclosures shall be provided with a window for any local indicators clearly visible without opening enclosure lid. Sufficient room should be allowed for the instrument, the necessary heater element, thermostat, other required equipment, and space necessary to allow testing,


calibration, maintenance, and replacement of the instrument or accessories. The enclosure heater shall not be mounted to the instrument or its manifold. Drainage for the enclosure is to be provided in the event of a leak or spill. Each enclosure shall be provided with drain hole and plug to maintain the weather tightness. Each enclosure shall include a 2” pipe pedestal bracket and adequate hardware for the dual or single mounting of the enclosure on a 2 inch pipe stand. Enclosures shall have an outer fiberglass or ABS shell with integral urethane foam core to provide resistance from chemicals, water, and oil. Materials should be corrosion resistant, UV-protected, and suitable for outdoor installation. Latches and hinges shall be stainless steel. The number of latches should be sufficient for secure latching under the design conditions. A lid prop shall be provided to reliably hold open enclosures. The lid shall be required to be lifted to release the brace. The enclosures shall be installed and anchored in place so that they are level, plumb, and properly aligned in accordance with the above mounting requirements. 10. HEAT TRACING: Drawings shall indicate the equipment, piping, tubing, and instruments that may freeze, become viscous, or have undesirable condensation/precipitation/hydrate formation that will require heat tracing for freeze protection. Heat tracing shall be supplied and installed by the ContractorSeller.

Self-limiting heating cables are preferred for heat tracing instrument impulse lines where line temperatures permit their use. MI type cables shall only be used in service where self-limiting cable cannot be used. Electrical heat tracing applications shall utilize thermostatic control and system monitoring. Pre-traced and insulated tubing and tube bundles are preferred for tubing runs greater than 3 meters in length. Such tube bundles shall be O’Brien or Contractor-Engineer approved equal. 11. INSTRUMENT LOCATION: Instruments shall be located and oriented so that they are readable and accessible. Gauge faces shall not be obstructed by equipment, other devices, piping, conduit or supports.

END OF SECTION

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 S-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

SECTION S1 WIND, SEISMIC AND SNOW DESIGNSTRUCTURAL LOADING AND DESIGN 1. GENERAL: This Section specifies the general criteria and procedures, which shall be used to ensure that structures, systems, equipmentEquipment, components, and piping will meet their performance objectives for a wind or seismic eventthe project design criteria. Components shall be attached so that wind or seismic forces are ultimately transferred to the supporting structure. Friction due to gravity shall not be considered in evaluating the required resistance to seismic forces. Wind and Sseismic design shall be in accordance with the more stringent requirements of either the 2007 California Building Code2007 ed., or the 2006 International Building Code (IBC), along with the latest revision of the following references:

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”--13th ed., 2005 (ANSI/AISC 360), “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings Design Manual” Including Supplement 1, 2005 (ANSI/AISC 341). American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members,." 1996 American Concrete Institute Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318). American National Standards Institute (ANSI), /American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), "ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ASME B31.1, Power Piping." American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), “ASCE 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” ASCE 7.

Wind and seismic loadings need not be considered in combination. Load combinations shall be in accordance with the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) Section 1605, ASCE 7-05, Chapter 2, and the 2007 California Building Code (CBC), 2007edand ASCE 7-05. 2. WIND DESIGN: All buildings, equipmentEquipment, equipment enclosures, structures, and piping, and electrical cable trays/conduit shall be designed to resist the wind effects determined in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7-05 (Basic Wind Speed = 85* mph, Importance Factor = 1.15, Exposure C).shown below or the California Building Code (CBC), 2007 ed., if more stringent. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph* Importance Factor: 1.15 Exposure Category: C


*Nominal 3-second gust at 33 ft above ground for Exposure exposure C Category C. Effects of wind on stacks shall include along-wind and across-wind response. The design shall address the design considerations, meet the requirements, and utilize the design of Steel Stacks, ASME/ANSI STS-1-2006. Material design value shall be as prescribed by ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 2, Part AM. 3. SEISMIC DESIGN: 3.1 Piping Seismic Design: The piping systems shall be designed to withstand sustained loading, occasional loading, and thermal range loading. The total distributed operating weight of the piping system shall include, but not limited to, any insulation, fluids, and concentrated loads such as valves, etc. The support arrangement shall be such that the requirements of ASME B31.1 are met and that seismic deflections are maintained at less than three (3) inches. 3.2 Equipment and Structures Seismic Design: The total operating weight of a piece of equipment Equipment or structure shall include, but not limited to, fluids, insulation, valves, piping, trays, cables, etc. 3.2.1 All Equipment and Structures shall be designed to resist seismic loads in accordance with ASCE 7-05. Non-structural components shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 13; Non-Building Structures in accordance with Chapter 15. Mechanical and electrical component design shall be per ASCE 7-05, Section 13.6, provided that the weight of such components does not exceed 25% of the effective seismic weight of the structure, at which time the component shall be classified as a Non-Building Structure and shall be designed in accordance with Section 15.3.2. TheFor all Buildings, Structures, Non-building Structures, Equipment and Components the following criteria applyapplies:

• Site Class = D • Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters, Ss = 1.50g; S1 = 0.5152g • Spectral ResponseSite Coefficients, SDS Fa = 1.00g,; SD1 Fv = 0.52g1.5 • Occupancy Category D, Design Category III • Seismic Importance Factor, I = 1.25 • Site Class = D • Occupancy Category III • Seismic Design Category DComponent Importance Factor for nonstructural

components and for their supports and attachments, Ip, shall be as specified in Chapter 13, ASCE 7-05.

3.2.2 Dynamic Analysis: A dynamic analysis shall be performed where specified by code. The provisions of Section 17.6 of ASCE 7-05 shall be a guide for the dynamic analysis of seismically isolated structures. The ground motion producing lateral response and design seismic forces may be assumed to act non-concurrently in the direction of each principal axis of


the structure. Dynamic analysis per the Modal Response Spectrum Analysis (Section 12.6, 12.7, 12.9 ASCE 7-05) or Seismic Response History procedure (Chapter 16 ASCE 7-05) shall be performed for all structures required by California Building Code. 4. FROST & SNOW LOADS: All buildings, structures, Equipment and piping shall be designed to resist snow loads and frost depth requirements in accordance with the California Building Code (CBC), 2007 edASCE 7.

• Ground Snow Load zero psf 4.5. TANKS AND VESSELS: Tanks and vessels containing quantities of toxic or hazardous materials exceeding amounts specified in Chapter 3, California Building Code, shall, at a minimum, be designed to comply with the Occupancy Category IV of the ASCE 7-05, Chapter 1, Table 1-1.

5.6. DOCUMENTATION: Complete structural support and anchorage details shall be shown on all drawings, including the size of members, details of connections, anchor bolt sizes, dowels, etc. The drawings shall include the total load including dead, live, wind, seismic, thermal (operating), and construction loads, with respective load case, to be transmitted to the structure that must ultimately restrain the piping, equipment, or structure to the foundation or supports. The Seller shall furnish calculations sealed and signed by the responsible professional engineer registered in the State of IdahoCalifornia for the structural design of the equipment and attachments. The Seller furnished and shown foundation reaction design loads shall include all

vertical and lateral (horizontal) load values at the foundation interface plane and/or the bottom of any support structures furnished for dead, live, seismic, wind, snow and construction loads. Operating loads that do or do not act concurrently shall be so noted.

The Seller furnished and shown wind and seismic foundation reaction design loads shall include all

vertical and lateral (horizontal) load values at the foundation interface plane and/or the bottom of any support structures furnished for dead, live and wind loads or at the equipment center of gravity (c.g.) for seismic reaction loads.

A c.g. for each piece of equipment or equipment assembly/skid structure including all supplied structures, shall be dimensionally located and shown on each foundation interface and/or Equipment General Arrangement drawing submitted. The Seismic Loads furnished shall be assumed to act at these c.g. points unless otherwise noted. All foundation interface design loads shall be furnished in English units, i.e., pounds (lbs.), Kips (k), ft-kips (ft-k), inch-kips (in-k), etc. Seismic and wind foundation design loads shall also be furnished in a tabulated form based on a minimum of two (2) primary lateral (horizontal) directions at right angles using a three (3) dimensional axis system of x (horizontal direction at 90º to z direction), y (vertical direction), and z (horizontal direction at 90º to x direction).


The size, elevation and dimensional layout of each foundation anchorage bolt or rod and dowel shall be shown on the submitted foundation interface documents based on the hole sizes provided to anchor the equipment and/or structure to the foundation or to another structure. 7. DEAD AND LIVEDESIGN LOADS: The following loads and forces shall be considered in all structural designs: 7.1 Dead Loads (D): Dead load shall consist of the weight of all permanent construction including, but not limited to, fixed equipment, framing, piping, floors, walls, roofs, partitions, insulation, stairs, handrail, ductwork, siding, cable trays, and other structures. 7.2 Live Loads (L): Live load shall be considered as loading not permanently fixed to the structure and occurring over areas not occupied by equipment. No live load reduction shall be permitted in areas where laydown loads are considered. Floors and roofs of enclosures shall be designed to support the uniformly distributed live loads or the concentrated loads given in Table A and B below, whichever produces the greater effects. The concentrated load shall be located so as to produce maximum stress conditions in the structural member.

7.3 Operating Loads: Operating loads shall include the weight of equipment liquid contents and any movement loads associated with such thermal loads, test loads, normal and abnormal (upset) loads, maintenance loads, and erection loads.

7.4 Buoyancy Loads (if part of vendors design, e.g. manholes)

5.17.5 Lateral Soil/Water Loads (if part of vendors design, e.g. manholes)

Dead Loads (D): Dead load shall consist of the weight of all permanent construction including, but not limited to, fixed equipment, framing, piping, floors, walls, roofs, partitions, insulation, stairs, handrail, ductwork, siding, cable trays, and other structures. Live Loads (L): Live load shall be considered as loading not permanently fixed to the structure and occurring over areas not occupied by equipment.

No live load reduction shall be permitted in areas where laydown loads are considered.

Floors and roofs of enclosures shall be designed to support the uniformly distributed live loads or the concentrated loads given in Table A and B below, whichever produces the greater effects. The concentrated load shall be located so as to produce maximum stress conditions in the structural member.

TABLE A MINIMUM LIVE LOADS (PSF)

Location Load (psf) Ground Floor 250 psf (min) Storage Areas 150 psf Operating Areas 125 psf


Platforms and Walkways 100 psf Isolated Platform for Servicing Equipment 40 psf Stairs and Ramps 100 psf Roofs (Other than Those Routinely Accessed for Maintenance or Other Special Purposes)

20 psf

Handrails (for stairs, etc.) 50 plf and 200 lbs. @ top of rail applied in any direction

Notes:

1. Live load reductions shall be in accordance with the building code. 2. Concentrated load and distributed load on handrails need not be assumed to act

concurrently. 3. Design live loads shall be indicated on all structural floor and roof plans.

TABLE B CONCENTRATED LIVE LOADS (PSFLB) Location Loads (lbs)

Storage Areas 2,000 lbs (Note 1) Platforms and Walkways 2,000 lbs (Note 1) Isolated Platform for Servicing Equipment 300 lbs Roof 300 (concentrated over a 2 ½ sq. ft. area and

located to produce maximum stress in the member)lbs

Stair Treads 300 (concentrated over a 4 sq. in. area at center of tread)

Notes:

1. Beams and girders shall be designed for a concentrated load of 23,000 pounds in addition to all other loads. This load is not carried to columns.

2. Roof Loads: Roof live loads shall be in accordance with the requirements of IBC 2006 Section 1607.11 of the building code, or the California Building Code (CBC), 2007 ed., if more stringent.

3. Ordinary roofs, either flat, pitched or curved, shall be designed for the live loads in TABLE A or the snow load, whichever is greater.


Notes: 1. Loads are expressed in pounds per square foot of horizontal projection.

END OF SECTION

TABLE C MINIMUM ROOF LIVE LOADS1

Roof Slope Tributary load area in square feet2

0 to 200 201 to 600 Over 600

Flat, or rise less than 4 inches per foot (1:3)

Arch or dome with rise less than 1/8 of span 20 16 12

Rise 4 inches per foot (1:3) to less than 12 inches per foot (1:1)

Arch or dome with rise 1/8 of span or less than 3/8 of span

16 14 12

Rise 12 inches per foot (1:1) and greater

Arch or dome with rise 3/8 of span or greater

12 12 12

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 05125-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

SECTION 05125

STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL FABRICATION AND SUPPLY (By Equipment Vendors)

1. GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents 1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and technical specification sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary 1.2.1 This Section includes the fabrication of structural steel and miscellaneous steel including bar-grating, stair treads, safety gates, pipe handrail and painting to be furnished complete and delivered to site. 1.3 Performance Requirements 1.3.1 Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Agreement Documents to be selected or completed to withstand design loadings indicated. 1.3.2 Engineering Responsibility: Utilize a qualified professional engineer, licensed in California to prepare calculations, and other structural data for structural steel connections. 1.4 Submittals 1.4.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4.2 Shop Drawings: Detail drawings showing fabrication of structural steel components and erection drawings showing piece marks of each member and special erection instructions. 1.4.2.1 Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 1.4.2.2 Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 1.4.2.3 Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretension and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections, if required. 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.5.1 Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation.


1.5.2 Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

• Store fasteners in a protected place. • Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or

damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars:

W-Shapes – ASTM A 992 , Grade 50 (Fy = 50 Ksi and Fu = 65 Ksi) or multi-certification A36/AASTM A572, Grade 50 with special requirements per AISC Technical Bulletin No. 3, dated March 3, 1997. S-Shapes, M-Shapes, Channels, and Angles, Plates and Bars– - ASTM A 36 (Fy = 36 Ksi

and Fu = 58 Ksi)or ASTM A572, Grade 50. Plates and Bars –M-Shapes, ST-, S-Shapes and Channels – ASTM A 36 (Fy = 36 Ksi and Fu = 58 Ksi)or ASTM A572, Grade 50. HSS (Hollow Steel -Shapes) – ASTM A 500, Grade B (Fy = 46 Ksi and Fu = 58 Ksi) or ASTM A 500, Grade C. • Finish: Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4 for painting or coating requirements.

2.1.2 Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 2.1.3 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.

• Weight Class: Standard • Finish: Primed with inorganic zinc rich primer, except for handrails and items

indicated to be galvanized. 2.1.4 Welded Steel Grating: ASTM A 569 steel, W-19-4, 1¼ inch by 3/16 inch bearing bars at 1-3/16 inches o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches o.c. in accordance with the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). Grating shall be secured with saddle clip type anchors.

• Serrated.


• Galvanized.

2.1.5 Grating Stair Treads: ASTM A 569 steel, 1 ¼ inch x 3/16 inch bearing bars at 1-3/16 inch o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches o.c.

• Serrated. • Galvanized. • Cast abrasive nosing.

2.1.6 Safety Gates: Safety gates manufactured by FabEnCo, or approved equal, galvanized. 2.1.7 Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel, AWS D1.1, Type B. 2.1.8 Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows:

• Headed Bolts: ASTM A 449 • Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 • All Threaded Rods: ASTM A193, Grade B7 or ASTM A36. • Finish: Zinc-coated per ASTM A 153, class C. • Washers: ASTM F 436. • Finish: Zinc-coated per ASTM A 153 with 1.65 ounce coating. • Nuts: Heavy Hex per ASTM A 563 • Finish: Mechanically deposited Zzinc-coated coating, per ASTM A153 B696,

Class 50with 1.65 ounce coating. 2.1.9 High-Strength Connection Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, 3/4" or 1”diameter heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. Provide one size throughout structure.

• Finish: Plain, uncoated. 2.1.10 Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, (Galvanized for exterior locations).

• Finish: Plain, uncoated (interior locations), galvanized (exterior location).


2.1.11 Twist-off type Tension-Control Connection Bolts: ASTM F 1852, Type 1

• Finish: Plain, uncoated (interior locations), Galvanized (exterior locations). 2.1.12 Foreign Sources of Material 2.1.12.1 Foreign sources of material (e.g. EN and JIS standard material) shall be permitted, provided all quality requirements of those specifications are maintained. 2.1.12.2 Certified Material Test Reports (CMTR): CMTRs shall be provided for all Chinese components and materials. CMTRs shall be traceable to the originating manufacturer to ensure that the reports are valid. CMTRs shall be submitted for review and approval.

2.1.12.3 Positive Material Identification (PMI): Seller shall perform random PMI testing on 10% of the Chinese components and materials. Results shall be submitted for review and approval. Contractor may perform PMI’s on the material as well and any material found out of compliance shall be rejected and immediately replaced. Seller shall immediately perform PMI on 100% of the material from the lot or heat, replacing any material discovered to be out of compliance. Delivery dates will not be forgiven or relaxed due to non-compliant material.

2.1.12.4 Shop Inspections: If Chinese components are to be supplied, Seller shall pay for a minimum of three (3) shop inspections by the Contractor, and/or third party inspector. Seller will pay for or reimburse travel expenses, lodging and meals. Shop inspections shall be scheduled by the Contractor. Seller shall be notified no more than two (2) weeks prior to the actual visit. Seller shall accompany Contractor during inspections.

2.1.12.5 Quality Documentation: Seller shall make available all quality documentation during shop inspections.

2.1.12.6 Liquidated Damages: Seller shall be liable for late delivery liquidated damages if it is revealed during a shop inspection that Seller’s quality program is not being complied with in regards to Chinese materials. Delivery dates will not be forgiven or relaxed in order to bring shop fabrication back into compliance.

2.2 Paint 2.2.1 Paint: One coat, inorganic zinc rich primer (Carboline Carbozinc 11 HS or equal). 2.2.2 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair painting galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 Fabrication


3.1.1 Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. 3.1.2 Camber structural steel members where indicated. 3.1.3 Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until steel has been erected. 3.1.4 Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 3.1.5 Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel. 3.1.6 Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-painting operations. 3.1.7 Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. 3.1.8 Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. Preheat in accordance with code prior to thermal cutting (AWS or ASME). 3.1.9 Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing. 3.1.10 Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.1.11 Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on drawings.

• Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

3.1.12 Handrails: Handrails and posts shall be 1-1/2" STD ASTM A53 nominal steel pipe. Handrails shall be fabricated in accordance with NAAMM Pipe Railing Manual, unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. Provide two (2) horizontal rails including top rail at a height of 42 inches nominal from upper surface of rail to the floor, and the intermediate rail approximately halfway between the top rail and the floor, with a 4” kickplate. Posts shall be spaced at 6’-0” center-to-center maximum.

• All railing and post intersections shall be of the exposed welded type. Handrail posts shall be welded to the top rail, the rail being continuous. The intermediate and bottom rail shall be welded to the posts, the posts being continuous.


• After welding is completed, all weld metal shall be neatly ground off so the

railing and post intersections present a smooth continuous appearance. All corners of pipe railing shall be rounded.

• All handrails, posts, and kick plates (toe plates) shall be hot-dipped galvanized per

ASTM A 123. 3.1.13 Steel Bar Grating Stair Treads: Welded steel bar grating stair treads shall be as noted. 3.2 Shop Connections 3.2.1 Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 3.2.1.1 Bolts: ASTM A 325 high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2.2 Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and 2006 International Building Code (IBC) for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 3.3 Shop Painting (For all interior steel locations). 3.3.1 Shop prime steel surfaces using an approved high build epoxy primer for interior applications or inorganic zinc rich primer for exterior applications, except the following:

• Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

• Surfaces to be field welded. • Surfaces to be high strength bolted with slip critical connections. • Galvanized surfaces; such as platform grating, stair grating treads, handrails and

posts, toeplates, ladders and foundation anchor bolts/rods. 3.3.2 Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". 3.4 Galvanizing (For all exterior steel locations). 3.4.1 Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel indicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15110

SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION (SCR) SYSTEM 1. SCOPE The scope of Seller supply includes equipment, materials, and services for four (4) Selective Catalytic Reduction and CO Catalytic Reduction systems, referred to herein as SCR systems. This Section stipulates the major design and performance criteria for the SCR systems and their associated Equipment for the Marsh Landing Generating Station (MLGS). The MLGS is located near Antioch, California, in Contra Costa County. Each SCR system shall include, but not be limited to, the following items. The Seller shall be responsible for providing all equipment Equipment as required to provide a complete system as required to meet all guarantees. Interconnecting piping between the ammonia flow control skid and the ammonia distribution headerforwarding skid will be by othersOthers. Interconnecting piping between the ammonia vaporization flow control skid and the ammonia injection grid (AIG), including the distribution header and AIG piping, will be by Seller. Foundations and erection will be by othersOthers. Erection/startup supervision as well as training shall be offered as an optionincluded by Seller as outlined in the Special Conditions. Each SCR system shall include, but not be limited to, the following items. • SCR and CO Catalyst. • Catalyst housing and internal supports. • Support framing from the combustion turbine exhaust diffuser flange up through and

including the exhaust stack. • Exhaust stack. • Inlet and outlet transition ducts and all expansion joints required. • Turbine exhaust gas distribution device • Tempering air / purge air skid complete with accessories. • Interconnecting tempering air ductwork from fans to casing, including supports and

hardware. • Tempering air distribution within the SCR system casing. • Ammonia forwarding skid complete with accessories. • Ammonia flow control skid complete with accessories. • Ammonia injection grid and support structure. • Ammonia distribution header adjacent to the ammonia injection grid including flow control

dampers or butterfly valves, flow orifices, and manometers or differential pressureflow gauges. Header(s) shall be routed vertically up the side of the SCR with the flow control dampers or butterfly valves and associated instrumentation located as near as practical to their respective connection points to the SCR grid. Header(s) shall be equipped with expansion joints as required. Access shall be accordance with Appendix D.

• Silencing equipment for both the SCR system, including the tempering air fan system, ammonia flow control system, and stack necessary to meet near field and far field noise guarantees.


• Access platforms and ladders for SCR system and CEMS ports. • Seller supplied piping (AIG and diluted ammonia piping up to a single terminal point) shall

be shop fabricated to the maximum extent possible, i.e. 40-foot sections. • All instrumentation as required for a complete functioning system capable of fully remote

operation. • Test ports consisting of 2-1/2 inch pipe flanged connections for performance testing that

allow traverse testing before and after each layer of catalyst in a grid arrangement. • Provisions shall be made such that catalytic element sampling coupons or catalyst elements

can be readily accessible from access doors without disturbing other equipment and by the use of common tools.

• All piping, valves and components in contact with aqueous and vaporized ammonia shall be stainless steel.

2. DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Seller shall design the systems and equipment, including selecting materials of construction to provide a minimum 30-year operating life at all operating conditions specified. It is understood that Equipment provided will require routine maintenance, major overhauls, and possible replacement during the life of the facility. 2.1 Operating Conditions: The system SCR, accessories, and all Equipment furnished shall be capable of operation over the full range (0 to 100% load) of combustion turbine exhaust conditions and shall be suitable for withstanding the transient and steady state operating conditions for all gas combustion turbine operations including starting, loading, unloading and shutdown as well as abnormal conditions including emergency shutdown or sudden full load rejection. The normal operating range of the SCR will be from 60% to 100% of combustion turbine load. Reference the information included in Table EDR and Appendix A for combustion turbine exhaust conditions at various site ambient conditions and operating loads. The design of equipment shall incorporate appropriate measures for the thermal stresses and metal fatigue associated with the cyclic activity of a peaking power plant. The combustion turbines and exhaust systemsSCRs will be located outdoors and shall be designed for both continuous and cycling operation during any ambient conditions presented in these specifications. Each SCR system will receive and process exhaust gases from the make and model of combustion turbine shown in Table EDR. The combustion turbines will operate on natural gas fuel only. Each SCR shall operate utilizing the exhaust gases from a Siemens SGT6-PAC 5000F-D(4) combustion turbine. The Seller recognizes the combustion turbine model and acknowledges that the Seller is fully abreast and knowledgeable of the range of exhaust characteristics and velocity profiles and has accounted for these conditions in the Seller's offeringdesign. An SCR flow model study based on the combustion turbine mentioned above shall be provided by the Seller. See Appendix G for expected velocity profiles from the combustion turbine. All Siemens combustion turbine data presented within this specification is provided as information only.


The SCR shall be designed for a combustion turbine exhaust gas temperature of 1146°F continuous, with a maximum exhaust gas temperature of 1210°F. See table below for further details. The design continuous operation temperature of the NOx and CO catalyst shall not exceed 850°F. If the Seller wishes to provide a catalyst design temperature above 850°F, they shall provide an option price to do so. Regardless of the catalyst design temperature, the tempering air fan system shall be designed to reduce the CT exhaust flow to a minimum of 850°F. The catalysts and other equipment shall be capable of withstanding short term temperature spikes during tempering air fan failures. All material in the exhaust gas path, or otherwise subjected to exhaust temperatures, shall be acceptable designed for the design maximum exhaust gas temperature presented in Table EDRabove. Furthermore, the catalysts and other equipment shall be capable of withstanding the Not-to-Exceed Exhaust Gas Temperature with associated flow rate and the Not-to-Exceed Exhaust Gas Flow Rate with associated temperature, as presented in Table EDRthe table below, while maintaining the Guaranteed Maximum Emissions. Furthermore, the SCR units shall be in compliance with the Guaranteed Maximum Emissions within thirty twenty-five (2530) minutes after startup of the Combustion Turbines.

OPERATING CONDITION UNITS QAUANTITY Not-to-Exceed (NTE) Exhaust Gas Temperature °F 1210

Expected Exhaust Flow Rate @ NTE Temperature

lb/hr 3,358,900

Not-to-Exceed (NTE) Exhaust Gas Flow Rate lb/hr 4,800,000 Expected Exhaust Temperature @ NTE Flow Rate

°F 1055

2.2 The SCR system shall utilize 19% nominal aqueous ammonia. 2.2 Fuel: The combustion gas turbine will burn natural gas fuel. The gas analysis to be used for performance guarantees is listed below, with the added clarification below regarding sulfur content.

Fuel Composition: CH4 95.05% C2H6 2.643% C3H8 0.345% iC4H10 0.052% nC4H10 0.064% iC5H12 0.018% nC5H12 0.013% C6H14 0.059% CO2 0.664% N2 1.091%


Based on PG&E data, the maximum concentration of sulfur in the fuel gas is as follow:

Short term (up to 24 hours or daily) 1.0 gr/100 scf Long term (quarterly or annual average) 0.4 gr/100 scf

2.3 Guarantees: The SCR shall operate safely, reliably, and without undue maintenance or operator attention. The guarantees for emissions, pressure drop, and noise as well as auxiliary power (as corrected for ambient guarantee conditions) as stated in Appendix C shall be met in every day operation under all specified operating conditions. The Contractor will conduct tests per agreed upon procedures to determine all guarantees are met. 2.4 Functional Testing: All controls, instruments, dampers, control panels and auxiliaries shall be function tested prior to delivery. SCR test shall be conducted in accordance with Appendix C. 2.5 Code Requirements: The equipment Equipment shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the latest applicable requirements of the applicable codes and standards, except where modified or supplemented by these Specifications. The proper stamps shall be affixed to denote conformance to the appropriate codes, if applicable. All data reports and inspection certificates required by the codes shall be "Engineer-Owner" type documented on a master data report provided and distributed by the Seller. The Seller shall prepare a written statement of exception to any portion of the applicable codes and standards. The statement shall be submitted to Contractor for review and comment. The statement shall: 1) identify the applicable code or standard section; 2) describe what they cannot or will not do; and 3) describe what they will do in lieu of the code or standard requirement. Failure of the Seller to submit the written statement of exception to Contractor shall be understood to mean that the Seller is complying in all respects to the applicable codes and standards. 2.5.1 Foundation Load Chart: The Seller shall provide a foundation load chart that clearly shows the vertical and horizontal design loads acting at each load point. The magnitude, direction and location of the design loads shall correspond to each load condition. Load conditions for seismic, thermal, snow and wind shall be given for both the negative and positive coordinate directions. The coordinate axes shall be relative to the equipment axes and occurrences of uplift shall be identified by the coordinate sign convention. 2.6 Construction: The design shall be based on factory-built modules with as many shop assembled components as possible. The design shall include provisions necessary to allow ease of construction, maintenance, and accessibility. The Seller shall provide a not-to-exceed quantity of casing field welding as outlined in the Special Conditions. All necessary hardware to assemble the SCR units, including piping, ductwork and tempering air systems shall be provided. All components, hardware and accessories shall be clearly identified with weatherproof labeling with the corresponding shop drawing and erection drawing details.


The Seller shall incorporate the following construction details to minimize the amount of time required to erect the SCR systems and equipment.

Factory installed permanent lifting lugs and guy wire lugs on all panels and duct assemblies. Lifting lugs shall not penetrate internal insulation. Internal lifting lugs and guy wire lugs shall be noted in the drawings to be removed in the field. Lifting lugs location shall be clearly identified in Seller’s drawings and shall be submitted for Contractor’s approval.

Liner panels shall be bolted in place to allow removal of the crane prior to welding. Seller shall notify the Contractor whether the bolts need to be removed after welding or if the threads are to be scored. In order to prevent rust issues, the bolts shall be black bolts.

Factory installed permanent stack erection trunnions or lifting lugs.

Shop modularize upper support steel sub assemblies as much as possible. Seller will not be back-charged for interferences with piping or other structural steel caused by Contractor's chosen installation sequence; however, Seller shall be ultimately responsible for interferences that result from design or manufacturing errors.

Field-assembled connections for platforms, includingthe stack platforms, and ladders shall be bolted connections, not field-welded connections.

Field-assembled connections for all other platforms and ladders shall be bolted connections.

Prefabricate upper elevation platforms in sections as large as possible to accommodate standard shipping means.

Erection drawings shall indicate that if lifting lugs, guy wire lugs, erection trunnions, etc. are located on the exterior of the casing or stack, they may be left in place after erection except where interference is caused with other permanent components.

Seller and Contractor shall mutually approve field weld profiles (moments) in a timeframe to support Seller’s engineering and delivery schedule. The field welds (moments) will be designed to be a full penetration weld in accordance with AWS standards.

Provide roof access holes to accommodate the use of sky climbers for construction, inspection and maintenance.

If backing bars are required for welds, the design needs to be such that the backing bars can stay in place after welding is completed.

2.5.22.6.1 Temporary and Shipping Steel: Design and install temporary/shipping steel for ease of removal in the field. All temporary/shipping steel bolting details shall be clearly shown on the Seller’s drawings. Temporary bolts used to secure temporary/shipping steel shall not be welded to their respective nuts. Nuts shall be secured to the bolts using lock washers, double nuts, "punching" the bolt


threads or by using a welded tab design as required so as to not damage the bolt threads and to allow the use of impact wrench/sockets for quick removal of nuts/bolts. Casing shall not be welded onto the truck bed. It shall be tied down with chains or bolted to the truck bed.

2.62.7 Pipe Welding: Field welding shall be minimized as much as practical. Contractor shall have the opportunity to review and revise field weld locations shown on Seller’s piping during the shop drawing review period. 2.72.8 Shop Coating: Large bore piping, and fittings and duct work which will not be insulated shall be delivered to the site shop blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP6 and primed with an inorganic zinc rich primer. Engineered components such as valves, pumps, silencers, etc. shall be delivered to the site finish painted in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard finish suitable for the site conditions. The external surfaces of the ducts, modules, stacks and skids shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP6 and primed with zinc rich primer at 2 to 4 mils DFT. Seller’s standard finish coating systems shall be submitted to Contractor for review and approval. 2.82.9 Access Platforms: Provide access as required in Appendix D. All AIG balancing valves shall be accessible by manliftpermanent platform or from grade. If manlift accessibility cannot be provided, alternate means shall be provided such as davit for sky climber, etc. Davit arm shall be accessible from an SCR catalyst housing platform.

2.92.10 The SCR NOx catalyst modules shall be designed and constructed to allow for the replacement of catalyst material through the use of a mobile crane. The mobile crane to be provided by othersOthers. The CO catalyst modules will shall be loaded by hand and shall not require a monorail or hoistthrough an access hatch from the roof in modular bundles. If modular bundles are not available for the CO catalyst, a manway must be provided at grade to provide a means for loading the CO catalyst modules by hand. 2.102.11 Shutdown/Maintenance Drain and Vents: Casing and stack drains shall be provided to drain any condensation from the exhaust gas. 3. NOx CATALYST The NOx catalyst shall be of the low dust type. The catalyst shall be designed to minimize pressure loss. The direction of gas flow through the catalyst shall be horizontal. The catalyst shall be either a homogenous extruded material or the catalyst surface shall be supported on a metallic or ceramic monolithic base material. The catalyst modules shall not be subject to de-lamination or permanent deformation of the catalyst or support material due to stresses induced by the seismic conditions, vibration, pressure and thermal conditions or combinations thereof. Seller shall provide a list of SCR catalyst poisons for information.


The volume of NOx catalyst supplied shall be designed to control ammonia slip to the values guaranteed without requiring cleaning, regeneration, or replacement during the performance guaranteewarranty period, except that vacuuming may be necessary to remove insulation or debris deposits on the catalyst face prior to placing the catalyst in service. The NOx catalyst shall be of modular design to facilitate installation and removal of the catalyst. The NOx catalyst modules shall be the maximum practical size to facilitate and minimize field maintenance. Any special tools required to facilitate the removal or installation of NOx catalyst modules shall be provided. Any special tools or handling fixtures for the proper handling or unloading of the catalyst modules from a truck or rail car shall be provided. 3.1 The NOx catalyst modules shall include sealing frame and frame steel to improve the ease of catalyst replacement and installation. The frame materials shall be compatible with the catalyst material. The sealing system shall be designed to limit exhaust gas leakage past each layer of catalyst. The sealing mechanism and materials shall provide a service life equal to or greater than the catalyst. SCR catalyst sealing system shall have tongue and groove seals. Blinding plates and simple pillow seals are not acceptable as the primary seal. unless specifically approved by the Buyer. 3.1 3.2 The SCR shall be designed to accept future additional layers of catalyst include a spare catalyst frame for installation of future NOx catalyst modules in series with the specified catalysts. The spare catalyst frame shall be sized for a volume of catalyst equal to the volume being provided (100% of required catalyst). Seller shall not include any additional pressure drop for the possible future catalyst addition. The SCR structural design and foundation loads shall assume that the future catalyst will be installed. 3.3 Design shall incorporate sufficient catalyst to treat the exhaust gas to meet emissions levels specified without requiring cleaning, rejuvenation or replacement for the guarantee period. 3.4 Seller shall supply testing penetrations consisting of 2-½ inch pipe flanged connections located in each side of the casing to permit performance testing of each row of catalyst cells in the system. The test ports shall have blind flanges. The design and configuration of the test ports shall allow traverse testing before and after each row of catalyst in a grid arrangement. No pPermanent access provisions are required to these test ports.

3.43.5 Seller shall supply two (2) test port connections, one (1) upstream and one (1) downstream of the SCR catalyst for removal of catalyst samples for evaluation. Seller to supply sampling procedures and recommendations. 4. TEMPERING/PURGE AIR SYSTEM Each SCR unit shall be provided with a dedicated tempering air system as described herein. A tempering air system shall ensure the catalyst operating temperatures are controllable within the range required for long life of the catalyst. The tempering air system shall inject ambient air to


reduce the combustion turbine exhaust temperature. Seller is responsible to engineer this system to provide effective mixing of the air with exhaust gas and to ensure that the cross sectional variations in flow, velocity, temperature and concentration of NOx, CO, VOC and ammonia do not cause emissions to exceed their guaranteed values. This The tempering air fan skid shall be furnished pre-assembled and pre-wired to the maximum extent practical. Both fans shall be located on the west side of the SCR module as to account for the CT rotor air cooler. As a minimum, the skid shall include the following equipment. • Two (2) 100% capacity tempering air fans. • Two (2) inlet air silencer/filters. • Interconnecting ductwork between the skid and the SCR casing. • Interconnecting ductwork supports and ductwork hardware. • Instrumentation and appurtenances. • Acoustical enclosures as required. • System to prevent hot gas backflow into a non-operating fan. • The Seller’s base proposal shall be based on a dDuctwork damper system to provide

tempering air flow control. • Seller shall provide an option, with breakout price, to include Variable Frequency Drive

(VFD) Motors (Motor starter by others) and remove ductwork damper system. The fans shall be sized based on Seller defined margins at Maximum Continuous Rating (MCR) to establish test block. MCR shall be based on clean or and new conditions. The maximum footprint of the tempering air fan system, including inlet and outlet ductwork, shall not exceed [LATER] square feet. As shown on the Plot Plan, located in Appendix B, the tempering air fan system will be within [LATER] feet for the combustion turbine rotor air cooler discharge, which has a flow rate of [LATER] scfm at a temperature of [LATER]°F. The tempering air equipment shall conform to NFPA Standard 85 and shall have Factory Mutual approved components and shall provide purge of the tempering air ductwork, SCR casing ductwork and stack within 10 minutes with a total of at least five (5) volume changes. Tempering air ductwork shall be of bolted type connections and be provided with lifting lugs to prevent having to basket or choke pieces to lift. Tempering air ductwork shall be delivered to the site shop blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP6 and primed with zinc primer. 5. AMMONIA INJECTION SYSTEM Each SCR unit shall be provided with an ammonia injection system as described herein. The ammonia vaporization injection system shall be designed to be capable of delivering an ammonia flow that results in a volumetric ammonia- to- NOx ratio of 1.5 at the highest exhaust flow and NOx level. The ammonia feed to the vaporizer chamber shall be strained to prevent clogging. The Each system shall include the items below. andThe ammonia flow control skids shall be provided pre-piped and pre-wired to the maximum extent possible.


• Two (2)One (1) 100% ammonia vaporizers with two (2) separate ammonia feed nozzles and with an atomizing nozzle or packed tower.

• Hot gas piping and dampers. • Two (2) 100% capacity dilution air blowers with single-speed motors. The dilution air

blowers shall be skid-mounted electric motor driven centrifugal fans. The capacity shall be sufficient to dilute the ammonia at the highest flow requirement so that the ammonia/air mixture is not flammable.

• Contractor’s supplied starters for the dilution air blower motors will be supplied with standard Class 20 overload relays. If the Class 20 relays are not sufficient for starting the blower motors (at any ambient temperature conditions with or without the combustion turbine in operation) due to the long motor acceleration time, the Seller will be responsible for providing the required starters for the dilution air blower motors

• Filter-silencer for each blower. • Check valve and manual damper type valve on the outlet of each blower. • Aqueous ammonia flow control valves. • All vaporized ammonia piping and support structures from the ammonia flow control unit

(AFCU) ammonia injection manifold to the ammonia injection grid (AIG), including the ammonia injection manifold.

• All flue gas piping and supports between the SCR and ammonia flow control skid. • Flow meters or flow orifices with transmitters for aqueous ammonia flow and dilution

gas flow. • Strainers, including differential pressure gauge, upstream of the ammonia flow control

valves. • Manual isolation valves. • Actuated shut-off valve(s) or solenoid valve(s) for the aqueous ammonia and atomizing

air (when applicable). • Local instrumentation. • Control equipment as required. • Electric junction box where all field wiring termination points will be located.

5.1 The minimum exit temperature of the vaporizer at any load condition is 300 °F. 5.2 The ammonia injection grid shall consist of multiple pipes with holes configured and spaced for uniform distribution of the ammonia/air mixture throughout the exhaust gas flow. The location of the ammonia injection grid shall be such that thorough mixing of the ammonia and NOx can be effected prior to passing through the SCR NOx catalyst. The ammonia injection grid shall be located upstream of the SCR NOx catalyst and shall be fabricated of stainless steel. 5.3 The interconnecting piping between the SCR unit and the ammonia flow control skid as well as the piping between the ammonia vaporization flow control skid and the ammonia injection system grid shall be designed for insulation by othersOthers. The vaporizer skid components shall be shop-insulated by the SELLER. Piping on the ammonia flow control skid shall also be designed for insulation by Others. Space shall be provided for insulation thicknesses as denoted in Appendix K.


5.4 The branches exiting the ammonia distribution header shall be equipped with valves and flow elements and indicators to allow balancing of the ammonia flow into the ductgrid. The SELLER shall define the control capability as part of the proposal. 5.5 The ammonia injection piping shall have pressure indication including differential pressure gauge for each header valve. 5.65.5 The Allammonia piping low points shall be supplied with have a condensate drain valves.

5.7 Ammonia Vaporizer. 5.7.1 The ammonia vaporizer shall thoroughly mix the ammonia and air so that the gas mixture is safe and non-flammable.

With the hot gas recirculation heaters, the ammonia vaporization chamber shall have a maximum inlet temperature of the heated dilution air of 800 ˚F.

6. AMMONIA FORWARDING SYSTEM The Seller shall furnish one (1) aqueous ammonia forwarding pump skid and the required instrumentation and controls to monitor and operate the pump skid for the transfer of aqueous ammonia to the four (4) AFCU units. The ammonia flow forwarding pump skid will be located outdoors and shall be provided pre-piped and pre-wired Piping shall be stainless steel. No zinc, copper or copper bearing alloys shall be used in any piping or equipment that is potentially exposed to ammonia. Seller provided piping and valves shall meet ASME B31.1 standards. Pump discharge piping shall be furnished with ball check valves. The Seller will work with Contractor to determine the required pressure at the suction and discharge terminal points based on interconnecting piping provided by Others. Seller shall provide NPSHR requirements via the pump datasheets to allow Contractor to confirm NPSHA is adequate. Operation of the ammonia supply system equipment shall allow either automatic or manual control. Automatic control shall be from the Contractor’s DCS. Control panels shall be mounted on the pump skid. All pump materials shall be stainless steel and chemically resistant to the pumped fluid and shall be acceptable to the Contractor. There shall be no leakage of pumped fluid from the pumps. Pumps and drives shall be designed to operate free of harmful vibration or excessive noise under the conditions specified herein. All required pipe supports for on-skid piping shall be provided by the Seller. The skids shall be provided with lifting lugs.


6.1 Ammonia Forwarding Pumps. Three (3) x 50% ammonia forwarding pumps, each sized to deliver the ammonia required for two (2) SCR units, shall be furnished on a baseplate with motors factory aligned and coupled. The ammonia forwarding skid shall have magnetic drive seal-less gear type pumps. 6.1.1 Prime Mover: All pumps shall be driven by a constant speed electric motor, and shall be direct coupled. Motor shall be as specified in Section E1. 6.2 Vents, Drains, and Isolation: The Seller shall provide suitable vent and drain connections. Pump skid isolation valves shall be located as close as possible to pump connections.

6.3 Nozzles: Pipe suction and discharge connections shall be ANSI Class 150 flanged. Nozzles shall be designed to accept piping loads at two times API-610 Eighth Edition allowables. Casings and Nozzles shall be designed to withstand a minimum of 1-1/2 times the pump shutoff pressure.

6.4 The skids shall have one (1) suction and one (1) discharge flange for Contractor’s connections. Provide one (1) recirculation (return) flange for Contractor’s connection. 6.5 Control System: A control system shall be furnished to control the supply equipment as required. The control cabinet shall be complete with all equipment furnished, mounted, interconnected, and tested in the factory. Each panel shall require only field connection to terminal blocks. Panel shall be NEMA 4X. 6.5.1 Construction: Panels shall be NEMA 4X enclosures and shall be constructed in accordance with Section E2. 6.6 Aqueous Ammonia Forwarding Pump Skid Instrumentation: All instrumentation shall have NEMA 4X rating. Instruments shall be furnished with interconnecting piping and isolation valves. The following instrumentation shall be provided:

• Skid pressure gauge at skid suction and discharge • Skid differential pressure gauge and switch across each pump suction y-strainer • Skid pump relief valve at each pump to recirculate discharge flow to the pump

recirculation line • Skid pressure switch • Skid self-regulated pressure control valve at the combined discharge of the pump skid • Skid temperature gauge at the skid discharge

6.7 Piping and Valving: Pump suction and discharge piping shall include socket welded fittings and valves. The suction piping to each supply pump shall consist of a Y-type strainer, an isolation valve, and flush connections with valves. The discharge piping from each supply pump shall consist of an isolation valve and a check valve. The supply pumps suction and discharge shall be headered together, so that the set has one pump suction connection and one discharge connection at the edge of the skid. The common suction


shall be provided with an isolation valve. A relief valve shall be provided on the discharge header with the discharge terminated at the edge of the skid. 6.8 Piping Materials: Piping and valve materials shall be 304L stainless steel. All piping shall be Schedule 80 with class 3000 socket weld fittings. 6.9 Forwarding Pump Skid Connections. The ammonia forwarding pump skid shall have the following flanged connections: 1) 3/4” Pump Discharge. The pump suction line and pressure relief valve discharge recirculation line will be routed by Seller.

6.10 Finish: The pump, coupling, driver and complete baseplate assembly shall be thoroughly cleaned, prepped, shop primed and finished painted with manufacturer’s standard finish. Application of paint coatings shall be in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations. Aluminum, galvanized steel and stainless steel surfaces shall not be painted. Other surfaces not receiving paint coatings such as bearing surfaces, internal piping and connection surfaces, shall be adequately protected by removable tape or other means. 5.7.2 For the electric air heater option, the seller shall provide two (2) x100% heater power panels. The maximum watt densities on electric air heaters shall be 30-w/sq.in.to minimize heater burnout. 6.7. CO CATALYST The Seller shall provide a platinum/palladium CO catalyst system to meet the air emission guarantees as stated in Appendix C for CO and VOCs. The CO catalyst shall be designed and located to meet the guarantees over the full range of operation from Peak Load to Minimum Load shown in Table EDR and Appendix A and the full range of design ambient temperature. The CO catalyst shall be of modular design to facilitate installation and removal of the catalyst. The catalyst modules shall be the maximum practical size to facilitate and minimize field maintenance. Any special tools required to facilitate the removal or installation of catalyst modules shall be provided. Any special tools or handling fixtures for the proper handling or unloading of the catalyst modules from a truck or rail car shall be provided. The design inlet CO and VOC concentration shall be equal to 100% of the combustion turbine exhaust CO and VOC levels as given in Appendix A. Provide access manways and catalyst loading openings in the casing sufficient to facilitate removal and installation of the catalyst modules without the need for cutting or welding of any casing components. 7.1 The SCR shall include a spare catalyst frame for installation of future CO catalyst modules in series with the specified catalysts. The spare catalyst frame shall be sized for a volume of catalyst equal to the volume being provided (100% of required catalyst). Seller shall not include any additional pressure drop for the possible future catalyst addition. The SCR structural design and foundation loads shall assume that the future catalyst will be installed.


7.8.Catalyst Warranty: All catalyst shall be designed to meet all emissions guarantees for a minimum of 20,000 hours of operation. Any failed module caused by defects in workmanship and materials shall be repaired or replaced at Contractor’s option. 8.9.CASING AND STACKS 9.1 The exhaust gas path shall be enclosed by the casing. The casing shall be furnished with a stainless steel liner from the SCR inlet up to and including the exhaust stack. The exhaust gas path shall be completely gas tight to prevent leakage and bypassing of hot gases within the casing, except that expansion bellows located at floor penetrations may be provided with a 3/16” maximum weep hole to allow draining of condensation from the bellows. Casing panels shall be fabricated with lifting lugs and guy wire lugs installed to minimize erection time. 8.19.2 The distance from the centerline of the stack to the combustion turbine outlet flange shall not exceed 97 feet. 8.29.3 The casing shall be designed to withstand the maximum combustion turbine exhaust pressure and flow rate. Unless otherwise specified the SCR outer casing, ductwork and stack shall be fabricated of A36 carbon steel plate at least 1/4" thick with stiffening for an internal design pressure of 20” w.c. in addition to wind loadings specified below. 8.39.4 All flow distribution equipment shall be provided by Seller. 8.49.5 The catalyst modules and frame shall be designed to allow for thermal expansion without damaging the catalyst. 8.59.6 Design shall allow the removal of NOx catalyst through top of housing by mobile crane. 8.69.7 Housing Casing structural support members, columns, and casing stiffener bars shall be external to the casing to prevent exposure to hot exhaust gases. 8.7 Internal insulation on the sides and top of the system housing shall be covered with a minimum of 14 gauge 409 stainless steel liner. Internal insulation on the floor of the housing shall be covered with a minimum of 12 gauge 409 stainless steel liner. The liner panels shall be overlapped in the direction of the flow. 8.89.8 Penetrations of the casing required for piping or other pressure parts shall be sealed to retain the pressure tight integrity of the casing. 8.99.9 Access manway doors shall be a minimum of 18” x 24” in size, and shall be internally insulated, hinged or davited and pressure tight, with bolted closure. Seller shall provide a grab bar for each casing manway door. Penetrations shall be installed on each side of the roof panel to accommodate the use of sky climbers for construction, inspection, and maintenance. The number and location of access doors shall be acceptable to Contractor. Three (3) extra gaskets shall be provided for each manway. The manway for access to the combustion turbine shall be per Appendix F.


9.10 Seller shall minimize the size of full penetration buttwelds on casing vertical joints. The welds shall be sized for structural integrity as required by Seller’s design.

8.109.11 If sound panels are to be attached to the casing, weldless connection types shall be utilized. Entire sound panel construction shall be bolted and shall not require any cutting of sound panels. Sound panels shall be designed to allow installation following any pipe or electrical in its area that may need to penetrate the panels. Sound panels shall not prevent drainage of concrete slabs. 9. DUCTS AND STACKS 9.19.12 Duct Sections: The Seller shall provide insulated and lined duct sections. Access manways and openings as required for replacement and/or maintenance of the SCRNOx and CO catalysts without the need for cutting or welding of any casing components shall be provided. 9.29.13 Transition Duct Arrangement: The expansion joint / transition duct from the combustion turbine (CT) outlet flange to the casing proper shall be provided by the Seller and shall have a transition angle as required to promote an even distribution of exhaust gas. The transition duct angle shall not exceed a 45º angle between floor and roof of transition. The square to rectangle transition shall be provided by Seller in accordance with Siemens requirements denoted in Appendix F. Seller shall design the inlet to mate with the CT outlet flange. 9.3 Materials: Seller’s standard. 9.49.14 Ductwork: The connection to the CT outlet shall be by an expansion joint provided by Seller. All ductwork, hardware, and gaskets required for the interconnection of the CT outlet, SCR, and the exhaust stack shall be furnished by the Seller. See Appendix F for specific requirements at the CT-SCR interface. Seller shall comply with all details, recommendations and requirements from the CT supplier for this interface. Distribution vanes or perforated plate shall be provided in the SCR inlet transition section to allow uniform flow distribution to the SCR. The flow distribution device shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. Ducts shall be rectangular and constructed of steel plate. Field joints shall be flanged and designed for bolting and seal welding. Angles or plates used to form flanges shall be joined to the ducts in the shop by continuous fillet welds. Templates shall be used for drilling bolt holes in flanges. Ducts shall be designed to prevent pulsations and noise generation. Each low point shall be furnished with drains. Casing drains for each low point shall be provided and shall be capped. All ductwork and transition sections shall be provided with an internal insulation and lagging system as specified below. SCR outlet transition ducts, EPA ports, stacks, and in general any area accessible to personnel shall be provided with an expanded mesh barrier or thermal


insulation from their bases to a height of at least eight (8) feet above grade or personnel platform, as required for personnel protection from temperatures exceeding 140oF. Ductwork shall be designed to withstand the maximum combustion turbine exhaust pressure, as measured at the combustion turbine exhaust connection, as indicated in Article 8.2. Ductwork shall be designed to withstand the maximum combustion turbine exhaust temperature, as measured at the combustion turbine exhaust connection, shown as “Maximum Exhaust Gas Temperature” in Table EDR. Turning vanesProper flow distribution and mixing of tempering air shall be the responsibility of the Seller and shall be provided in ductwork as required to minimize gas side pressure loss and optimize proper gas distribution. 9.59.15 Main Exhaust Stack: The Seller shall furnish an exhaust stack for each unit. The stack shall be 165 feet tall, measured from top of concrete, with a 31’-4” internal diameter between the liners (i.e., exhaust gas path). The stack casing shall be constructed of A36 carbon steel and be a minimum of ¼-inch thick. The stack shall be furnished complete with supporting steel, expansion joints, interconnecting ductwork, and hardware. The stack shall be self-supporting without guying. The concrete foundation and anchor bolts for the stack will be furnished by the Contractor. The Seller’s stack design for field welds shall be a full penetration weld and shall include a backing stripseal weld over a bolted type fit-up flange. The proposed field weld design shall be submitted and approved by Contractor. Seller shall examine exit gas temperature to determine the possibility of condensation. Any stack low point, which may collect condensation or water, shall be furnished with a P-trap drain with drain valve. 9.5.19.15.1 Exhaust Stack Design: The steel exhaust stacks and supports shall be capable of enduring specified normal and abnormal design operating conditions in combination with wind and seismic loads for the design life of the facility. Effects of wind shall include along-wind and across-wind response. The design shall address the design considerations, meet the requirements, and utilize the design methods of Steel Stacks, ASME/ANSI STS-1-2006, and AISC Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress Design, Ninth Edition. Corten is not acceptable. Design values for yield strength and moduli of elasticity of the stack material shall depend on the composition of the material and the maximum temperature of the metal at design operating conditions and shall be as prescribed by the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 2, Part AM. Seismic loads shall be in accordance with the specified Site Design ConditionsSection S. The stack shell plates shall be shipped in sections with the greatest degree of angle and length as allowed for by Seller’s shipping means. Seller shall indicate within their proposal the degree of angle and length that the stack sections will be shipped in. Lifting of the stack sections shall be done by means of removable lugs or eye bolts. Backing bars and/or guide rings that can remain installed after welding shall be used.


Design drawings of the stacks shall be submitted to Contractor for review prior to release for fabrication. The design drawings shall indicate the size, shape, and location of all structural members and elements; specific details of connections between the members and elements; the materials of construction including protective linings and coatings; and the forces and moments imposed by the stacks on the supports for each design load condition. Design calculations for the stacks shall be submitted to Contractor. 9.5.29.15.2 CEMS Ports: CEMS ports for the main stack shall be provided. Ports must be located a minimum of two (2) stack diameters downstream of the nearest flow disturbance, and one half (1/2) stack diameter upstream of the nearest flow disturbance, obstruction, or end of stack. Ports Stacks shall include have four (4) 6-inch diameter EPA sampling ports 6" inch diameter spaced 90 degrees apart in the same plane, two (2) 4 inch diameter CEMS ports, and two (2) 6 inch diameter spare monitoring ports spaced 180 degrees apart and 90 degrees from the CEMS ports. All ports shall be provided with ANSI Class 150 flanges with matching blind flanges, bolting hardware and gaskets. The flange bolt hole orientation shall be coordinated with Contractor’s CEMS vendor. Contractor will be allowed to change the size of the ports to a smaller size at no additional cost, if such change is requested prior to or during the Contractor’s review of the stack drawings. Ports for inlet CO, O2 and NOx measurements shall also be provided and located per manufacturer’s Seller’s recommendations, and be as far as possible upstream of the SCRNOXx catalyst and ammonia injection location. The port shall be a 4 inch diameter, ANSI Class 150 flanged connection, on each side of the casing with blind flange, gaskets and hardware. A caged ladder per OSHA or CALOSHA standards shall be provided for access to a five (5) feet foot wide minimum, 360o EPA platform. The CEMS and four (4) flanged EPA sample connections shall be accessible from this platform. Expanded metal mesh for personnel protection shall also be placed at the EPA ports to a height of eight (8) feet above the platform if stack exterior surface temperature exceeds 140 °F. A davit arm with a minimum capacity of 500 lbs. shall be provided to allow the attachment of a chain hoist at the EPA platform ring. 9.5.39.15.3 Stack Base Template: The Seller shall provide a two (2) carbon steel templates of the stack base plate, match marked, orientation marked, match drilled to the base plate for use in aligning and setting anchor bolts .with etchings at dead center, 3-, 6-, 9-, and 12-o’clock relative to the anchor arrangement. Baseplates to have dedicated shipping and will ship when ready, rather than waiting for full load. 9.69.16 Welding: A detailed procedure identifying the sequence and methods for field fit up and welding of each section shall be submitted for review to Contractor. This procedure shall address distortion control of continuously welded circular sections. 9.79.17 Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be provided for the interface between the SCR casing outlet and the main stack connection, and at all other locations as required to accommodate thermal expansion. Expansion joints shall be specifically designed for use in combustion turbine service.


Expansion joints shall be sized and designed by the expansion joint manufacturer to meet the conditions specified and the arrangement of the ductwork with respect to expansion, contraction, and offsets. The nonmetallic expansion joints shall be of gas tight construction except that expansion bellows located at floor penetrations may be provided with a 3/16” maximum weep hole to allow draining of condensation from the bellows. Nonmetallic expansion joints shall be of low noise design. The expansion joint belts shall be designed to withstand full system operating temperatures and pressures, including excursions. 9.7.19.17.1 Duct Connections: The Seller shall ensure that the expansion joints furnished are designed and fabricated such that the internal opening and bolt pattern lines up with the casing outlet and stack inlet flange connections. Gaskets shall be factory cut and shipped ready for installation. 9.7.29.17.2 Construction: The expansion joints shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Expansion joints shall be shipped to the Site fully assembled, where size permits, and ready for bolting to the mating flanges. The expansion joint between the casing outlet and the stack breech may require a fused joint to be completed in the field. 9.18 Hangers and Supports: All necessary piping hanger assemblies, miscellaneous hanger steel, saddles, and support steel for supporting all ducts shall be furnished. Hangers shall be designed for attachment to supporting framework using suitable welding brackets. Special attention shall be given to hangers around transition sections, openings, and access doors. Hanger assemblies shall be prefabricated in the Seller's shop to the greatest extent practical allowing for field adjustment during installation. Bulk supply of hanger components for field assembly is not acceptable. 9.89.19 Bearing Plates: All low friction (greased) bearing plates required for the accommodation of duct expansion shall be furnished as required by Seller’s design. 10. TRIM AND PIPING 10.1 General: This Article covers the design and construction requirements for piping, valves, and other miscellaneous trim Equipment for the SCR system. The Seller shall provide all supports required for the installation of all piping, valves, and piping accessories furnished by the Seller. Piping, valves, valve stations, and piping accessories furnished under these Specifications shall be supported from structural steel furnished as part of the SCR system. Valve stations shall be located on platforms or at grade to provide for adequate access.


Seismic bumpers, including all supports and restraints shall be provided by Seller where required. Design pressure of piping systems shall be a minimum of 25 psig above the maximum pressure anticipated during operation or 50 psig, whichever is greater. Where piping is directly or indirectly connected to the discharge of a pump, the maximum operating pressure shall be based on the maximum pump shutoff head at a specific gravity of 1.0. Design temperature of piping systems shall be a minimum of 10 deg. F above maximum temperatures anticipated during operation. All carbon steel piping shall include a corrosion allowance of 1/16” minimum. All stainless steel piping shall include a corrosion allowance of 1/32” minimum. Minimum pipe size shall be ½ inch, except for connections to equipment. Pipe sizes 1-1/4 inch, 3-1/2 inch, 5, 7 and 9 inch shall be not used except for connections to equipment. Trim piping protruding from any pressure vessel or module shall have a shop installed coupling, or nipple. For vertical piping 6 inches in diameter and larger, the Seller shall shop-weld insulation lugs spaced at 90° around the pipe at 10 foot intervals. The support lugs shall be the same material as the pipe and shall be designed for field installation of a 360° insulation support ring on top of the lugs. The insulation support rings will be furnished by and field welded to the lugs by Others. All large bore pipe risers will be cut to length and properly machined for field welding. No random ends shall be furnished except as agreed by Contractor. 10.2 Pipe Supports: Seller shall completely detail design and furnish all pipe supports for all pipe provided by Seller under this Contract. The support locations and loads shall be accurately noted on the drawings. Pipe supports shall be shop fabricated as much as possible without exceeding shipping limitations. Unistrut shall not be used for pipe supports. Small bore pipe support restraints shall be U-bolt type with lock nuts or Contractor approved equal as applicable. All provided pipe supports shall be designed to eliminate as much welding as possible. Support attachments to casing shall be bolted if possible. Seller shall palletize and clearly identify pipe supports by drawing number. See Article 9.17 for further information. 11. INSULATION 11.1 General: The SCR casing and ductwork shall be insulated in the shop to the maximum feasible extent. All surfaces, which will be inaccessible during erection, shall be shop insulated and lagged. Seller shall determine appropriate insulation thicknesses based on the requirements contained herein. 11.2 Internal Insulation: The inlet ductwork, inlet transition section, tempering air ductwork, and the entire casing and exhaust stack shall be internally insulated to minimize heat loss and to prevent the high combustion turbine exhaust temperatures from reaching the external surface. In


addition, the insulation system shall be designed to limit the exterior skin temperature to an average of 140 °deg F at all operating conditions with an ambient air temperature of 103 80 °deg F, an emissivity of 0.09, no incident solar heating, and 2 ft/sec3 mph wind speed air velocity, or as required by OSHA or CALOSHA, whichever is more stringent. The insulation shall be attached to the internal wall and protected by an internal liner. Liner studs and pins shall be stainless steel. Liners, liner studs, and pins shall be shop installed to the maximum extent possible. The internal liner shall be provided throughout the casing, inlet ductwork, and inlet transition section, and stack. The liner material and thickness shall be adequate for the design conditions. The liner shall be attached by standoff studs and washer, or other acceptable method that permits expansion of the liner relative to the ductwork. Washers shall be the same material as the Liner. The internal liner at the seams shall be overlapped in the direction of gas flow. Seller shall provide threaded liner pins at the field seams. Seller shall not be liable for any damage to the liner and pin caused by Contractor. The internal insulation shall be designed to withstand normal maintenance without incurring damage. Insulation and liner on upward facing horizontal and semi-horizontal surfaces shall be designed to carry a concentrated 250 pound personnel walking load without crushing insulation or permanently deforming the liner. The internal insulation shall be designed to withstand combustion turbine water-washing operations (offline and online). The insulating wall panels shall be of a lap joint design. Wall panels of the “butt-fit” design are not acceptable due to their poor fit-up characteristics. Outlet transition ducts and stack shall be provided with thermal insulation barriers or expanded metal where required for personnel protection. Internal insulation on the sides and top of the system casing shall be covered with a minimum of 14 gauge 409 stainless steel liner. Internal insulation on the floor of the casing shall be covered with a minimum of 12 gauge 409 stainless steel liner. 11.3 External Insulation: Seller shall provide all required thermal insulation specifications to Contractor for all external surfaces of piping or equipment. Insulation and lagging for Seller supplied equipment and piping shall be supplied and installed by Contractor. Seller shall identify insulation requirements on piping and equipment drawings. Seller shall identify all equipment access openings, inspection openings, removable heads, etc., which must be removed periodically for inspection and repairs. Seller shall provide all clearances required for thermal movement of supplied piping and equipment. Insulation for personnel protection shall be supplied on surfaces above 140°F within three (3) feet horizontal and seven (7) feet vertical of walkways, ladders and platforms. Seller shall provide metal personnel protection shields or other suitable personnel protection devices at each access platform and anywhere else on the system where temperatures exceed OSHA or CALOSHA limits. 11.3.1 Materials: All insulation materials shall be asbestos free and non-corrosive.


11.3.2 Equipment Insulation: Seller shall provide removable insulation blankets for SCR Dilution Air Blowers, SCR tempering air fans and any other auxiliary equipment as required to limit cold face temperatures to 140°F with an ambient air temperature of 80°F and a 3 mph wind speed. The removable insulation blankets shall be sewn to fit the shapes of the individual components and shall be designed to be securely laced in place. Removable jackets may utilize hog ring sewing. The insulation core shall be in compliance with ASTM C553 for temperatures up to 850°F and ASTM C1086 for temperatures from 850°F to 1200°F. Lacing hooks and lacing wire shall be 304SS material. The outer surface of the blankets shall consist of waterproof silicon rubber impregnated glass fiber fabric, shall be gray in color, and suitable for outdoor service. The blankets shall be easily removed and reinstalled without damage to the blanket. Blankets shall be installed in accordance with the blanket manufacturer’s recommendations. The blankets shall also be tagged with a permanent stainless steel tag (2.5” x 0.75”) with ½” lettering and the unique equipment number identifier stamped on the tag. 12. STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL 12.1 General: Design and construction requirements for casing, ductwork, SCR system, and platform support steel, grating, guardrails and handrail, shall be as noted hereinin accordance with Section 05125. Scope of supply for structural and miscellaneous steel shall be as specified herein. Normal maintenance and operation of the SCRs shall be provided by a system of walkways, platforms, ladders, and stairs, all provided by the Seller. Platforms shall be a minimum of three (3) feet wide unless otherwise noted, with a minimum overhead clearance of seven (7) feet. Handrails, platforms, and stair tower shall have bolted connections and shop fabricated to the greatest extent possible via standard truck or railcar shipment. Speed rail and field welding are not allowed. Ladders, handrails, handrail posts, toe plates, platform grating, and stair treads will be constructed of galvanized steel. Platforms, stairs, ladders, and handrails shall be fabricated as specified in Article 2.56 above and shall attach to the stack or casing as specified in Article 2.56 above. Seller will not be back-charged for interferences that result from an accumulation of field tolerances provided that the components are manufactured to applicable code tolerances. Seller shall be ultimately responsible for interferences that result from design or manufacturing errors. Provide structural and miscellaneous steel required to frame and support all component parts and equipment. Provide structural steel supports for flues, ductwork, transitions, casing and stack as required. Seller shall install all grating penetrations for large bore pipe and structural steel. Grating penetrations shall meet OSHA or CALOSHA requirements. Seller will not be back-charged for interferences that result from an accumulation of field tolerances provided that the components are manufactured to applicable code tolerances. Seller shall be ultimately responsible for interferences that result from design or manufacturing errors.


Contractor shall supply and install electrical cable tray on the right side (West side) of the casing as required to support Seller-supplied equipment located at or near the top of the casing. Seller and Contractor shall mutually agree to the location of the electrical cable trays such that the cable tray supports will be connected to and supported from the casing structure. Seller shall allocate a space 24’-0” wide x 34’-0” long from the top of concrete to the top of the casing for Contractor-supplied cable tray. 12.2 Welding: Welding of structural and miscellaneous steel shall be in accordance with all applicable codes and Seller’s standard practice. Seller shall submit structural welding details if required by Section 05125. SCR and CO Catalyst systems such that stack emissions remain in compliance with the limits set forth in Appendix C throughout the firing range given by Table EDR and Appendix A. 13. ELECTRICAL 13.1 General: Three phase power wiring will be by others and terminated by others at the motor junction box. Seller shall furnish cable tray where cable routing to the motor crosses Seller supplied equipment.Motor electrical connections shall terminate at the motor conduit box. Other All electric wiring shall be installed in rigid galvanized conduit or liquid-tight where required, and shall be suitable for environmental conditions specified. Wiring assembly shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements for area classification noted. All instrumentation or control devices provided as part of a pre-manufactured skid assembly shall be wired to a common NEMA 4 junction boxes located on the skid. Each device shall terminate on a numbered terminal block. Junction boxes shall be uniquely identified and shall be located on general arrangement plans. Terminals and wiring shall be indicated in the Seller's wiring diagrams and schematics. All electrical instruments and components supplied shall be UL listed. 14. INSTRUMENTATION 14.1 General: 14.2 The Seller shall include all primary elements, sensors, transmitters, actuators and valves required for system control, sequencing, protection and monitoring. 14.3 Instrument List: Seller shall furnish a comprehensive instrument list that contains the instrument tag number, manufacturer, model number, calibration range, installation detail reference, and design conditions, and tap locations (X,Y,Z) as a minimum submittal. Seller shall furnish the instrument list in Microsoft Excel® format upon Contractor’s request.


14.4 Electronic Instrument Tap Location Plan: An electronic list identifying the instrument tap location plan (X, Y and Z coordinates with <0,0,0> to be defined later) for all instrumentation furnished by the Seller shall be provided. 14.5 Instruments: The following instruments shall be provided, as a minimum, for connection to the Plant DCS, or local indication as indicated. It shall be the Seller’s responsibility to ensure the type and quantity of instruments provided meets code requirements.

a. Exhaust (downstream of tempering air injection into SCR ductwork) temperature transmitters with wells (four (4) minimum per unit)

a.b. Exhaust (upstream of tempering air injection into SCR ductwork) temperature transmitters with wells (four (4) minimum per unit)

b.c. SCR inlet gas absolute pressure transimitters (two (2) minimum) c.d. Differential pressure transmitter - CO catalyst e. Differential pressure transmitter - NOx catalyst d.f. Inlet temperature transmitter – NOx catalyst e. Differential pressure transmitter – Total, SCR Inlet to Stack outlet g. Tempering air duct temperature indicator f.h. Tempering air duct pressure transmitter g.i. Tempering air duct damper position indicator h.j. Ammonia filter differential pressure indicator i.k. Ammonia inlet pressure switchtransmitter j.l. Ammonia flow transmitter k. Ammonia heater temperature transmitter l. Ammonia mixer temperature transmitter m. Ammonia-air injection temperature transmitter n. Dilution air flow indicator o. Dilution air pressure switchtransmitter o.p. Dilution air flow transmitter q. Dilution air temperature indicator r. Dilution air temperature transmitter p.s. Ammonia injection flow indicator (one per injection header)

14.5.1 Temperature Measurement: All necessary connections for installation of temperature measuring devices shall be furnished as required. All thermocouples shall be ISA Type K and RTDs shall be 100 ohm platinum with a 0.385 alpha. 14.5.2 Thermocouples: A system of permanently installed thermocouples shall be provided for monitoring critical metal temperatures throughout the SCR. Thermocouples shall be ungrounded and shall be Type K, stainless steel sheathed, and spring loaded. Thermocouples shall have weatherproof heads, with terminal blocks extending beyond the casing. For tube skin thermocouples, Seller shall supply sufficient wiring to allow termination of the thermocouples exterior to the casing. Thermocouples shall be furnished as specified in this section and as specified in Section M2.


14.5.3 Local Thermometers: Local indicating thermometers supplied with auxiliary Equipment shall be bimetallic type with 5 inch dials minimum. Local thermometers shall have adjustable angle dials. For high temperatures, or for remote mounting, thermometers shall be minimum 5 inch dial gas actuated thermometers. Thermowells shall be furnished for all thermometers and shall be as specified in this Section and as specified in Section M2. 14.6 Permissive, Status and Alarms: The following instruments shall be provided, as a minimum, for connection to the Plant DCS, or local indication as indicated.

a. CTG trip request b. CTG start interlock c. SCR purge in progress (status) d. SCR common alarm e. Dilution air fan status f. Ammonia flow shut off valve position indicator g.a. Ammonia flow control valve position indicator

14.714.6 Skid mounted instruments shall be furnished and installed as specified herein and in Section M2, including instrument valves, tubing, and enclosures as required. Instruments to be installed by Contractor shall be furnished loose. Pressure and differential pressure transmitters shall be furnished with manifolds and mounting brackets. Instrument root valves tapped off the primary piping shall be provided by the Seller. Tubing, fittings, blowdown valves and heated instrument enclosures for ship-loose instruments will be furnished by Contractor. HART compatible transmitters shall be configured with a software tag compatible with the Contractor’s asset management system. 14.7 Calibration: All instrumentation shall be provided with a factory calibration. Certificates of calibration shall be submitted to Contractor for each instrument.

14.8 Freeze Protection: All instrumentation provided shall be capable of being freeze protected without being relocated or manifolded together. After Contractor review of the SCR instrumentation design, a list of instruments and corresponding manifolds will be issued to the Seller for shipment to a winterization enclosure factory at the Seller’s expense. Freeze protection of the instruments and manifolds on this list will not be in the scope of this contract. The address of the winterization enclosure vendor will be provided at a later date. The assembled instruments and enclosures will be delivered to the job site at the Contractor’s expense for final installation. 15. CONTROL LOGIC The Seller shall provide control logic that will safely operate the SCR through all plant operating conditions. This control logic will seamlessly integrate: tempering/purge air, ammonia vaporization/injection system, and system sequencing logic.


15.1 The SCR will be controlled from the plant Distributed Control System (DCS) furnished by the Contractora stand-alone PLC, provided by the Seller at each unit. The Seller shall provide documentation indicating the recommended methods for control and the system components. The documentation shall include all alarms, set points, trips, and interlocks and directions for automatic sequencing of ramp rates required to achieve the life expectancy requirements identified in other sections of the contractthese specifications. 15.2 Seller shall incorporate the following external inputs into the SCR control system as a minimum:

• SCR start-stop • Purge required • CEMS not in service • Stack NOx corrected to 15% O2 • CTG fuel flow • Inlet NOx

15.3 Logic Diagrams: The documentation described above shall be furnished in the form of digital logic diagrams and analog SAMA diagrams. Both digital and analog logic diagrams shall be submitted for review. The logic diagrams shall be designed to provide automated startup, operation and shutdown of the SCR system. The digital and analog logic diagrams submitted shall be of a sufficient level of detail to provide programming instructions to the Plant DCS vendor for programming. All costs associated with supporting DCS factory acceptance testing at the DCS vendor’s facility of the Seller furnished logic shall be included in the contract price. 15.4 Control Narrative: In addition to the digital and analog logic diagrams described above, the Seller shall furnish a written description of the digital and analog logic diagrams. The written description shall be of a sufficient level of detail to allow the reader to understand the control philosophy of each controlled component. END OF SECTION

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 15600.5-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

SECTION 15600.5 PIPE WELDING 1. SCOPE: The scope of work governed by this section shall include all welding of steel piping performed by this Seller, unless directed otherwise in the technical section of the specifications. 2. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS: In addition to the codes and standards listed in the General Requirements, the following documents shall govern welding performed by Seller:

ASME B31.1 ASME I ASME V ASME VIII Parts I and II ASME IX - Latest edition and addenda AWS D1.1

2.1 Qualification of Welders and Welding Procedures: Prior to starting work, the Seller shall establish the procedures for welding that are to be used in this work. Procedures shall meet the requirements of this specification and are subject to the review and approval of the Contractor. Welding procedures, including results of procedure qualification, shall be submitted to the Contractor through the Seller for approval before the work is started. Individual welder qualification records results shall be maintained in accordance with Section GR-D. 2.2 Welding Procedures: The welding shall be done by the manual shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process, the automatic submerged arc welding (SAW) process, the manual gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) process, the gas metal arc welding (GMAW) process (Non short-circuiting mode), or the flux cored arc welding (FCAW) process. The Seller shall clearly describe the welding processes to be used in his welding procedures and submit this information for approval. Welding shall be accomplished with the addition of filler metal, except for minor attachments such as insulating pins or finned tubes. 3. PERFORMANCE OF WELDING: Welding shall not be performed on materials whose temperature is below 50oF. Interpass temperatures for welding of stainless steel shall not exceed 350oF, and shall be monitored locally via temperature indicating crayons or sticks. All welded joints shall be heat treated as required by the Power Piping Code ASME B31.1, ASME I, or ASME VIII as applicable. Pre-weld heat treatment shall be performed using local induction or resistant heating methods as allowed by ASME B31.1, ASME Section I or ASME Section VIII as applicable. Small or thin sections, with the exception of tube to header welding, may be accomplished by means of localized heating through the use of rosebuds, weedburners, etc. Tube to header welding must use electric resistance or induction methods. Additionally, base materials with a nominal specified chromium content greater than 2.25% shall be pre-heated per the requirements of


Section 15600.6. If gas heating methods are utilized, provisions shall be put in place to ensure that adequate “through thickness” heating has occurred in the base materials prior to weld initiation. Post weld heat treatment shall be by the use of full furnace heat treatment when practical. Alternatively, local induction or resistance heating may be used. Preheat and post-heat treatment for welds which attach plates, lugs, insulation saddles and clips to the pipe are required if the pipe material requires heat treatment by the Code, and shall be welded to the piping prior to furnace heating. Automatic temperature control and chart recorders shall be used in post heat treatment of welds. Records of heat treatment shall be maintained by the Seller in accordance with Section GR-D. 3.1 Backing Rings: Backing rings shall not be used. 3.2 Consumable Inserts: The use of consumable inserts is optional. Rectangular or type EB inserts may be used. 3.3 Inert Gas Purge: Purging of the backside of pipe with inert gas shall be required when welding stainless and nickel alloy steels and nonferrous materials. The use of Solarflux in lieu of an inert gas purge is prohibited. 3.4 Attachments for Temperature Recording: Temperature elements for recording pre-heat and post-weld heat treatment temperatures shall not be attached to piping by brazing. 3.5 Welding to Vessels: When welding nozzle connection on vessels, pumps and valves to piping, the Seller shall review vendor instructions, drawings, nameplate data, and marking in order to determine material identification of nozzle connection. The P-number of the connecting materials as referenced in ASME IX shall be determined, and an approved welding procedure for that P-numbered joint shall be used. If the P-number of a component cannot be determined, it shall be referred to the Contractor for resolution. Care shall be exercised to ensure any coatings or linings are not damaged by the welding process. 3.6 Welding of Valves: When welding valves to piping, the valve Manufacturer’s welding preparation recommendations shall be followed. 3.7 Method of Fit-up: The Seller shall furnish all tools, jigs and measuring devices required for obtaining proper weld joint alignment. The use of cold springing to align pipe spools for welding is prohibited. Supplemental heating shall not be used without the prior approval of the Contractor. The use of aligning devices welded to the pipe assembly should be minimized. Mechanical-type friction assembly should be utilized wherever possible. When weld-type devices are used, the material of the welded attachments shall be of the same P-number as the pipe. 3.8 Temporary Attachments: Temporary attachments are items, such as alignment lugs, braces and safety devices, required to facilitate the fabrication or erection effort. All non-design temporary attachments shall be removed. Welded temporary attachments shall be removed


approximately 1/16 inch from the permanent plant member by grinding, chipping, arc gouging, or oxygen cutting. Thermal cutting methods shall utilize the same pre-heat requirements for welding. Final grinding shall be used to restore the surface. Removal of temporary attachments shall not result in piping that encroaches on minimum wall thickness. Inspections of removal areas shall be in accordance with methods and acceptance criteria of the code governing the attached surface. 3.9 Butt Weld End Preparation: Butt weld end preparation shall be made in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1, Chapter V and ANSI B16.25 (most current edition(s)) or any other end preparation that meets the procedure qualifications. Butt-welding end connections shall be prepared in accordance with the following (except to match connecting components):

Piping with a nominal wall thickness greater than 1”, use “J” Bevel end preparation in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.25, Figure 6 Type B. Piping with a nominal wall thickness greater than 7/8” to 1”, use “J” Bevel end preparation in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.25, Figure 5 Type B. Piping with a nominal wall thickness 3/8” to 7/8”, use “V” Bevel end preparation in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.25, Figure 2C. Piping with a nominal wall thickness less than 3/8”, use “V” Bevel end preparation in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.25, Figure 2A. Note: Backing rings shall not be used, but dimensions shall match details.

3.103.9 Special Requirements for ASTM A335 P91 and P22 Piping: Joint configuration for pipe welds shall be open butt type. The root pass shall be performed using gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW). The balance of the weld may be made using any of the processes specified in Paragraph 2.2, Welding Procedures when supported by a qualified procedure. 3.11 Special Requirements for ASTM A106: Carbon steel piping to be GTAW root pass includes LP Steam Piping from the Strainer to the LP turbine, from the HP turbine outlet (CRH system) to the steam blow interface, and the Boiler Feed discharge piping. The balance of the weld may be made using any of the processes specified in Paragraph 2.2, Welding Procedures when supported by a qualified procedure. 4. NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION: All welds performed shall be subject to non-destructive examination (NDE) as required by the applicable code. Acceptance standards shall be in accordance with the required examination method. Rejectable welds must be repaired or reworked and reexamined per the original NDE method. Records of non-destructive examination shall be maintained per the applicable Code and as specified in Section GR-D. RadiographsWelder qualifications, inspector qualifications, radiographs and all NDE reports are subject to review and acceptance by the Contractor.


4.1 Ultrasonic Examination: Phased Array ultrasonic inspection is preferred in lieu of Radiography for butt welds on pipe NPS 4 and larger with thickness’s greater than 0.5”. Reports will be submitted in writing along with a digital copy, in pdf format, on CD / DVD. Report should include all relevant data required to repeat the examination in addition to the examination results. Examination shall be made in accordance with the requirements specified in the latest revision of ASME B31.1 and/or ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Article 5 of Section V, Nondestructive Examination. Interpretation shall be performed by an ultrasonic inspector qualified at Level 2 or higher in accordance with SNT-TC-1A. 4.2 Radiography: Digital Radiography is preferred with exposures stored on CD / DVD, and a copy of the viewing program included on the disk along with exposure records for each shift of work. All radiographic examination shall be done in accordance with the latest revision of ASME B31.1, ASTM E-94 and/or ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, Article 2. An accepted method of weld identification and film location markers shall be used. At least two location markers shall be on the film and visible on each radiograph to identify the area being examined. Image quality indicators of the required material and size/thickness shall be used. Required sensitivity shall be verifiable. In addition to the film, a radiograph exposure record shall be kept for each weld radiographed showing the date, location, area, angulation, film type, source to film distance and other pertinent information. Interpretation shall be performed by a radiographic inspector qualified at Level 2 or higher in accordance with SNT-TC-1A. 4.3 Surface Examinations: Whenever required, liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with the methods of Article 6, Section V, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Alternatively, ferro-magnetic material and weldments may be examined using magnetic particle testing in accordance with ASME Section V, Article 7. Interpretation shall be performed by an inspector qualified at Level 2 or higher in accordance with SNT-TC-1A. 4.4 Visual examinations: Visual examination shall be performed on all completed welds to verify compliance with the requirements of paragraph 136.4.2 of ASME B31.1

END OF SECTION

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix A-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX A

COMBUSTION TURBINE EXHAUST CONDITIONS

[This appendix has been updated since the last revision]

Mirant - Marsh Landing Estimated SGT6-5000F(4) Gas Turbine Performance Simple Cycle / Ultra Low NOx Combustor SGen6-1000A (Static) / 1.00 Power Factor

US1033-0

SITE CONDITIONS: CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 3 CASE 4 CASE 5 CASE 6 CASE 7 CASE 8FUEL TYPE Natuaral Gas Natuaral Gas Natuaral Gas Natuaral Gas Natuaral Gas Natuaral Gas Natuaral Gas Natuaral GasLOAD LEVEL BASE 60% BASE 60% BASE 60% BASE 60%NET FUEL HEATING VALUE, Btu/lbm (LHV) 20,669 20,669 20,669 20,669 20,669 20,669 20,669 20,669GROSS FUEL HEATING VALUE, Btu/lbm (HHV) 22,929 22,929 22,929 22,929 22,929 22,929 22,929 22,929

AMBIENT DRY BULB TEMPERATURE, °F 59.0 59.0 103.9 103.9 20.0 20.0 111.0 111.0AMBIENT WET BULB TEMPERATURE, °F 51.5 51.5 77.6 77.6 18.0 18.0 82.7 82.7AMBIENT RELATIVE HUMIDITY, % 60 60 31 31 70 70 31 31AMBIENT PRESSURE, psia 14.691 14.691 14.691 14.691 14.691 14.691 14.691 14.691COMPRESSOR INLET TEMPERATURE, °F 59.0 59.0 103.9 103.9 20.0 20.0 111.0 111.0EVAPORATIVE COOLER STATUS / EFFECTIVENESS, % OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

INLET PRESSURE LOSS, in. H2O (Total) 4.1 2.4 3.5 2.3 4.5 2.4 3.4 2.3EXHAUST PRESSURE LOSS, in. H2O (Total) 11.4 6.6 9.3 5.8 13.1 7.1 9.0 5.7EXHAUST PRESSURE LOSS, in. H2O (Static) 9.0 5.2 7.4 4.6 10.4 5.6 7.1 4.5INJECTION FLUID --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---INJECTION RATIO --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

GAS TURBINE PERFORMANCE: GROSS POWER OUTPUT, kW 199,670 119,801 166,027 99,614 225,020 135,011 160,400 96,239GROSS EFFICIENCY, % (LHV) 37.58 31.45 35.73 29.43 38.45 32.71 35.32 29.04GROSS HEAT RATE, Btu/kWh (LHV) 9,078 10,849 9,549 11,594 8,874 10,431 9,661 11,751GROSS HEAT RATE, Btu/kWh (HHV) 10,071 12,036 10,594 12,862 9,844 11,572 10,718 13,036FUEL FLOW, lbm/hr 87,699 62,884 76,707 55,878 96,607 68,136 74,977 54,716INJECTION RATE, lbm/hr --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---HEAT INPUT, MMBtu/hr (LHV) 1,813 1,300 1,585 1,155 1,997 1,408 1,550 1,131HEAT INPUT, MMBtu/hr (HHV) 2,011 1,442 1,759 1,281 2,215 1,562 1,719 1,255EXHAUST TEMPERATURE, °F 1,093 1,138 1,136 1,144 1,067 1,133 1,146 1,145EXHAUST FLOW, lbm/hr 4,000,983 3,073,764 3,550,262 2,889,003 4,345,339 3,210,721 3,468,323 2,853,981EXHAUST FLOW, MACFM 2.66 2.10 2.44 1.99 2.84 2.18 2.40 1.97

EXHAUST GAS COMPOSITION (% BY VOLUME):OXYGEN 12.53 13.46 12.43 13.65 12.55 13.28 12.34 13.62CARBON DIOXIDE 3.81 3.38 3.74 3.18 3.87 3.53 3.73 3.14WATER 8.33 7.50 9.38 8.30 7.71 7.05 9.87 8.74NITROGEN 74.46 74.79 73.58 74.00 74.99 75.25 73.20 73.63ARGON 0.87 0.88 0.86 0.87 0.88 0.88 0.86 0.86

MOLECULAR WEIGHT 28.39 28.45 28.27 28.34 28.47 28.51 28.22 28.29

NET EMISSIONS (Based on SIEMENS DG21T-005620 test methods):NOx, ppmvd @ 15% O2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9NOx, lbm/hr as NO2 68 46 59 41 74 50 58 40CO, ppmvd @ 15% O2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4CO, lbm/hr 18 12 16 11 20 14 16 11

VOC, ppmvd @ 15% O2 1.0 3.0 1.0 3.0 1.0 3.0 1.0 3.0VOC, lbm/hr as CH4 2.6 5.3 2.3 4.7 2.9 5.8 2.2 4.6

PARTICULATES, lbm/hr 8 8 8 8 9 8 8 8

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix B-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX B

PLOT PLAN & SITE PLAN

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix C-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX C

GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE


Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 C-2 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

SCR PERFORMANCE TESTS AND PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES

1. GUARANTEES

The Seller shall guarantee performance of the SCR in accordance with the test procedures set forth herein. The Seller shall correct, at the Seller’s expense, Equipment that does not meet the specified guarantees due to reasons caused by the Seller.

1.1.1 EMISSIONS

The Seller shall guarantee emissions of the SCR/CO system in accordance certified CEMS monitoring equipment. The Seller shall correct, at the Seller’s expense, Equipment that does not meet the specified guarantees due to reasons caused by the Seller.

The Seller is responsible for providing an SCRNOx and CO catalysts systems such that stack emissions will remain in compliance with the emissions guarantees as stated herein. The stack emissions shall remain in compliance at all combustion turbine loads from 60% to 100% of base load operation within shown in Appendix A as well as the Not-to-Exceed operating cases shown in Table EDR at any site ambient condition from minimum to maximum.

The Seller is responsible for meeting the emission requirements below on a 1-hour running average basis.

Constituent Seller’s Emissions Guarantees

ppmvd lb/hr

NOx 2.5 ppmvd corrected to 15% O2 on a 1-hour running average basis, excluding startups

20.83 lb/hr on a 1-hour running average basis

CO 2.0 ppmvd corrected to 15% O2 on a 1-hour running average basis


VOC as CH4 1.0 ppmvd corrected to 15% O2 on a 1-hour running average basis


NH3 Slip 10.0 ppmvd corrected to 15% O2 on a 1-hour running average basis Not Applicable

SO2 to SO3 Conversion Rate

40% combined across NOx and CO catalyst Not Applicable

Seller’s Emissions Guarantees shall be based upon the following combustion turbine exhaust data given in Appendix Aemissions.:

o NOx: 9.0 ppmvd corrected to 15% O2 o CO: 4.0 ppmvd corrected to 15% O2 o VOC as CH4: 1.0 ppmvd corrected to 15% O2 o Combustion turbine emissions are based on the test methods as outlined in the Siemens

Emissions Guarantee Data Sheet in Appendix L. o Seller’s guarantees are based on operating the combustion turbine between 60% and 100% load.


o NO2 is not less than 50% of total NOx at the CO catalyst outlet. Ammonia slip requirement shall be in accordance with the emissions guarantees.

VOC emissions are defined as total hydrocarbons excluding methane and ethane and are expressed in terms of methane.

Seller shall not be responsible for start-up emissions when post combustion air pollution control equipment is not able to be in operation. Seller shall be responsible for start-up emissions when post combustion air pollution control equipment is in operation and the SCR catalyst temperature is greater than the minimum catalyst temperature required for ammonia injection.

2.1.2 GAS-SIDE PRESSURE DROP

Total pressure drop is defined as the static gas side pressure loss from the SCR ductwork inlet to the exhaust stack outlet, including but not limited to the inlet duct, distribution grid or flow straightening device, CO catalyst Bay, NOxSCR catalyst, and exhaust stack. The total pressure drop corrected to the guarantee pointcase volumetric flowconditions shall not exceed 9 inches w.cthe value shown in the Special Conditions. No test tolerance or uncertainty will be applied. Any increased total pressure drop higher than the guaranteed value shall be considered a failure and the Seller shall pay liquidated damages as described in the Special Conditions. The guarantee case is Case 1 as denoted in Appendix A. The SCR stack temperature will be measured utilizing a stack traverse at or near the stack outlet. The stack traverse shall be supplied by Seller. The total pressure drop corrected to the guarantee point volumetric flow shall not exceed 9 inches w.c. 3.1.3 AUXILIARY POWER LOADCONSUMPTION The Seller shall guarantee an a maximum auxiliary power consumption loadconsumption of not more than 1,350 kW as defined in the Special Conditions for each SCR/CO systemall of the Equipment (i.e. for each unit, with there being a total of four (4) units) at the Base Designguarantee case conditions. The auxiliary power load shall mean the aggregate of the SCR/CO system loads. Any increased auxiliary power consumption higher than the guaranteed value shall be considered a failure and the Seller shall pay liquidated damages as described in the Special Conditions. 4.1.4 NOISE The Seller’s eEquipment shall maintain the following guaranteed noise levels during all modes of operation.

Far Field Noise Guarantees:


The sound from the SCR exhaust stacks shall not exceed 52 dB(A) per unit at a distance of 400 feet and elevation of five (5) feet. The sound from the SCR/CO system, (including SCR ductingcasing, eEquipment (tempering air fans, tempering air ductwork, dilution air fans, etc.), transition and stack walls) shall not exceed 55 dB(A) per unit at a distance of 400 feet and elevation of five (5) feet.

Near Field Noise Guarantee:

The Seller shall provide a complete design that accomplishes 85 dB(A) free field noise at a distance of three (3) feet at five (5) feet above grade.See Section GR-A for near-field noise requirements. Noise Level Compliance Testing: Contractor will test actual sound levels in operation. Seller shall provide and install sound mitigation to bring the Equipment into compliance at Seller’s expense if field measurements show the Equipment exceeds the noise guarantee values listed. The Seller, as required to demonstrate compliance with the guarantees, shall perform the additional noise testing. The noise level compliance test will be performed by the Seller and witnessed by the Contractor as soon as practical after implementation of corrective measures. Noise testing shall be done in accordance with the following requirements.

a. Qualifications: An individual qualified in acoustical measurements, and enrolled as a full member of the Institute of Noise Control Engineering, shall conduct the test. The Seller shall develop a noise level test protocol for review and approval by the Contractor.

b. Procedures: The test procedures shall generally conform to those specified in (i) ANSI S-1.2: “Physical Measurement of Sound”; (ii) ANSI S1.13: “Methods for Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels”; (iii) ANSI B133.8: “Installation Sound Emission, Gas Turbine”; and (iv) ASTM E1014: “Standard Guide for Measurement of Outdoor A-Weighted Sound Levels.” The Contractor shall be notified at least ten (10) days before Seller initiates test. Measurements will be made in accordance with all federal, state, county, and local regulations. In the event a conflict arises between applicable requirements, the most stringent requirements will be applied.

c. Instrumentation and Measurement: All sound measurement Equipment shall conform to Type 1 tolerance limits of ANSI S-1.4: “General Purpose Sound Level Meters” and ANSI S-1.11: “Octave, One-half Octave and One-third Octave Band Filter Sets.” All sound measuring Equipment will have been calibrated by the manufacturer or approved laboratory within the previous twelve (12) month period, traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

All measurements shall be collected using the meter’s “Fast” time weighing. The maximum instantaneous (Lp) and the average energy-equivalent level (Leq) determined over one (1) minute intervals will be used for compliance assessment purposes.


d. Test Report: The Seller shall prepare an engineering test report, which includes all measurement data, conditions and calculations. Sound pressure level or sound intensity level measurement data shall be used to calculate the effective sound power levels of the Seller’s Equipment for assessment purposes. No correction or allowance for measurement uncertainty or testing tolerance shall be included in the calculations.

Remedies: Within sixty (60) days of continuous operation, the Seller shall mitigate any Equipment supplied under this Specification at Seller’s cost, where Equipment noise levels exceed limits specified under all operating characteristics of the SCR. If corrective measures are implemented and are considered by the Contractor to detrimentally affect the performance of any Equipment, any performance test previously conducted by the Contractor shall be repeated at the Seller’s cost. If any Equipment performance is degraded, the Seller shall take all necessary actions to re-establish the performance of any Equipment, at Seller’s cost.

END OF SECTION

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix D-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued For Final Proposal

APPENDIX D

ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix D-2 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

Required Access

Access shall be provided for systems and equipment as defined in the Access Matrix below. The following descriptions and matrix define the standard access provisions included in the proposal: Type 1: Room will be provided around the item to allow temporary access by way of an

owner provided personnel lift, step ladder, scaffolding, scissor lift, etc. No permanent platform or ladder will be provided. Level indicators and gauges will be located and displays sized so they can be read.

Type 2: Access to be provided by platform near item. Does not have a dedicated platform

since items in this category have the ability to be routed to other platforms nearby. Type 3: Requires a dedicated platform if the item is not accessible from grade.

Component Typical P&ID Designation *Access Type

Equipment 3 Analyzers AT 2 Analysis Probes/Sensors AS_, AE 1 Manual Valves V 1 Regulator & Control Valves _V 3 Flow Elements/Meters FE, FT Gauges/Indicators various 1 Hand Switches HS 2 Level Elements/Probes LE 1 Local Controllers FC,LC,PC,TC 2 Safety Relief Valve PSV, RSV 1 Process Switches various 1 Temperature Elements/Wells TE 1 Transmitters _T 2 Vibration Elements/Probes VE, VS 1

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix E-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX E

TAGGING REQUIREMENTS



Tagging Requirements

Seller shall use the following formats for the initial P&ID tagging of supplied instrumentation and control valves. Tagging will be updated by the Engineer Contractor as part of the shop drawing review process.

Control Valve and Instrument Tagging Format

Tag Number Format: UU-EEEE-PPPXXX example of 1A-PT-10100202002 UU = Unit Number – A one two (2) digit code based on the number of units supplied on the

project. The example’s designation of 1A indicates a device on unit 1A. Unit codes: 1A: Combustion Turbine Unit, SCR Unit 1Z: Non-Unit Specific System EEEE = Equipment Code – A code based on the Instrument Identification Table

included as a part of this Appendix. The example’s designation of PT indicates a Pressure Transmitter. The code may have up to 4 digits. Listed below are the codes for actuated valves (either 2 or 3 digits).

PPP = P&ID Number – A three digit code based on the following systems: 101 020-029 = High Pressure Steam 102 = Intermediate Pressure Steam 103 = Reheat Steam 104 = Low Pressure Steam 105 = Flue Gas 106 = Blowdown 107 through 109 = Ammonia 110 through 112 = Duct Burner 210-219 = Flue Gas 780-784 = Aqueous Ammonia

The example above shows a designation of 101 indicating a device in the High Pressure Steam system.

XXX = Sequence Number – A three digit code that is to be unique for each type of device

depicted on the P&ID. The example’s designation of 002 indicates the second Pressure Transmitter in the High Pressure Steam System. Control valves and instrumentation in the same control loop shall make use of the same sequence number.

Actuated Valve Identification

“FCV” – Actuated modulating valve based on flow “LCV” – Actuated modulating valve based on level “PCV” – Actuated modulating valve based on pressure “TCV” – Actuated modulating valve based on temperature


“YCV” – Actuated modulating valve based on other (includes jogging motor-operated valves)

“FV” – Actuated open/close valve based on flow “LV” – Actuated open/close valve based on level “PV” – Actuated open/close valve based on pressure “TV” – Actuated open/close valve based on temperature

“YV” – Actuated open/close valve based on other (includes motor-operated valves)

Instrument Identification Table


Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix F-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX F

COMBUSTION TURBINE EXHAUST FLANGE


Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix G-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX G

COMBUSTION TURBINE EXHAUST VELOCITY PROFILES

Siemens Power Generation, Inc. Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document as well as utiliza-tion of its contents and communication thereof to others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

H30-K5314-X-X-7600 Bericht, engl. 2004-01 D97 C:\DOCUME~1\JACOB~1.ALB\LOCALS~1\Temp\DGTRP-2008-000159_REV_C.doc

Goo

ds la

bele

d w

ith "

AL � N

" ar

e su

bjec

t to

Eur

opea

n or

Ger

man

ex

port

aut

horiz

atio

n w

hen

bein

g ex

porte

d ou

t of

the

EU

. G

oods

la

bele

d w

ith "

EC

CN

� N

" ar

e su

bjec

t to

US

ree

xpor

t au

thor

iza-

tion.

Eve

n w

ithou

t a

labe

l, or

with

lab

el "

AL:

N"

or "

EC

CN

:N",

au

thor

izat

ion

may

be

requ

ired

due

to t

he f

inal

whe

reab

outs

and

pu

rpos

e fo

r whi

ch th

e go

ods

are

to b

e us

ed.

Ref. (Department/Year/Serial No.)

Technical Report DGTRP-2008-000159 (Rev C) Subject/Title Place Date

SGT6-5000F Single-Piece Exhaust Flow Profile

Orlando 2008-09-10 Author(s) Department Tel. Signature

S. Xia W. Cai

PE125 1-407-736-2924 SAP/CPDM

Project

Signature for Release by Dept. Concerned (for Contents, Handling, Distribution)

Signature for External Release by Sales & Marketing Dept. (Not Required for Approval Documents)

Proprietary Class Confidential Export Classification

*) AL: ECCN:

Proj.-Code UA or DCC Contents Code Doc. Ident. No. Doc Type Doc Part Version

DGTRP-2008-000159 RPT 000 C

Summary*) Pages of Text:

59 Appendices:

Abstract

This report documents CFD simulation of the flow profile on the single-piece exhaust configuration at 100% load, 70% load, and 50% load operation at 15°C [59°F], 7°C [44.6°F], -20.6°C [-5°F], and 48.9°C [120°F] ambient temperature. In addition, the flow profile for 50% load operation at 15°C [59°F] with HP bleed injected into the exhaust through HP and LP ports is also documented. There is a HRSG shape behind the turbine, but all of the internal components of the HRSG are not mod-eled, it is just a shape to allow the flow to propagate downstream. All of the geometry shown in "CFD Model" is open duct with no internal features. The CFD prediction of the flow profile in this report is for reference only and should be used appropriately. Furthermore, the information pro-vided in this document is NOT for guarantee under any conditions.

*) In Technical Reports add key words (max. 12) at the end of the Summary and enter Export Classification

Distribution (add "f.i.o.", if only Summary is distributed for information): Index Vers. Date Page(s) Initials of Author(s)

Initials for Release

PE12 John Xia SAP/CPDM

PE122 Joshua Kovac SAP/CPDM

PE12 Phillip Brown SAP/CPDM

PE122 Francisco Dovali

PE121 Weidong Cai

PE125 Sherry Xia

PE142 Douglas Hintz

PE141 Ali Moradian

Report No.: DGTRP-2008-000159 (Rev C) Page: 2 of 59

Proprietary Class Confidential

Siemens AG . Power Generation, Inc. Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document as well as utiliza-tion of its contents and communication thereof to others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3

2.0 CFD MODEL ................................................................................................................... 4

3.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT 15°C [59°F] .................................................................... 5 3.1. 100% load ....................................................................................................................... 5 3.2. 70% load ......................................................................................................................... 9 3.3. 50% load ....................................................................................................................... 13

4.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT 7°C [44.6°F] ................................................................. 17 4.1 100% load ..................................................................................................................... 17 4.2 70% load ....................................................................................................................... 21 4.3 50% load ....................................................................................................................... 25

5.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT -20.6°C [-5°F] ............................................................... 29 5.1 100% load ..................................................................................................................... 29 5.2 70% load ....................................................................................................................... 33 5.3 50% load ....................................................................................................................... 37

6.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT 48.9°C [120°F] ............................................................. 41 6.1 100% load ..................................................................................................................... 41 6.2 70% load ....................................................................................................................... 45 6.3 50% load ....................................................................................................................... 49

7.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT 15°C [59°F], 50% LOAD, WITH HP BLEED INJECTED INTO THE EXHAUST THROUGH BOTH HP AND LP PORTS ................... 53

APPENDIX A -- CFD DATA FILES ................................................................................................ 59





1.0 INTRODUCTION

This report documents CFD simulation of the flow profile on the single-piece exhaust configuration at 100% load, 70% load, and 50% load operation at 15°C [59°F] , 7°C [44.6°F], -20.6°C [-5°F], and 48.9°C [120°F] ambient temperature. In addition, the flow profile for 50% load operation at 15°C [59°F] with HP bleed injected into the exhaust through HP and LP ports is also documented. Sin-gle-piece exhaust configuration is used in SGT6-5000F(3) (from engine shop order number 37A8229 and later) and SGT6-5000F(4). The CFD is based on model of the engine exhaust with a HRSG shape downstream which contains no internal features.

The CFD model predicts the average exhaust temperature at the location indicated in Figure 2.0-1 with up to10ºC (18ºF) deviation from the average exhaust temperature limit due to model accuracy.

The CFD prediction of the flow profile in this report is for reference only and should be used appro-priately. Furthermore, the information provided in this document is NOT for guarantee under any conditions.





2.0 CFD MODEL The engine outline with single-piece exhaust is shown in Figure 2.0-1. Data Plane is located at the round-to-square section exit.

FIGURE 2.0-1 Location of the Data Plane

CFD Geometry is shown in Figure 2.0-2.

Inlet of CFD model

Data Plane shown in this report

(Vx)

y

xz

(Vy)

(Vz)

CCFFDD MMooddeell AAxxiiss DDeeffiinniittiioonn

Axial velocity based on looking with flow away from the gas turbine

Inlet of CFD model


Flange-to-Flange Length = 5116 mm (201.4 inch)

Exhaust thermal couple plane. Average exhaust tempera-ture limit is 1200 ºF (649 ºC)





FIGURE 2.0-2 CFD Model

3.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT 15°C [59°F]

3.1. 100% load CFD predicted exhaust profile at 100% load is shown on Figures 3.1-1 through 3.1-4.

Figure 3.1-1





Figure 3.1-2





Figure 3.1-3





Figure 3.1-4





3.2. 70% load

CFD predicted exhaust profile at 70% load is shown on Figures 3.2-1 through 3.2-4.

Figure 3.2-1





Figure 3.2-2





Figure 3.2-3





Figure 3.2-4





3.3. 50% load


Figure 3.3-1





Figure 3.3-2





Figure 3.3-3





Figure 3.3-4





4.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT 7°C [44.6°F]

4.1 100% load CFD predicted exhaust profile at 100% load is shown on Figures 4.1-1 through 4.1-4.

Figure 4.1-1





Figure 4.1-2





Figure 4.1-3





Figure 4.1-4






Figure 4.2-1





Figure 4.2-2





Figure 4.2-3





Figure 4.2-4






Figure 4.3-1





Figure 4.3-2





Figure 4.3-3





Figure 4.3-4





5.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT -20.6°C [-5°F]


Figure 5.1-1





Figure 5.1-2





Figure 5.1-3





Figure 5.1-4






Figure 5.2-1





Figure 5.2-2





Figure 5.2-3





Figure 5.2-4





5.3 50% load


Figure 5.3-1





Figure 5.3-2





Figure 5.3-3





Figure 5.3-4





6.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT 48.9°C [120°F]

6.1 100% load


Figure 6.1-1





Figure 6.1-2





Figure 6.1-3





Figure 6.1-4





6.2 70% load


Figure 6.2-1





Figure 6.2-2





Figure 6.2-3





Figure 6.2-4






Figure 6.3-1





Figure 6.3-2





Figure 6.3-3





Figure 6.3-4





7.0 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AT 15°C [59°F], 50% LOAD, WITH HP BLEED INJECTED INTO THE EXHAUST THROUGH HP AND LP PORTS

The HP and LP ports connection to the exhaust are shown in Figure 7.0-1.

Figure 7.0-1

FIGURE 2.0-1 Location of the Data Plane

Inlet of CFD model


Flange-to-Flange Length = 5116 mm (201.4 inch)

Exhaust thermal couple plane. Average exhaust tempera-ture limit is 1200 ºF (649 ºC)

HP port

LP port LP port

HP port

Inlet of CFD model

Data plane shown in this report





CFD predicted exhaust profile at the data plane is shown on Figures 7.0-2 through 7.0-6.

Figure 7.0-2





Figure 7.0-3





Figure 7.0-4





Figure 7.0-5





Figure 7.0-6

The cold spots in the temperature profile at the data plane are caused by the injection of the bleed air. However, at the HRSG inlet location, the temperature variation within the plane is much smaller due to the mixing of the flow.





APPENDIX A -- CFD DATA FILES

The CFD data file for the single-piece exhaust flow profile at 100% load, 70% load, and 50% load operation at 15°C [59°F] ambient temperature is attached below.

��

The CFD data file for the single-piece exhaust flow profile at 100% load, 70% load, and 50% load operation at 7°C [44.6°F] ambient temperature is attached below.

��

The CFD data file for the single-piece exhaust flow profile at 100% load, 70% load, and 50% load operation at -20.6°C [-5°F] ambient temperature is attached below.

��

The CFD data file for the single-piece exhaust flow profile at 100% load, 70% load, and 50% load operation at 48.9°C [120°F] ambient temperature is attached below.

��

The CFD data file for the single-piece exhaust flow profile at 50% load operation at 15°C [59°F] ambient temperature with both HP and LP bleed on is attached below.

��

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix H-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX H

PRELIMINARY SCR & STACK NOISE SPECIFICATION

Maximum Equipment Sound Power/Sound Pressure Levels for the Marsh Landing Generating StationOctave band limits are provided for guideline purposes only.

Octave Band Center Frequency, (Hertz)31.0 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 A-Weight

SCR Casing

SCR Casing SPL at 400 Feet 86 68 65 56 51 38 34 42 16 55

Octave Band Center Frequency, (Hertz)31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 A-Weight

SCR Stack Exhaust PWL Per Unit 140 120 111 108 103 102 89 90 76 107

Hemispherical Divergence: 400 ft -50 -50 -50 -50 -50 -50 -50 -50 -50Atmospheric Absorption: 400 ft 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -1 -3 -1190 Degree Directivity: -2 -3 -4 -6 -8 -10 -12 -14 -16

SCR Stack Exhaust SPL at 400 Feet 88 67 57 52 45 41 26 23 -1 52

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix I-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX I

COMPONENT AND CT EXHAUST SOUND POWER LEVELS

SourceNumber Description 31.5 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K A-Weighted

1 GT Exhaust Diffuser & Expansion Joint - Each 120 115 108 108 105 101 97 97 79 1072 GT Inlet Duct Wall Radiated - Unlagged - Each 105 102 100 91 92 100 97 95 92 104

3GT Inlet Filter House - Overhead Inlet, Pad Filter With

Evaporative Cooler - Each Note #8 118 113 109 101 82 84 78 90 93 994 GT Fuel Gas Systems - Each 104 100 89 81 80 86 88 91 89 965 GT Generator, OAC - Each 109 117 107 96 89 87 88 85 76 976 Unenclosed Lube Oil Package - Each GT 99 102 99 97 98 99 99 96 89 1047 GT Enclosure Walls/Roof Radiated - Each 93 94 86 77 70 74 75 67 57 808 GT Enclosure Air Inlet Vents - Total Each GT 89 95 84 80 73 71 76 77 83 859 GT Enclosure Air Discharge Vents - Total Each GT 91 96 88 84 75 74 74 73 78 83

10 Rotor Air Cooler - 1 X 100% Fin Fan - Each 107 111 102 96 94 89 85 83 79 9611 Lube Oil Cooler - 2 X 50% Fin Fan - Each 113 107 104 101 100 96 104 91 83 106

Please be advised that the above estimated Sound Power Levels are qualified as follows:

Preliminary Equipment Configuration

1. This transmittal contains information submitted in confidence and is to be used for the acoustical modeling purpose for which it is intended. This information may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the written authorization of Siemens Power Generation, but may be submitted to the customer's consultants for acoustical modeling provided that such parties agree in writing to protect the Sound Power Level information and to keep it confidential.

Table 1Mirant Contra Costa Project

SGT6-5000F(4) Equipment Only Gas Turbines For Simple Cycle Project

March 12, 2008

Estimated Sound Power Levels For Major Noise Sources, dB re 1 picowattOctave Band Center Frequency in Hz

8. The GT inlet filter PWLs given are intended to represent the ESTIMATED overall sound emissions from a SGT6-5000F gas turbine inlet filter house equipped with pad filters and evaporative cooler, Base acoustical design inlet duct silencer, and with no other acoustical upgrades applied.

5. Siemens Power Generation reserves the right to modify any of the design particulars of any component within the Siemens Power Generation scope of supply. Such modifications may affect the individual Sound Power Levels given, however, the average far field sound level design basis would be unchanged.6. The Sound Power Levels are given on a per unit basis, where applicable, and as such any analytical acoustical model must consider the additive effects of the sound level contributions from multiple component sound sources.

2. The Sound Power Levels given do NOT incorporate any acoustical design margins, measurement uncertainties, barrier effects including reflectivity, or directivity factors and as such are representative of analytical modeling inputs utilized to predict estimated sound levels at far field positions with NO margins. The application of reasonable and customary design margins consistent with industry practice and experience must be applied to these, or any other estimated sound power levels, when used as the basis for acoustical modeling of a combined cycle facility.

4. The Sound Power Levels are applicable to base load operation with ULN combustors on natural gas that complies with the latest revisions to the Siemens Gas Fuel Specification and are exclusive of transients, start-up and shutdown and any other off normal and/or emergency conditions which will result in increased sound power levels for some sound sources.

3. The Sound Power Levels given are estimated only and accordingly, Siemens Power Generation has no warranties or representations in its use. The recipient may utilize this information strictly at its own risk.

7. The Sound Power Levels given are applicable only to equipment within the Siemens Power Generation scope of supply. Sound sources associated with the Facility that are not within the Siemens Power Generation scope of supply must be considered in any analytical acoustical model of the overall facility.

Table 2

Sound Power Level, dB re 1 picowattOctave Band Center Frequency, Hz

Description 31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)

Gas Turbine Exhaust Sound Power Levels(* Subject to below qualifying caveats )

145 144 146 145 146 145 142 144 129 150

* Please be advised that the above Sound Power Levels are qualified as follows:

9. Siemens reserves the right to modify any of the estimated sound power levels of any component within the Siemens scope of supply, consistent with contractual guarantees, due to updated vendor design information, results from further field testing, revised measurement techniques, and/or revised equipment. Such modifications may affect the sound power levels given above, even though the near field A-weighted average sound level would be unchanged.

3. The Estimated Exhaust Sound Power Levels are at the exhaust flange of the gas turbine.4. The Sound Power Levels are applicable to gas turbine operation with Ultra Low NOx (ULN) combustors on natural gas fuel that complies with the latest revision to the Siemens Gas Fuel Specification. 5. The Sound Power Levels given are for steady state base load conditions and do not include transients, startup, shutdown, and other off normal, or emergency conditions.6. The Sound Power Levels given are estimated only and accordingly, Siemens has no warranties or representations in its use. The recipient may utilize this information strictly at its own risk.

SGT6-5000F(4) Equipment Only Gas Turbines For Simple Cycle ProjectMirant Contra Costa Project

7. The Sound Power Level data provided is not intended to be used to revise, alter, modify, or in any way add to the A-weighted sound level guarantee that has previously been offered.8. These Sound Power Levels do NOT incorporate any acoustical design margins or measurement uncertainties and as such are representative of analytical modeling inputs utilized to predict estimated sound levels at far field positions with NO margins. Appropriate margins consistent with industry practice should be prudently applied in any acoustical modeling utilizing these Sound Power Levels.

Estimated SGT6-5000F(4) Exhaust Sound Power LevelsMarch 11, 2008

1. The PWLs are given on a "per unit" basis and as such any analytical acoustical model must consider the additive effects of the contributions from any other gas turbines and their associated components. 2. This Sound Power Level transmittal is proprietary to Siemens. It is submitted in confidence and is to be used solely for the purpose for which it is intended. This information may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the written authorization of Siemens.

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix J-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX J

ADDITIONAL COMBUSTION TURBINE INFORMATION

Estimated Startup and Shutdown EmissionsSGT6-5000F(4) in Simple Cycle Operation at 59 °F for a "Fast" Startup and Shutdown on Natural Gas

~ Time(minutes) NOX CO VOC PM

Startup on Natural Gas 11 14 232 12 2Shutdown on Natural Gas 6 12 128 6 1

General Notes1.) All data is ESTIMATED, NOT guaranteed and is for ONE unit.2.) Gas fuel must be in compliance with Siemens fuel specifications.3.) Emissions are at the exhaust stack outlet and exclude ambient air contributions.4.) Emissions are based on new and clean conditions.5.) Please be advised that the information contained in this transmittal has been prepared and is being transmitted per customer request specifically for information purposes only. Such information is not intended to be used for evaluation of plant design and/or performance relative to contractual commitments. Data included in any permit application or Environmental Impact Statement is strictly the customer's responsibility. Siemens is available to review permit application data upon request.

Startup Emissions Notes1.) Estimated startup (SU) data are from gas turbine (GT) ignition through 100% load.2.) Estimated SU and shutdown (SD) data are based on the assumed times noted above and will be higher for longer times.3.) Estimated SU and SD data are based on the ambient temperature noted in the table and will be higher at lower ambient temperatures.4.) "Fast" SU assumes 5 minutes from turning gear to synchronization.5.) SD assumes 100% load to FSNL with no cooldown at FSNL.6.) Continuous Emissions Monitoring System (CEMS) may calculate emissions differently.7.) Operator actions do not extend startup or shutdown.8.) It is assumed that there is no restriction from the interconnected utility for loading the GT from synchronization to 100% load within the SU times considered.

ModeEmissions (Total Pounds per Event)

Siemens Energy, Inc. Proprietary Information 3/22/2010

Estimated Part Load Emissions Simple Cycle / Ultra Low NO X Combustor Sep. 18, 2009 SGen6-1000A (Static) / 0.90 Power Factor

CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 3 CASE 4 CASE 5 CASE 6 CASE 7 CASE 8 CASE 9 CASE 10 CASE 11FUEL TYPE Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural Gas Natural GasLOAD LEVEL BASE 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0%NET FUEL HEATING VALUE, Btu/lbm (LHV) 20,981 20,981 20,981 20,981 20,981 20,981 20,981 20,981 20,981 20,981 20,981GROSS FUEL HEATING VALUE, Btu/lbm (HHV) 23,299 23,299 23,299 23,299 23,299 23,299 23,299 23,299 23,299 23,299 23,299AMBIENT DRY BULB TEMPERATURE, °F 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0AMBIENT WET BULB TEMPERATURE, °F 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5AMBIENT RELATIVE HUMIDITY, % 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60AMBIENT PRESSURE, psia 14.696 14.696 14.696 14.696 14.696 14.696 14.696 14.696 14.696 14.696 14.696COMPRESSOR INLET TEMPERATURE, °F 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0 59.0FUEL FLOW, lbm/hr 86,227 78,834 72,452 65,755 59,088 52,561 45,957 39,192 32,283 27,114 30,229HEAT INPUT, MMBtu/hr (LHV) 1,809 1,654 1,520 1,380 1,240 1,103 964 822 677 569 634HEAT INPUT, MMBtu/hr (HHV) 2,009 1,837 1,688 1,532 1,377 1,225 1,071 913 752 632 704

GT EXHAUST GAS CHARACTERISTICS:EXHAUST TEMPERATURE, °F 1,085 1,085 1,085 1,085 1,085 1,085 1,085 1,085 956 813 658EXHAUST FLOW, lbm/hr 3,981,879 3,683,154 3,433,163 3,186,185 2,938,535 2,693,580 2,439,659 2,171,248 2,131,550 2,126,641 2,129,991EXHAUST FLOW, MACFM 2.638 2.440 2.274 2.110 1.945 1.782 1.613 1.435 1.288 1.153 1.015

GT EXHAUST GAS COMPOSITION (% BY VOLUME):OXYGEN 12.52 12.61 12.73 12.90 13.10 13.32 13.57 13.87 14.96 15.87 15.32CARBON DIOXIDE 3.75 3.71 3.66 3.58 3.49 3.39 3.28 3.14 2.65 2.24 2.48WATER 8.39 8.31 8.21 8.05 7.87 7.67 7.45 7.18 6.20 5.39 5.87NITROGEN 74.46 74.49 74.53 74.59 74.66 74.74 74.82 74.93 75.31 75.62 75.43ARGON 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.89 0.88MOLECULAR WEIGHT 28.38 28.38 28.39 28.40 28.41 28.42 28.44 28.46 28.52 28.57 28.54

GT EXHAUST EMISSIONS (Based on USEPA Test Methods):NOX, ppmvd @ 15% O2 9 9 9 9 9 15 45 45 45 50 30NOX, lbm/hr as NO2 68 62 57 52 46 69 180 153 126 118 79CO, ppmvd @ 15% O2 4 4 4 4 10 150 700 1,200 1,200 2,000 2,800CO, lbm/hr 18 17 15 14 31 418 1,704 2,491 2,049 2,863 4,470VOC, ppmvd @ 15% O2 as CH4 1 1 1 1 1 30 140 240 240 400 560VOC, lbm/hr as CH4 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.8 48 194 284 233 326 509PARTICULATES, lbm/hr 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

NOTES:- All data is estimated and not guaranteed.- Exhaust volumetric flow rate is at the exit to the ECONOPAC™ stack.- IGV schedule may be adjusted during commissioning. Part load performance will be adjusted accordingly.- Gas fuel composition is 98% CH4, 0.6% C2H6, 1.4% N2 and 0.2 grains of Sulfur per 100 SCF.- Gas fuel must be in compliance with the Siemens Gas Fuel Specification.- Average temperature of the gas fuel is 59 °F.- Sensible Heat of the fuel is not included in the calculated Heat Input values.- Emissions flow rates are calculated based on the maximum achievable exhaust flow. For further details on flow rate calculation contact Siemens.- VOC emissions consist of total hydrocarbons excluding methane and ethane and are expressed in terms of methane (CH4).- Particulates are per US EPA Method 5/202 (front and back half).- Emissions exclude ambient air contributions.- Please be advised that the information contained in this transmittal has been prepared and is being transmitted per customer request specifically For information purposes only. Such information is not intended to be used for evaluation of plant design and/or performance relative to contractual commitments. Data included in any permit application or Environmental Impact Statement are strictly the customer's responsibility. Siemens is available to review permit application data upon request.

Generic SGT6-5000F(4) Data

Siemens Energy, Inc. Proprietary Information

Report No.: DGTRP-2008-000284 Page: 8 of 9



H30-K5314-X-X-7600 Bericht, engl. 2004-01 D97D:\SEAL-CONV\data\dpf\dpfjob200806262301470408\DGTRP-2008-000284_Generic_SGT6-5000F_Startup_Shutdown_Profiles.doc

4.2 SGT6-5000F(4) startup, natural gas, fast start, combined cycle Figure 6 shows a generic SGT6-5000F(4) startup profile for combined cycle application with natu-ral gas fuel using a fast-start schedule. The profile assumes a fast-start loading rate of 30 MW/min.

Temperature 518.7 R 288.2 K Rotor Speed 3600 rpm 60 HzPressure 14.696 psi 1.013 bar Exhaust Temperature 1581 R 878 KRelative Humidity 60 % 60 % Exhaust Flow 1119 lbm/s 508 kg/sElevation 0 ft 0 m Fuel Flow 24.5 lbm/s 11.1 kg/s

Ambient Conditions (ISO) Baseload Values (100%)

SGT6-5000F(4) Startup Profile - Natural Gas @ ISO

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700Time (s)

Perce

ntage

Exhaust Temp. (%)Exhaust Flow (%)Fuel Flow (%)Rotor Speed (%)Load (%)

Combined Cycle Application - Fast Start

Exhaust Temperature

Exhaust Flow

Fuel Flow

Rotor Speed

Load

Figure 6: Generic SGT6-5000F(4) startup, natural gas, fast start, combined cycle

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix K-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX K

INSULATION MATERIAL AND THICKNESS

[This appendix has been added since the last revision]


Insulation Material and Thickness

Insulation on high temperature surfaces shall conform to the following table.

Service Conditions Insulation Equipment and irregular surfaces with normal operating surface temperatures over 140°F

Glass fiber or mineral fiber blanket assemblies

Pipe and tubing with normal operating surface temperatures over 140°F, including fittings, and heat traced lines

High density mineral fiber. Calcium silicate in foot traffic areas.

Valves and pipe specialties with normal operating surface temperatures over 140°F, not including valve operators

Glass fiber blanket assemblies or high density mineral fiber

Valve operators outside normal insulation thickness for piping

None

Ductwork, hot casings, and flat surfaces which are accessible to personnel or which require control of heat losses and have normal operating surface temperatures over 140°F

Mineral fiber block or board

The thickness of the insulation shall be such that the outside lagging surface temperature is not over 140°F at an 80°F ambient temperature with a wind speed of 3 mph. Insulation for personnel protection shall be supplied on surfaces above 140°F within three (3) feet of walkways, ladders and platforms.

For operating temperatures above 650°F insulation shall be installed in two layers with staggered joints. Further, thicknesses shall be in no case less than the equivalent thickness of those shown assuming 8-lbs/CF density.

All vertical pipe runs on pipe six (6) inches and larger shall have support rings at 10-foot spacing.


Temperature Range (Deg. F)

Pipe Size (inch) 100-

199

200-

299

300-

399

400-

499

500-

599

600-

699

700-

799

800-

899

900-

999

1000

-109

9

1½ & Smaller 1 1½ 1½ 2 2 2 2 2½ 2½ 3½ 2 1 1½ 1½ 2 2 3 3 3½ 4 4 2½ 1 1½ 1½ 2 2 3 3 3½ 4 3½ 3 1 1½ 1½ 2 2 3 3 3½ 3½ 4½ 3½ 1 1½ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3 4 4 4 4 1 1½ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3 4 4 4½ 5 1 1½ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3 4 4 5 6 1 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 4 5 5½ 8 1½ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 4 5 5½ 10 1½ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 4½ 5½ 6 12 & larger 1½ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 4½ 5½ 6

Lagging Material and Thickness

Ductwork, Breeching, Exposed Drums, Field Erected Tanks, and Deaerator (as applicable)

0.032” embossed, box ribbed aluminum, weather-proofed appropriately.

Piping 0.016” embossed or smooth aluminum.

Valves and Fittings 0.016” embossed or smooth aluminum.

Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix L-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX L

EMISSIONS GUARANTEE DATA SHEET


Marsh Landing Generating Station KPE Project No. 2009-019 Appendix M-1 Spec. 110/E/Issued for Final Proposal

APPENDIX M

APPROVED SUB-SUBCONTRACTORS


G-1 May 17, 2010

ATTACHMENT XX

APPROVED SUB-SUBCONTRACTORS

Contractor and Seller have approved the following Sub-subcontractors for the performance of the work specified with respect to each such Sub-subcontractor. Seller may solicit bids from, and enter into a subcontract with, any of the following Sub-subcontractors; provided that Seller shall, at a minimum, solicit bids from those Sub-subcontractors marked with an asterisk (*) with respect to the portion of work identified for such Sub-subcontractors. Seller’s selection of any Sub-subcontractor in this Attachment XX, including those marked with an asterisk, does not relieve Seller of any obligations under the Agreement.

PORTION OF THE WORK APPROVED SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUB-SUBCONTRACTORS

Mechanical

Air Dryers • Airtek • Gas Drying, Inc. • Hankison, Kemp • Lectro Dryer • Pneumatic Products • ZEKS

Control Valves • Control Components Inc. (*) • Copes-Vulcan • Fisher • Valtek (*) • Yarway • Velan (*)

General Service Pumps • Aurora, B&G • Carver • ClydeWeir Pumps • Flowserve (*) • ITT-Goulds • Jackson • JCI • Johnston • Paco • Peerless • Sulzer Bingham (*)

�

G-2 May 17, 2010�


Shop Fabricated Tanks • Arrow Tank • Auxiliary Power Equipment Company • Boardman • Chattanooga Boiler & Tanks • Dixie Southern • Dixie Tank • Eaton • EDB • Heat Transfer Systems • JD Cousins • Matrix • Metacor • Metro Mfg. • Modern Welding • Alabama Metal Fabricators (*) • American Tank and Fabricating (*) • Titan (*)

Stack (Steel) • Barron • Braden Manufacturing • C&W Fabricators • Commonwealth Dynamics • Dixie Southern • G&H Acoustics • Higgot Kane • Pullman Power • Tulsa Combustion • Warren Environment • International Chimney

Electrical/Controls

Electronic Transmitters • Bailey • Fisher-Rosemount (*) • Johnson-Yokogawa (*) • Magnetrol (*) • Moore • Taylor

�

G-3 May 17, 2010�


Electrical Equipment Walk-in Enclosure • Atkinson/EPSI • BJ Silent • Electrical Power Products • GE • Koontz-Wagner • M&I Electric • Pederson Power Products • Philip Doyle • Lectrus • Pioneer • Powell (*) • Powercon • Square D • Tesla Power • Trachte

Motors - Medium Voltage • Federal Pacific • General Electric (*) • HICO • Hyundai • Louis Allis • Reliance (*) • Siemens • TECO-Westinghouse (*) • Toshiba • US Motors • WEG

Motor Control Centers (Low Voltage Load Centers)

• ABB (*) • Allen-Bradley (*) • Controlled Power • General Electric • Koontz-Wagner • Point Eight Power • Powell (*) • Power Line • Siemens • Square D (*) • Tianan

�

G-4 May 17, 2010�


Transformers (Low Voltage) • ABB • Areva • Ferranti Packard VA Tech (*) • Fortune • Hawker Siddeley • Heavy-Duty • HICO (*) • Howard Industries • Hyundai • Niagara • Pioneer • Square D • Tianan • Trafo • Vantran • WEG • Delta Star (*)

Valves - General Service (Cast Steel) • Bonney Forge Corp. • Conval Inc. • Copes-Vulcan • Crane / Pacific (*) • Edward/Vogt • Mogus • Newco Inc. • Tyco Valves & Controls LP • Velan • Weir Valves and Controls • William Powell Co. • Yarway • Zytech